JP5375463B2 - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

<P>PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably exhibiting the function of a trace means leaving a trace of an illegal act or the like being performed. <P>SOLUTION: A main control device 281 includes a board box 282 storing a main control board inside. The board box 282 is formed by combining a front side constitutive body 283 and a rear side constitutive body 284. A sticking base is formed by mutually overlapping a front side fixed base part 291 formed at the front side constitutive body 283 and a rear side fixed base part 292 formed at the rear side constitutive body 284. A breaking member 910 is mounted to the sticking base, and a seal 160 is stuck to the sticking base. The opening operation of the board box 282 is impeded by the seal 160. The breaking member 910 includes a breaking base part 911 breaking the seal 160, and an extension part leaving a trace at a different place from the breaking base part 911. <P>COPYRIGHT: (C)2011,JPO&amp;INPIT

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Pachinko gaming machines and gaming machines such as slot machines, CPU for executing game control process and the like, ROM for game control program is stored, RAM of various temporarily storing various data generated by the proceeding of the game, A control board on which electronic components are mounted is provided. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. the occurrence of fraud, etc. or have been reported.

In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed (see, for example, Patent Document 1) .

JP 2003-180917 A JP 2005-143641 A

However, there is still room for improvement in the fraud countermeasures as described above.

The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably taking countermeasures such as fraud.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The present invention
Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is, the trace means that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means for destroying the trace means by displacing in a predetermined direction from a predetermined initial position and releasing the inhibition state;
Fixing means for fixing the monitoring object and the release means;
With
The release means is
A destruction part that abuts the trace means by displacing in the specific direction and causes the trace means to break to release the inhibition state;
Trace providing means that is provided separately from the destruction part and leaves a trace that an external force is applied to the different part by contacting the different part from the destruction part by displacing in the specific direction,
Equipped with a,
The trace imparting means is provided at a position that does not overlap with the fixing means in a front view of a surface of the monitoring target on which the fixing means is provided .

Countermeasures such as fraud can be suitably performed .

The perspective view seen from the front which shows the structure of the pachinko machine in a 1st embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main structures of a game machine main body. The front view which shows the structure of a game board. The rear view which shows the structure of an inner frame. (A) The perspective view which shows the structure of a main controller unit, (b) The side view which shows the structure of a main controller unit. The disassembled perspective view which shows the structure of a main controller unit. (A) The perspective view which shows the structure of a main controller, (b) The side view which shows the structure of a main controller. The disassembled perspective view which looked at the main controller from the surface side. The disassembled perspective view which looked at the main controller from the back side. AA line sectional view of Drawing 7 (b). (A), (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the effect | action of the separation prevention by a prevention structure. (A) The front view which shows the structure of a seal seal, (b) The back view which shows the structure of a seal seal. Sectional drawing which shows the structure of a seal seal. The expansion perspective view which expands and shows the area | region where the seal seal was affixed in the main controller, and its periphery. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the seal seal | sticker in a sticking area | region. (A), (b) The perspective view of the cover member seen from each different direction. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the main controller. Sectional drawing of the part to which the cover member was attached in the main-control apparatus. The block diagram which shows the electrical constitution of a pachinko machine. Schematic of a game hall where many pachinko machines are installed. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the IC tag in 2nd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the IC tag in 3rd Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the IC tag in 4th Embodiment. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the structure which concerns on the IC tag in 5th Embodiment. The perspective view which shows the structure of the main controller in 6th Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the part in which the sealing seal | sticker was provided in the main controller. The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery. (A) The back view of the member for destruction, (b) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side. (A) The exploded perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery, (b) The side view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery. (A) The perspective view of a cover member, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in case the internal space of a board | substrate box is open | released. (A) The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows the sticking base and its periphery in 7th Embodiment, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the specific structure of a protection means. (A) The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the sticking base in 8th Embodiment, (b) The cross-sectional view of the sticking base and its periphery. (A) Perspective view of front side cover member, (b) Perspective view of back side cover member. (A) The perspective view which expands and shows the sticking base in 9th Embodiment, and its periphery, (b) The longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the specific structure of a protection means. (A) The perspective view which expands and shows the sticking base in 10th Embodiment, and its periphery, (b) The longitudinal cross-sectional view for demonstrating the specific structure of a protection means. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction in 11th Embodiment, (b), (c) The perspective view of the cover member in 11th Embodiment seen from a respectively different direction. (A) The perspective view which shows a cover member and its periphery in a main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery in a main controller. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction in 12th Embodiment, (b) The perspective view of the cover member in 12th Embodiment, (c) The exploded perspective view of the cover member in 12th Embodiment. The disassembled perspective view which expands and shows a sticking base and its periphery in a main controller. (A) The perspective view which shows a cover member and its periphery in a main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating operation | movement of the member for destruction in 13th Embodiment. (A), (b) The perspective view of the cover member in 13th Embodiment seen from a different direction. (A) The perspective view which shows the sticking base and its periphery in a main controller, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. The disassembled perspective view which shows the sticking base of the main control apparatus in 14th Embodiment, and its periphery. The disassembled perspective view which shows the sticking base and the member for destruction. (A) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the member for destruction is attached to the sticking base, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating rotation of the member for destruction. (A) The perspective view which shows the cover member of a main control apparatus, and its periphery, (b) The side view of the board | substrate box to which the cover member was attached. The disassembled perspective view which shows a sticking base and a cover member. (A), (b) The perspective view of the cover member seen from each different direction. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating 1st engagement. (A) The front view which shows a cover member and its periphery, (b) BB sectional drawing. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller in 15th Embodiment from the surface side. The partial exploded perspective view which looked at the main controller from the back side. The disassembled perspective view for demonstrating the structure of the part in which the sealing seal | sticker was provided in the main controller. (A) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the surface side, (b) The perspective view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side, (c) The back view of the member for destruction seen from the back surface side. The expansion perspective view which expands and shows the area | region where the seal seal was affixed in the main controller, and its periphery. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the attachment aspect of the member for destruction with respect to the board part for front side sticking. (A) The side view which expands and shows the sticking base and its periphery, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the seal seal | sticker in a sticking area | region. Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the member for destruction and a seal seal. (A) The perspective view of a cover member, (b) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that the cover member is attached to the board | substrate box. The cross-sectional view of the sticking base for demonstrating the attachment aspect of a cover member. (A)-(c) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating the procedure in the case of opening the internal space of a board | substrate box. (A)-(d) Explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that a seal seal is cut | disconnected. (A), (b) Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of the member for destruction. Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of an expansion area | region. Explanatory drawing which shows the modification of an expansion part.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, a first embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as a “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 as viewed from the front, and FIG. 2 is an exploded perspective view of a gaming machine main body 12 constituting the pachinko machine 10. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  The pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine body 12 that is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to be pivotable forward (openable and closable). . In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. The pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall by attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility. The outer frame 11 can also be formed of a metal such as synthetic resin or aluminum.

  A gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported on one side of the outer frame 11. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 1, an upper support bracket 21 is fixed to a connecting portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and the lower frame portion and the left frame in the outer frame 11 are further fixed. A lower support metal fitting 22 is provided at a connection portion with the portion. The upper support bracket 21 and the lower support bracket 22 constitute a support mechanism, and the gaming machine body 12 is rotatably supported with respect to the outer frame 11 by the support mechanism.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main body 12 is provided with a locking device 23 at its rotating tip, and when the gaming machine main body 12 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main body 12 is locked. The saddle member 24 of the device 23 is received by the saddle receiving portion provided on the inner side surface of the right frame portion of the outer frame 11, and the opening of the gaming machine main body 12 is prevented. On the other hand, the hook member 24 is received by the hook receiving portion of the outer frame 11 by performing the unlocking operation using the unlock key on the cylinder lock 25 provided exposed at the front surface of the pachinko machine 10. The state is released and the gaming machine body 12 can be released from the outer frame 11. The locking device 23 also has a function of locking an inner frame 13 and a front door frame 14 described later.

  The gaming machine main body 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 disposed in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack unit 15 disposed behind the inner frame 13. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main body 12 is supported so as to be rotatable (openable and closable) with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side as the rotation front end side (opening / closing front end side) in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is a rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is a rotation front end side (opening / closing front end). Side) and can be rotated forward. Further, the back pack unit 15 is supported by the inner frame 13 so as to be rotatable (openable and closable), and in the front view, the left side is the rotation base end side (opening / closing base end side) and the right side is the rotation front end side ( It can be rotated backward as the opening / closing tip side.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the gaming machine body 12 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is mainly composed of a resin base 31 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11. A substantially elliptical window hole 32 is formed at the center of the resin base 31. A game board 33 is detachably attached to the resin base 31. The game board 33 is made of plywood, and the game area formed on the front surface of the game board 33 is exposed to the front side of the inner frame 13 through the window hole 32 of the resin base 31.

  Here, the structure of the game board 33 is demonstrated based on FIG. The game board 33 has a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in the front-rear direction by being subjected to router processing. Each opening is provided with a general winning port 34, a variable winning device 35, an operating port 36, a through gate 37, a variable display unit 38, and the like. When a game ball enters the general winning opening 34, the variable winning device 35 and the operation opening 36, it is detected by a detection switch (not shown), and a predetermined number of winning balls are paid out based on the detection result. In addition, an out port 39 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 33, and game balls that have not entered various winning ports etc. are discharged from the game area through the out port 39. The game board 33 is provided with a large number of nails 40 for distributing and adjusting the falling direction of the game balls as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill.

  The variable display unit 38 is provided with a symbol display device 41 for variably displaying symbols with a winning at the operation port 36 as a trigger. The variable display unit 38 is provided with a center frame 42 so as to surround the symbol display device 41. A first specific lamp portion 43 and a second specific lamp portion 44 are provided on the center frame 42. Reservation lamp portions 45 and 46 are provided at the lower and upper portions of the center frame 42, respectively. The lower holding lamp unit 45 corresponds to the symbol display device 41 and the first specific lamp unit 43, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the operation port 36 is held up to four times, and the holding lamp unit 45 is turned on by The number of holds is displayed. The upper holding lamp unit 46 corresponds to the second specific lamp unit 44, and the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 37 is held up to four times, and the number of holdings is displayed by lighting the holding lamp unit 46. It is like that.

  The symbol display device 41 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by the display control device. On the symbol display device 41, for example, symbols are displayed side by side on the left, middle and right, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled up and down. When a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, a special gaming state (hereinafter referred to as a jackpot) occurs.

  In the first specific lamp unit 43 provided as a game result display unit (or a lottery result display unit), the emission color is switched in a predetermined order using a winning to the operation port 36 as a trigger, and a predetermined color is used. A jackpot is generated when the stop is displayed. Further, in the second specific lamp unit 44, the emission color is switched in a predetermined order triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 37, and when the stop color is displayed in a predetermined color, the operation port 36 is displayed. The accompanying electric accessory is opened for a predetermined time. The control of the first specific lamp unit 43 and the second specific lamp unit 44 is performed by a main controller described later.

  The variable winning device 35 is normally in a closed state in which a game ball cannot be won or difficult to win, and is switched to a predetermined open state in which a game ball is easy to win in the case of a big win. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 35, the variable winning device 35 is repeated with a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings as one round and a plurality of rounds (for example, 15 rounds) as an upper limit What is opened is common. The drive control of the variable winning device 35 is performed by a main control device described later.

  An inner rail portion 47 and an outer rail portion 48 are attached to the game board 33, and a guide rail is constituted by the inner rail portion 47 and the outer rail portion 48, and a game launched from the game ball launching mechanism 50. A ball is guided to the upper part of the game area. As shown in FIG. 2, the game ball launching mechanism 50 is attached below the window hole 32 in the resin base 31, and the handle device 59 provided on the front door frame 14 is operated to launch the game ball. Operation is performed.

  A front door frame 14 is provided so as to cover the entire front side of the inner frame 13. As shown in FIG. 1 and the like, the front door frame 14 is formed with a window portion 55 so that almost the entire game area can be viewed from the front. The window portion 55 has a substantially elliptical shape, and a window panel 56 is fitted therein. Although the window panel 56 is formed colorless and transparent by glass, it is not limited to this and may be formed colorless and transparent by a synthetic resin. Around the window 55, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided. In addition, at the upper left and upper right positions, speaker units are provided for outputting sound effects according to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 55 in the front door frame 14, an upper bulging portion 57 and a lower bulging portion 58 that bulge to the near side are provided side by side. An upper plate 57a that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulge portion 57, and a lower plate 58a that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulge portion 58. The upper plate 57a has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to a game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 58a has a function of storing game balls that are surplus in the upper tray 57a.

  Next, the configuration on the back side of the gaming machine main body 12 will be described. FIG. 4 is a rear view of the inner frame 13.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a main controller unit 61 and an audio lamp controller unit 65 are mounted on the back surface of the inner frame 13 (game board 33). Among these, the specific configuration of the main controller unit 61 will be described in detail later.

  The sound lamp control device unit 65 includes a sound lamp control device 66 and a mounting base 67, and the sound lamp control device 66 is mounted on the mounting base 67. The sound lamp control device 66 includes a sound lamp control board that controls sound and lamp display and control of a display control device (not shown) according to instructions from the main control device 92 mounted on the main control device unit 61. The lamp control board is housed in a board box 68 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 71, and a payout mechanism 72 and a control device assembly unit 73 are attached to the back pack 71. The back pack 71 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and protrudes rearward so as to cover a part of the main control device unit 61, the sound lamp control device unit 65, and the like, and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. A cover portion 75 is provided.

  The payout mechanism portion 72 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 75, and a tank 77 in which game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished, and a game stored in the tank 77. A payout device 78 for paying out balls. The game balls paid out from the payout device 78 are discharged to the upper plate 57a or the lower plate 58a through a payout passage (not shown) provided on the downstream side of the payout device 78. The payout mechanism 72 is mounted with a back pack substrate on which a main power supply of, for example, 24 volts AC is supplied and a power switch for performing a power ON / OFF operation is provided.

  The control device assembly unit 73 includes a payout control device 82 and a power source and launch control device 83. The payout control device 82 and the power supply / launch control device 83 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 82 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  The payout control device 82 is configured such that a payout control board for controlling the payout device 78 is accommodated in a substrate box. The power supply and launch control device 83 is configured such that a power supply and launch control board is housed in a board box, and predetermined power required by various control devices and the like is generated and output by the board, and further by the player Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle device 59 is performed. In addition, the pachinko machine 10 has a function for storing and storing various data, so that even if a power failure occurs, it can maintain the state at the time of the power failure and can return to the state at the time of the power failure when returning from the power failure. It is like that.

  Next, the configuration of the main controller unit 61 will be described with reference to FIGS. 5A is a perspective view of the main control unit 61, FIG. 5B is a side view of the main control unit 61, and FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the main control unit 61. FIG.

  The main control device unit 61 includes a synthetic resin mounting base 91, a main control device 92 mounted on the mounting base 91, and a cover member 93 that encloses a part of the main control device 92 from the outside. ing. The main controller unit 61 is mounted on the back surface of the game board 33 such that the mounting base 91 is sandwiched between the game board 33 and the main controller 92 and the main controller 92 faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. ing.

  As shown in FIG. 6, the mounting base 91 has a base portion 96 in which a mounting area 95 on which the main control device 92 is mounted is formed, and the base portion 96 can be rotated with respect to the back surface of the game board 33. And a support arm 97 to be supported by, and these are integrally formed.

  The support arm 97 is formed so as to extend to the game board 33 side from the surface opposite to the mounting region 95 in the base portion 96, and a shaft portion 98 is integrally formed at the distal end portion of the extension region. . The main controller unit 61 is supported on the game board 33 by the shaft 98 being supported in a rotatable manner with respect to the support fitting 99 provided on the back surface of the game board 33. A holding tool (not shown) that enables a holding operation and a holding releasing operation is provided at the end of the mounting base 91 opposite to the side on which the support arm 97 is formed. The holding tool is held by the game board 33 by performing a holding operation on the holding tool in a state where the mounting base 91 is disposed at the closed position where the opposite surface faces the back surface of the game board 33. The mounting base 91 is held. Further, when the holding release operation is performed on the holder, the mounting base 91 can be rotated toward the open position.

  Here, as described above, the support arm 97 is formed so as to extend to the game board 33 side from the surface opposite to the mounting region 95 in the base portion 96, and at the tip of the extension region, the shaft portion 98 is formed. Is provided, the base portion 96 and the game board 33 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance in a state where the mounting base 91 is disposed at the closed position. Further, the base portion 96 has a predetermined thickness dimension. Therefore, the main control device 92 mounted on the mounting base 91 is spaced a predetermined distance from the surface of the game board 33 to the back of the pachinko machine 10 and, naturally, a distance greater than the predetermined distance The main control device 92 is spaced behind the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the surface of the door frame 14.

  As shown in FIG. 5B, the variable display unit 38 and the sound lamp control device unit 65 are mounted on the back surface of the game board 33 above the main control device unit 61, and the main control device 92 is located below. Thus, the sound lamp control device 66 and the main control device 92 are arranged side by side in the vertical direction. Further, the amount of protrusion of the main control device 92 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 33 is substantially the same as the amount of protrusion of the sound lamp control device 66 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, more specifically slightly less. However, it is also possible to adopt a configuration in which the amount of overhang is the same. In this case, substantially the entire length of the main control device 92 is included in the projection range below the sound lamp control device 66. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire length in the length direction of the main controller 92 may be included in the projection range below the sound lamp controller 66.

  In the state where the back pack unit 15 is disposed at the closed position with respect to the inner frame 13, a control provided in the back pack unit 15 is provided below the main controller unit 61 as shown in FIG. A device assembly unit 73 is arranged, and the main control device 92 and the payout control device 82 are arranged in parallel up and down so that the main control device 92 is on the upper side. Further, the amount of protrusion of the main control device 92 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the game board 33 is substantially the same as the amount of protrusion of the payout control device 82 to the rear of the pachinko machine 10, more specifically, slightly less. However, it is good also as a structure where both overhang | projection amounts are the same. In this case, substantially the entire length of the main controller 92 in the length direction is included in the upward projection range of the payout controller 82. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the entire length in the length direction of the main control device 92 may be included in the projection range above the payout control device 82.

  That is, the main control device 92 is controlled by the sound lamp control device 66 that is the first gaming machine component and the payout control device 82 that is the second gaming machine component in the state where the back pack unit 15 is disposed at the closed position. The control device 92 is sandwiched in the width direction (more specifically, the vertical direction). In the state where the back pack unit 15 is arranged at the closed position, a part of the main control device 92 is covered from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover portion 75, but the present invention is not limited to this. The entire main controller 92 may be configured to be covered from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover unit 75, or the entire main controller 92 may be configured not to be covered from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover unit 75.

  Next, the configuration of the main controller 92 will be described with reference to FIGS. 7A is a perspective view of the main control device 92, FIG. 7B is a side view of the main control device 92, FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the main control device 92 viewed from the front side, and FIG. 9 is the main control. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the apparatus 92 from the back side.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the main control device 92 includes a main control board 101 and a board box 102, and the main control board 101 is accommodated in the board box 102.

  The main control board 101 includes a CPU that performs main control, a ROM that stores a game program, a RAM that stores necessary data according to the progress of the game, and the like. In the present embodiment, the CPU, the ROM, and the RAM are integrated into one chip on the CPU chip 103. Although not described in detail, an input / output driver IC chip 104 and a latch IC chip 105 are mounted. Although not shown, the main control board 101 is mounted with various elements such as capacitors and resistors and a plurality of connectors.

  In the main control board 101, various elements such as the CPU chip 103 and connectors are all mounted on the same plate surface and soldered on the opposite plate surface. That is, the main control board 101 has one plate surface as the element mounting surface 106 and the other plate surface as the solder surface 107. The solder surface 107 is a surface on which soldered portions of various elements mounted on the element mounting surface 106 are provided, but a circuit pattern may be formed on the solder surface 107. Further, both plate surfaces may be configured as element mounting surfaces.

  The board box 102 includes a front side structure (box cover) 111 and a back side structure (box base) 112 as a plurality of case bodies. The front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are made of a material having transparency so that the element mounting surface 106 and the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 accommodated in the board box 102 can be seen from the outside of the board box 102. Is formed. Specifically, it is formed of a colorless and transparent polycarbonate resin, but is not limited thereto, and may be an acrylic resin or the like.

  By combining the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, the substrate box 102 is formed in a square box shape (substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape) as shown in FIGS. Has a space.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the front-side structure 111 is formed so as to bulge out from the front-side periphery 113 that defines the periphery of the front-side structure 111 and from the front-side periphery 113. The bulging part 114 is integrally formed. By the front side peripheral edge 113 and the bulging portion 114, the front side structure 111 has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape opened to the opposite side of the bulging portion 114 from the bulging side. The front side structure 111 has a rectangular shape when viewed from the front. Although a detailed description is omitted, an opening for exposing the connector provided on the main control board 101 to the outside of the board box 102 and an opening for heat dissipation are provided in the bulging part 114 of the front side structure 111. Is formed.

  The main control board 101 is screwed to the front side structure 111 from the back side (fixed in a removable state using a predetermined tool). Screw fixing of the main control board 101 to the front side structure 111 is performed from the solder surface 107 side of the main control board 101, and various elements mounted on the element mounting surface 106 of the main control board 101 are the main control board. It is accommodated in a region between 101 and the front side structure 111. Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 9, an encircling wall portion 115 extending toward the main control board 101 is formed on the back surface side of the bulging portion 114, and in the space between the front side structure 111 and the main control board 101. The CPU chip 103 of the main control board 101 is surrounded by a surrounding wall 115.

  A back side structure 112 is fixed to a front side structure 111 in which the main control board 101 is integrated. As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the back side structure 112 is formed in a substantially plate shape having a quadrangular shape, specifically a rectangular shape in front view, and a flat surface portion 116 formed in a planar shape, A back side peripheral edge 117 formed so as to surround the peripheral edge of the flat surface portion 116 is integrally formed.

  By fixing the back side structural body 112 from the back surface side to the front side structural body 111, the front side peripheral edge portion 113 of the front side structural body 111 and the back side peripheral edge portion 117 of the back side structural body 112 overlap, and the back surface of the bulging portion 114 The open part to the side is closed by the flat part 116 of the back side structure 112. In this case, the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 is covered with the back side structure 112. That is, the element mounting surface 106 of the main control board 101 is entirely opposed to the front side structure 111, and the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 is entirely opposed to the back side structure 112. As shown in FIG. 5B, the main controller 92 having the above-described configuration is mounted on the mounting base 91 such that the back surface of the back-side structural body 112 faces the mounting base 91 side.

  Next, the structure which concerns on fixation with the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is demonstrated in detail. As a configuration related to the fixation of the two structural members 111 and 112, a restricting unit that restricts the mutual positional deviation between the two structural members 111 and 112 only in a specific regulation direction, and a positional deviation in the regulation direction are prevented. Fixing means for fixing the two structural members 111 and 112 to each other.

  First, the regulating means will be described in detail.

  As shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 9, a hook portion 118 is integrally formed on the back side structure 112 as a regulating means. A plurality of hook portions 118 are provided, and these hook portions 118 extend along the extending direction of each long side portion (specifically, the upper edge portion and the lower edge portion) of the back side peripheral edge portion 117 facing each other. Are formed at regular intervals. In this case, six hook portions 118 are formed on the upper and lower sides, respectively, but the number thereof is arbitrary as long as it is plural. The hook portions 118 are all formed to have the same shape, and are all formed to the same size. Each hook portion 118 is provided so as to stand up toward the front side structure 111, and is formed by being bent at an intermediate position so that the free end side extends toward one short side of the back side structure 112.

  A slit 119 is formed on each of the upper and lower long side portions of the front side structure 111 so as to correspond to the hook portion 118 and to correspond to each hook portion 118 on a one-to-one basis. The slit 119 penetrates in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, that is, in the parallel arrangement direction of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, and the corresponding hook part 118 can be inserted therein. A receiving portion (not shown) that locks the tip of the hook portion 118 is formed inside the slit 119.

  Since the restricting means having the hook part 118 and the receiving part is provided as described above, when the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are integrated, the hook part 118 corresponding to the inside of each slit 119. The front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined so that is inserted. At this stage, the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are displaced from each other in the length direction of the substrate box 102 (that is, the direction in which the long side portion extends). Thereafter, one of the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is slid in the length direction with respect to the other so that the hook part 118 is locked to the corresponding receiving part. Thereby, each hook part 118 is latched by the corresponding receiving part, and the front side structure body 111 and the back side structure body 112 are separated in the thickness direction and width direction (that is, the direction in which the short side part extends) of the substrate box 102. Even if it tries, it is regulated.

  The configuration of the restricting means is not limited to the above, and a guide protrusion is formed on one of the front peripheral edge 113 and the back peripheral edge 117, and the guide protrusion is on the other. It is good also as a structure which forms the groove part for guides which can be slidably moved to the predetermined | prescribed direction so that the ridge part for guide | inserts which can be fitted can be carried out.

  Next, the fixing means will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 7A, the substrate box 102 is provided with at least a first fixing region 120 and a second fixing region 130 as fixing means. One of the first fixed region 120 and the second fixed region 130 is provided with respect to one side portion of the substrate box 102, and the other is with respect to the side portion facing the one side portion. Is provided. Specifically, the first fixed region 120 is provided on one end side of both ends in the direction restricted by the restricting means, and the second fixed region 130 is both ends in the direction restricted by the restricting means. Is provided on the other end side. More specifically, the first fixed region 120 is provided on one short side, and the second fixed region 130 is provided on the other short side.

  As shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, the first fixed region 120 includes a front side fixed region 121 formed integrally with the front side structure 111 and a back side fixed region 122 formed integrally with the back side structure 112. ing. The front-side fixing region 121 and the back-side fixing region 122 are formed so as to extend to the side of one short side portion of each component 111, 112 more than the other part of the short side portion. It overlaps in the thickness direction.

  A plurality (specifically, three) of front side coupling portions 123 are arranged in parallel along the short side portion in the front side fixing region 121, and 1 in each of the front side coupling portions 123 in the back side fixing region 122. The back side coupling portions 124 are arranged side by side so as to correspond to each other. Since the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 of each combination have the same configuration, the configuration of one combination will be described below.

  A through hole penetrating in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102 is formed in the front side coupling portion 123, and a bottomed screw hole opened toward the front side coupling portion 123 is formed in the back side coupling portion 124. The through hole and the screw hole are communicated with each other, and a break screw 125 is screwed into the communicated hole portion from the through hole side.

  Here, the breaking screw 125 is one in which the strength of the connecting portion between the head 126 into which the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver can be inserted and the side on which the screw groove is formed is set low, and is tightened further. When a predetermined force is further applied to the head 126 by the tool at a position where it is not possible, the connecting portion is cut and the head 126 is separated. That is, the breaking screw 125 cannot be rotated in the loosening direction using the tool after screwing.

  Note that if it is possible to prevent loosening of the connection between the front-side coupling portion 123 and the back-side coupling portion 124 after screwing, the fixture (coupling device) that couples both the coupling portions 123 and 124 is broken. The screw 125 is not limited and may be a well-known one-way screw. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the screws are coupled to each other, and a locking portion is provided on the back side coupling portion 124, and a locking claw inserted from the front side coupling portion 123 side is engaged with the locking portion. It is good also as a structure which is stopped and cannot cancel | release the said latching state, without requiring destruction of the front side coupling | bond part 123 and the back side coupling | bond part 124. FIG.

  A plurality of combinations of the front side coupling portion 123 and the back side coupling portion 124 are provided as described above, and all the combinations are coupled by the breaking screw 125. All of the breaking screws 125 have the head 126 removed. Thus, the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 are coupled to each other, so that the front side structural body 111 and the back side structural body 112 are fixed to each other in an inseparable state.

  As shown in FIG. 9, each back side coupling part 124 is connected to the back side peripheral edge part 117 via the base side connection part 127, and the adjacent back side coupling parts 124 are connected to each other via the interconnection part 128. Yes. A space in which the tip of a cutting tool such as a nipper or a cutter can be inserted is secured around the base side connecting portion 127 and the interconnecting portion 128. Thereby, each connection part 127,128 can be cut | disconnected. In particular, the connecting portions 127 and 128 are set such that the strength thereof is easier to cut than when the front side connecting portion 123 and the back side connecting portion 124 are broken and the connection via the breaking screw 125 is released. Specifically, it is thinner than the surrounding area. Thereby, it becomes easy to cut | disconnect each connection part 127,128.

  By cutting the base side connecting portion 127, the back side coupling portion 124 is separated from the back side peripheral edge portion 117. In this case, the position where the front side coupling portion 123 and the back side coupling portion 124 are provided is one side portion of the substrate box 102, and the front side structure 111 or the back side configuration is configured to release the state regulated by the regulating means. When one side of the body 112 is slid relative to the other, the coupling trace piece between the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 is in a position where it does not contact the main body in which the main control board 101 is accommodated. . Thereby, the state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are fixed through the connection of the front side connection part 123 and the back side connection part 124 can be released.

  Even if the relative position between the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 is returned to the original position, the cut portions of the connecting portions 127 and 128 remain. Therefore, for a game hall manager or the like, the front side structure 111 and the back side structure through the coupling of the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 by checking whether or not the coupling parts 127 and 128 are cut off. It is possible to visually check whether or not the fixation with 112 is released.

  By the way, not all the combinations of the front side coupling part 123 and the back side coupling part 124 are coupled by the breaking screw 125, but in the configuration in which the coupling by the breaking screw 125 is performed on some combinations, After the administrator or the like releases the fixing due to the coupling in the inspection and maintenance of the main control board 101, it is possible to perform the fixing again by screwing the break screw 125 to the unused combination. Thus, in the situation where some combinations are coupled by the breaking screw 125, not only the base-side coupling portion 127 but also the interconnection portion 128 needs to be cut in order to release the fixation related to the coupling.

  In addition, each said connection part 127,128 may be provided with respect to the front side coupling part 123 instead of with respect to the back side coupling part 124, and may be provided with respect to both coupling parts 123,124. Moreover, it is good also as a structure which does not have each said connection part 127,128 and requires destruction of the front side coupling | bond part 123 itself or the back side coupling | bond part 124 itself in order to cancel | release the fixation concerning the said coupling | bonding. In this case, although the workability when the game hall manager or the like properly opens the board box 102 is reduced, the function of fixing the board box 102 and the improper opening are still visible. The function to leave as an effect is fulfilled.

  Next, the second fixed region 130 will be described.

  In the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112, the second fixed side is provided on the short side portion opposite to the side where the front side fixing area 121 and the back side fixing area 122 are provided, as shown in FIG. As the region 130, a front-side fixed base portion 131 and a back-side fixed base portion 132 are provided. The front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 are formed so as to extend laterally from one short side portion of each component 111, 112 to a part of the short side portion.

  The projecting position of the front fixed base portion 131 to the side and the projecting position of the rear fixed base portion 132 are the same or substantially the same, and the dimension along the short side is also the same in both base portions 131 and 132. It is the same or substantially the same. In a state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 are juxtaposed in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, and the front side fixed base portion 131 has the back side fixed base portion 132. The entire peripheral portion on the surface side facing the surface and the entire peripheral portion on the surface side facing the front-side fixed base portion 131 in the back-side fixed base portion 132 are in contact with each other.

  A pasting region of the seal seal 160 is formed by the surface of the front fixed base portion 131 and the surface of the back fixed base portion 132. Details of the seal seal 160 will be described later. The affixing region is composed of a front surface region 133 configured by the front side fixed base portion 131, a back surface region 134 configured by the back side fixed base portion 132, and both the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132, respectively. A side surface region 135 that is continuous with both the front surface region 133 and the back surface region 134 via the corner portion and is interposed between the both regions 133 and 134 is provided.

  The front surface region 133, the back surface region 134, and the side surface region 135 are formed in a planar shape. In the front surface region 133, the dimension between the end portion on the boundary side with the side surface region 135 and the end portion on the opposite side thereof is the end portion on the boundary side with the side surface region 135 in the back surface region 134 and the end on the opposite side. It is set larger than the dimension between the parts.

  Since the side surface region 135 is configured by both the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 as described above, the side surface region 135 has a boundary 136 between the base portions 131 and 132. The boundary 136 is formed in a series of lines. Here, the boundary 136 is non-linear. This configuration will be described in detail below.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the side facing the back side fixed base portion 132 in the front side fixed base portion 131 is formed in a stepped shape that is recessed toward the surface region 133 side compared to both end sides at a midway position in the width direction of the substrate box 102. Has been. That is, a recessed region 142 sandwiched in the width direction of the substrate box 102 by the pair of stepped wall portions 141 is formed on the side of the front-side fixed base portion 131 that faces the back-side fixed base portion 132.

  Along with the formation of the recessed region 142 in the front-side fixed base portion 131, the portion constituting the side surface region 135 in the back-side fixed base portion 132 has both ends in the width direction at intermediate positions in the width direction of the substrate box 102. A protruding wall portion 144 that protrudes further toward the front side fixed base portion 131 than the side surface base portion 143 is integrally formed. The protruding wall portion 144 is not formed so as to fill the entire recessed region 142 but is formed so as to fill a portion including the end portion on the side surface region 135 side in the recessed region 142.

  The protruding wall portion 144 is surrounded by a pair of standing edges that are continuous from the side surface base portion 143 and rise linearly from the side surface base portion 143 in the back side fixed base portion 132, and a connecting edge that linearly connects the pair of standing edge portions. Is a square shape, more specifically a quadrangular shape. The length dimension of the standing edge is the same as or substantially the same as the height dimension of the step wall portion 141 in the front-side fixed base portion 131, and the length dimension of the connecting edge is between the step wall portions 141 in the recessed region 142. The distance is the same as or slightly shorter than the distance.

  In the state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, the protruding wall portion 144 enters the recessed area 142, and each rising edge is opposed to the corresponding stepped wall portion 141 at a position close thereto. In addition, the connecting edge faces the bottom of the recessed area 142 at a position close to the bottom. Therefore, the recessed region 142 is closed by the protruding wall portion 144 at the outer end of the substrate box 102, and the side surface region 135 is formed on the both base portions 131 in the configuration in which the recessed region 142 and the protruding wall portion 144 are formed. , 132 except for the boundary,.

  By forming the recessed area 142 and the protruding wall part 144, the boundary 136 between the front-side fixed base part 131 and the back-side fixed base part 132 in the side surface area 135 becomes non-linear with a corner part in the middle thereof. ing. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 7B, the first line 145 that is continuous from the boundary outside the side surface region 135 and the direction that is continuous with the first line 145 and intersects the first line 145. , More specifically, a second line 146 extending in a direction orthogonal or substantially orthogonal, and a direction continuous to the second line 146 and intersecting the second line 146, more specifically the first line. A third line 147 extending in a direction parallel or substantially parallel to 145, a direction continuous to the third line 147 and intersecting the third line 147, more specifically the second line 146. A fourth line 148 extending in a direction parallel or substantially parallel to the first line 148, a direction continuous with the fourth line 148 and intersecting the fourth line 148, more specifically, the first line 145. A fifth line 149 extending in a direction parallel or substantially parallel for, has a fifth line 149 is continuous at the boundary of the outer surface area 135.

  That is, the boundary 136 in the side surface region 135 includes the first line 145 and the fifth line 149 arranged on the same straight line at a predetermined interval on both ends thereof, and the first line 145 and the fifth line 149. Each of the lines 149 has a pair of second line 146 and fourth line 148 that are continuous with each other through the corner portion and face each other, and a third line that connects the second line 146 and the fourth line 148. Line 147 is included. In addition, in order to reinforce the strength in the surface direction of the protruding wall portion 144, a rib continuous to the protruding wall portion 144 is integrally formed on the back side structural body 112 inside the protruding wall portion 144.

  The front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 are used for connecting the base portions 131 and 132 to each of the region forming the first line 145 and the region forming the fifth line 149 by a coupler. A coupling portion is provided.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, a pair of through holes 151 penetrating in the thickness direction are formed outside the recessed area 142 in the front side fixed base portion 131, and these through holes 151 are formed in the through holes 151. Screw holes 152 are formed in the back-side fixed base portion 132 in a one-to-one correspondence. Each through hole 151 and the corresponding screw hole 152 are communicated with each other in the thickness direction of the substrate box 102, and the respective through holes 151 and screw holes 152 of the respective combinations are broken from the front-side fixed base portion 131 side. A screw 153 is screwed. Each broken screw 153 has the head 154 removed after screwing. As a result, the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 are coupled in a state where it is difficult to release. For releasing the coupling, any one of the front side fixed base portion 131, the back side fixed base portion 132, and the breaking screw 153 Such destruction will be done, and the trace will remain. Therefore, it is possible for a manager of a game hall or the like to confirm whether or not the board box 102 has been illegally opened by visually confirming the trace.

  If it is possible to prevent loosening of the connection between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 after screwing, a fixing device (connector) that connects the base portions 131 and 132 together. Is not limited to the breaking screw 153 and may be a well-known one-way screw. Further, the configuration is not limited to the configuration in which the screws are coupled to each other, and a locking portion is provided on the back-side fixed base portion 132, and the locking claw inserted from the front-side fixed base portion 131 side includes the locking portion. It is good also as a structure which cannot be cancelled | released without latching, and destroying the front side fixed base part 131 and the back side fixed base part 132.

  The front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 are provided with a structure that prevents separation of the front-side constituent body 111 and the back-side constituent body 112 in addition to the fixing through the connection by the screws. Such a blocking structure will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG. 7B, and FIGS. 11A and 11B are explanatory views for explaining the action of separation prevention by the prevention structure.

  As shown in FIG. 10, a hook portion 155 protruding toward the back side fixed base portion 132 is integrally formed at the bottom of the recessed region 142 in the front side fixed base portion 131. As shown in FIG. 9, a plurality (specifically, two) of hook portions 155 are provided in the recessed region 142 at a predetermined interval in the direction between the pair of stepped wall portions 141. Note that the number of hooks 155 is not limited to a plurality, and only one hook may be provided.

  Each hook portion 155 is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases toward the protruding wall portion 144, and each hook portion 155 is formed on the surface of the hook portion 155 toward the back side fixed base portion 132 toward the protruding wall portion 144. An inclined taper surface 156 and an end surface 157 facing the inner wall surface of the protruding wall portion 144 are provided. The end surface 157 is slightly separated from the inner wall surface of the protruding wall portion 144, but may be configured such that both are in contact with each other.

  As described above, the front-side structure 111 and the back-side structure 112 are provided with restricting means for restricting the direction of the combination, and when the front-side structure 111 and the back-side structure 112 are combined, FIG. As shown in a) and (b), it is necessary to slide one side in the combination direction in the direction regulated by the regulating means with respect to the other. In this case, since each hook portion 155 is formed with the tapered surface 156 as described above, the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 are made of synthetic resin and can be elastically deformed. The front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 can be combined while interfering with the hooks 155.

  On the other hand, each hook portion 155 has an end surface 157 that faces the inner wall surface of the protruding wall portion 144. Therefore, in the state where the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are combined, one of them is the other. On the other hand, even if an attempt is made to slide in the separating direction in the direction restricted by the restricting means, the end face 157 and the protruding wall portion 144 come into contact with each other, and further sliding movement is prevented. As a result, the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are fixed in a state in which separation is difficult, and in releasing the fixation, any one of the front side fixed base part 131, the back side fixed base part 132, and the hook part 155 is used. Destruction will occur and the trace will remain. Therefore, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to confirm whether or not the board box 102 has been illegally opened by checking the trace.

  Here, in order to directly destroy the hook portion 155, the hook portion 155 is cut by a cutting tool inserted into the space between the base portions 131 and 132 from the boundary 136 between the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132. A way to do this is conceivable. In this case, since the hook portion 155 is provided with respect to the recessed region 142 as described above and is sandwiched between the pair of stepped wall portions 141, the position where the cutting tool is inserted at the boundary 136 is restricted to the third line 147. Is done.

  Next, the seal sticker 160 that is attached to the attachment region will be described. 12A is a front view of the seal seal 160, FIG. 12B is a back view of the seal seal 160, and FIG. 13 is a cross-sectional view of the seal seal 160.

  As shown in FIGS. 12 and 13, the seal seal 160 includes a substantially rectangular base sheet 161, and an adhesive is applied to the back surface of the base sheet 161 to form an adhesive layer 162. An IC tag 163 as an electronic tag (or RFID tag) is embedded in the adhesive layer 162. In FIG. 13, the release sheet 164 is laminated on the adhesive layer 162, but the release sheet 164 is peeled off when the sealing seal 160 is attached to the substrate box 102.

  The base sheet 161 is formed of a flexible resin film such as a polyester film, has moderate brittleness, and is reactive to solvents and heat. Specifically, when toluene or the like that is soluble in the pressure-sensitive adhesive constituting the pressure-sensitive adhesive layer 162 is applied to the base sheet 161, the base sheet 161 changes color. Further, the base sheet 161 also changes color when heat equal to or higher than the temperature at which the adhesive strength of the adhesive layer 162 decreases (for example, 50 ° C.). As a result, when a solvent is applied or heat is applied to illegally peel off the sealing sticker 160 from the pasting area of the substrate box 102, the base sheet 161 may be discolored to leave a trace of the fraud. it can.

  On the surface of the base sheet 161, as shown in FIG. 12A, an ink application unit 165, an identification number unit 166, and a model information unit 167 are provided. The ink application unit 165 is applied with special ink that shows a pattern when irradiated with light of a specific wavelength such as ultraviolet rays. A plurality of numbers are described in the identification number portion 166, and the numbers described in the identification number portion 166 are different for each pachinko machine. In the model information section 167, the model name of the gaming machine, the manufacturer name of the gaming machine, and the like are described.

  The adhesive of the adhesive layer 162 has an adhesive force that can be removed from the base sheet 161 when it is peeled off after being applied once, as in the case of a conventional seal. Therefore, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off, it cannot be applied again, and a part of the adhesive layer 162 remains on the application region side. Therefore, the trace which peeled off the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 illegally can be left.

  The IC tag 163 includes an IC chip 171 and an antenna member 172. The IC chip 171 is formed as an integrated circuit and has a control unit and a memory area. The memory area is configured by a non-volatile memory (ROM) in which data cannot be rewritten, and its storage capacity is, for example, 128 bits. ID information as identification information is stored in the memory area. Specifically, a manufacturer name (or a manufacturer unique number assigned to each manufacturer) and an ID number unique to the gaming machine are stored. Since the memory area of the IC chip 171 is not rewritable, inconveniences such as unauthorized alteration of ID information can be suppressed.

  The antenna member 172 has a planar rectangular shape and is relatively thin (for example, 10 to 200 μm) long, and is formed as a conductive foil of a metal such as aluminum or copper. An IC chip 171 is disposed substantially at the center in the longitudinal direction (or length direction) of the antenna member 172. The IC chip 171 is arranged by fixing an electrode (not shown) of the IC chip 171 to the antenna member 172 with an adhesive such as an anisotropic conductive film or conductive paste.

  A slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 at a position where the IC chip 171 is disposed so as to penetrate from the front surface to the back surface of the antenna member 172. The slit 173 extends from the IC chip 171 in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 and from the IC chip 171 in a direction intersecting the longitudinal direction, specifically in a direction perpendicular to the longitudinal direction. The second slit portion 175 reaches the end of the antenna member 172, and is formed in an L shape as a whole. The slit 173 functions as an inductor that constitutes a matching circuit that is coupled to a capacitive element formed inside the IC chip 171 and matches the impedance between the IC chip 171 and the antenna member 172. In this regard, the slit 173 can be referred to as a notch for matching. Further, in view of a configuration in which normal communication is not possible in the IC tag 163 if the slit 173 does not function properly, a communication matching unit or a disabled state generating unit. It can be called.

  The antenna member 172 functions as a resonance adjustment circuit, and the length of the antenna member 172 has an important influence on the communication characteristics. The optimal length of the antenna member 172 varies depending on the operating conditions. However, when the periphery of the antenna member 172 is air, the optimum value is about half the wavelength of the operating frequency, and the periphery is covered with a dielectric. In this case, it is known that the optimum length dimension is shorter than this because there is a wavelength shortening effect by the dielectric. The length of the antenna member 172 in the pachinko machine 10 is set to a size of about 50 mm so that the operating frequency is a constant frequency.

  The ID information of the IC chip 171 is configured to be called by the control unit and be transmitted as a radio wave from the antenna member 172. The radio wave transmitted from the antenna member 172 is received by the reader device and the ID information is received. Can be read.

  As shown in FIG. 12B, the IC tag 163 (antenna member 172) is disposed obliquely from one corner side to the diagonal corner side of the base sheet 161. In this case, the long antenna member 172 intersects with all the side directions of the base sheet 161 in the longitudinal direction.

  An antenna notch 176 is formed in the seal seal 160. The antenna cut 176 penetrates from the surface of the base sheet 161 to the surface of the adhesive layer 162. Note that the surface of the adhesive layer 162 is a surface exposed on the back surface side of the seal seal 160, and it can be said that the antenna cut 176 penetrates from the surface to the back surface of the seal seal 160.

  The antenna cut 176 has a linear shape extending in a direction orthogonal to or substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172. Incidentally, the direction orthogonal or substantially orthogonal to the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 is a direction that intersects all the side directions of the base sheet 161.

  The antenna cuts 176 are formed so as to sandwich the antenna member 172 in the short direction of the antenna member 172, and a plurality of antenna cuts 176 are formed at equal intervals along the longitudinal direction on each long side portion side. Yes. Each of the antenna cuts 176 has a configuration in which the region where the antenna member 172 is not disposed in the base sheet 161 is one end and the other end is slightly over the region where the antenna member 172 is disposed. In this case, the antenna cut 176 on one long side is formed so as not to line up in the short direction with respect to the antenna cut 176 on the other long side.

  A part of the plurality of antenna cuts 176 is provided adjacent to the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172. In this case, a part of the antenna cuts 176 on the one long side is provided adjacent to the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172, and one on the other long side. The antenna notch 176 is also provided adjacent to the area where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172. That is, the antenna cut 176 is formed so as to sandwich at least the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172.

  Corner cuts 177 penetrating from the surface side of the base sheet 161 to the surface of the adhesive layer 162 are formed at the four corners of the seal seal 160, respectively. The corner-side cut 177 is formed in an L shape so as to follow the corner angle of the seal seal 160. A large number of outer edge notches 178 are formed on the outer edge of the seal seal 160 from the outer edge end portion toward the inner side. These outer edge notches 178 are formed in an acute V shape so as to open from the inside toward the outside, and are formed at equal intervals along the outer periphery of the seal seal 160.

  Since the antenna cut 176, the corner cut 177, and the outer edge cut 178 are formed as described above, the base sheet 161 may be broken or the antenna member 172 may be peeled off when the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the application region. It is cut off. Such an effect will be described later.

  Next, a configuration related to the sticking position of the seal seal 160 will be described. FIG. 14 is an enlarged perspective view showing a region where the seal seal 160 is affixed and its periphery in the main controller 92, and FIG. 15 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship of the seal seal 160 in the affixing region. . In FIG. 15, for convenience of explanation, the corner cut 177 and the outer cut 178 are omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 14, the seal seal 160 is affixed to the affixing region. In this case, the sealing seal 160 is bent and attached in a U-shape so that the sealing seal 160 is disposed across the front surface region 133, the side surface region 135, and the back surface region 134 in the pasting region. The seal seal 160 covers substantially the entire front surface region 133, substantially the entire side surface region 135, and substantially the entire back surface region 134. Therefore, the opening of each through-hole 151 formed in the front surface region 133 and the opening of each screw hole 152 formed in the back surface region 134 are covered with the seal seal 160 and the front side fixing in the side surface region 135 is performed. A boundary 136 between the base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 is also almost entirely covered with a seal seal 160.

  The distance between the end of the front surface region 133 on the boundary side with the side surface region 135 and the opposite end thereof is the end of the back surface region 134 on the boundary side with the side surface region 135 and the end on the opposite side. It is set longer than the distance between the parts. Therefore, the area of the front surface region 133 is set wider than that of the back surface region 134, and accordingly, the area covering the front surface region 133 is larger than the region covering the back surface region 134 in the seal seal 160. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the area of the back surface region 134 may be wider than that of the front surface region 133, and the areas of both the regions 133 and 134 may be the same.

  As already described, the antenna member 172 in the seal seal 160 is disposed from one corner side to the diagonal corner side in the base sheet 161, and therefore, similarly to the seal seal 160, the antenna member 172 is arranged. Are also arranged in a U-shape over the front surface region 133, the side surface region 135, and the back surface region 134.

  The positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the breaking screw 153 will be described.

  One end of the antenna member 172 in the longitudinal direction straddles the opening of one through-hole 151 in the surface region 133 as shown in FIG. Specifically, the dimension of the antenna member 172 in the short direction is smaller than the hole diameter of the opening portion of the through hole 151, and the antenna member 172 sandwiches the opening portion of the through hole 151 and covers the peripheral portion of the opening portion. It is arranged so as to cross over. By arranging the antenna member 172 in this way, the end of the antenna member 172 is opposed to the end of the breaking screw 153 opposite to the thread groove side. However, since the end of the breaking screw 153 opposite to the screw groove side is disposed in the middle of the through hole 151 in the axial direction, the breaking screw 153 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other.

  The end of the antenna member 172 opposite to the end across the opening crosses over the opening of one screw hole 152 in the back surface region 134. In this case, since the end of the breaking screw 153 on the screw groove side is disposed in the middle of the screw hole 152 in the axial direction, the breaking screw 153 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, when the antenna member 172 contacts the breaking screw 153, the set operating frequency (for example, 2.45 GHz) changes, and communication through the antenna member 172 may not be performed satisfactorily. Then, there is a possibility that the ID information stored in the IC chip 171 may not be read even if it is read by the reader device. However, since the antenna member 172 and the breaking screw 153 are not in contact as described above, Occurrence is suppressed.

  Next, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 136 will be described.

  Since the antenna member 172 is disposed across the side surface region 135 from the front surface region 133 to the back surface region 134, the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 136 between the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 in the side surface region 135. The boundary 136 is formed in a non-straight line as described above, and is formed by sequentially connecting the first line 145 to the fifth line 149. The antenna member 172 straddles the third line 147 among the first line 145 to the fifth line 149.

  That is, the boundary 136 is disposed between the pair of first peripheral portions (first side portions) and the second peripheral portion (second side portions) facing each other in the seal seal 160, and A peripheral edge different from the first peripheral edge and the second peripheral edge, toward at least one of a pair of third peripheral edge (third edge) and fourth peripheral edge (fourth edge) facing each other. A bent portion is formed so that an extending line is generated.

  The region where the IC chip 171 and the slit 173 are formed in the antenna member 172 is arranged with respect to the region sandwiched between the second line 146 and the fourth line 148 in the pasting region. The IC chip 171 is disposed on the front surface region 133 side of the first line 145 and the fifth line 149 and on the back surface region 134 side of the third line 147, whereas the slit 173 The end of the 1 slit 174 opposite to the IC chip 171 side straddles the third line 147.

  Since the antenna member 172 straddles the third line 147, the region where the antenna cut 176 is formed in the base sheet 161 is disposed closer to the surface region 133 than the third line 147. It is arranged closer to the back surface region 134 than the line 147. In addition, since the first slit portion 174 straddles the third line 147, the antenna cut 176 toward the first slit portion 174 is disposed on the surface region 133 side with respect to the third line 147. The third line 147 is disposed on the back surface region 134 side.

  Here, the pasting region is surrounded by the surrounding portion 180.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 8, the surrounding portion 180 is formed between a portion of the front side peripheral portion 113 of the front side structure 111 that is continuous with the front side fixed base portion 131 and a surface region 133 of the front side fixed base portion 131. A front side step 181 is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 9, a back-side stepped portion 182 is formed between a portion of the back-side peripheral portion 117 of the back-side structure 112 that is continuous with the back-side fixed base portion 132 and a back surface region 134 of the back-side fixed base portion 132. Has been. Further, the front-side fixed base portion 131 is formed with a pair of front-side protrusions 183 facing each other with the front surface region 133 and the side surface region 135 interposed therebetween, and the rear-side fixed base portion 132 has a side surface region 135 and a back surface region. A pair of back-side ridges 184 are formed so as to face each other with 134 interposed therebetween, and the front-side ridges 183 and the back-side ridges 184 are arranged on the same side and are continuous with the boundary 136 therebetween. doing.

  A surrounding portion 180 is formed by the front side stepped portion 181, the back side stepped portion 182, the front side protruding portion 183, and the back side protruding portion 184, and the pasting region is surrounded by the surrounding portion 180. The entire periphery of the seal seal 160 pasted on the pasting area is close to the surrounding portion 180. Thereby, even if it is going to peel off the seal seal | sticker 160, the peeling act becomes very difficult.

  Since the entire periphery of the seal seal 160 is close to the enclosing portion 180, the seal seal 160 is attached so that it does not protrude from the region surrounded by the enclosing portion 180 when the seal seal 160 is attached. Thus, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through-hole 151, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the screw hole 152, and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 136 are naturally as described above.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 15, the area surrounded by the surrounding portion 180 is wider than the area of the seal seal 160. As a result, when the seal sticker 160 is pasted, a predetermined clearance is created at the pasting position, and the workability of the pasting work is improved. In this case, the clearance between the antenna member 172 and the through-hole 151, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the screw hole 152, and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 136 are as follows. It is set within the range that is naturally maintained.

  Next, the function and effect of the sealing sticker 160 applied as described above will be described.

  When the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, it is necessary to release the fixing by fixing means provided at least on the front-side fixing base portion 131 and the back-side fixing base portion 132. As a method for releasing the fixing, the sealing seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136 without removing the sealing seal 160 from the sticking region, and the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 are connected via the boundary 136. A first method is conceivable in which a predetermined tool is inserted in between and the cutting of each breaking screw 153 and the hooking portion 155 is cut. In addition to this, the boundary 136 is exposed by peeling the seal seal 160 from the application region, and a predetermined tool is inserted between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 through the boundary 136. A second method of cutting each breaking screw 153 and cutting the hook portion 155 is conceivable. Hereinafter, the operational effects on the first method and the operational effects on the second method will be sequentially described.

  When the unauthorized opening is performed by the first method, the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136 as described above. In this case, since the boundary 136 is formed in a non-linear shape as described above, the work of cutting the sealing seal 160 along the boundary 136 becomes complicated. Further, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is disposed so as to straddle the boundary 136, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136, the antenna member 172 is cut. If it does so, the length dimension of the part by which the IC chip 171 is arrange | positioned in the antenna member 172 will become short, and the communication distance between reader apparatuses will become short. Moreover, communication becomes impossible depending on the length dimension after cutting. In this case, it is possible for an administrator who wants to properly read ID information by the reader device to grasp the fact of the unauthorized opening by confirming that communication is difficult or communication is impossible.

  Further, since the slit 173 formed in the antenna member 172 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary 136, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136, the slit 173 is cut including the portion where the slit 173 is formed. The Rukoto. If it does so, impedance matching will not be performed favorably, but it will become difficult to communicate, or communication will become impossible. In this case, the administrator can grasp the fact of unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  When unauthorized opening is performed by the second method, the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the pasting area as described above. In such a peeling operation, it is assumed that the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the corner thereof, and a case where the seal seal 160 is peeled in a direction along one side of the seal seal 160.

  When peeling from the corner, stress due to the peeling force concentrates on the corner-side cut 177 and the outer edge cut 178 of the seal seal 160, so that the seal seal 160 is easily broken, and for the administrator, the seal seal after peeling. When 160 is reapplied, it is possible to grasp the fact of the unauthorized opening by visually confirming the destruction.

  In either case of peeling from a corner or peeling in a direction along one side of the seal seal 160, the stress accompanying the peeling force concentrates on the end of the antenna cut 176, so that the antenna cut 176 passes through the antenna cut 176. The base sheet 161 is destroyed, and the antenna member 172 is cut accordingly. In this case, the administrator can grasp the fact of unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  In particular, a part of the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is disposed in a region between a pair of the second line 146 and the fourth line 148 facing each other at the boundary 136. In addition, a part of the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is disposed on the back surface region 134 side with respect to the third line 147 and on the surface region 133 side with respect to the first line 145 and the fifth line 149. ing. Therefore, in order to expose all of the boundary 136 by peeling the seal seal 160 in an arbitrary direction in the same direction, it is necessary to peel off the portion where the slit 173 is formed in the seal seal 160 from the application region. Since a part of the antenna cut 176 is formed adjacent to the slit 173, the antenna member 172 may be cut or broken at the position where the slit 173 is formed when the entire boundary 136 is exposed. Be expected. If it does so, impedance matching will not be performed favorably, but it will become difficult to communicate, or communication will become impossible. In this case, the administrator can grasp the fact of unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  Further, it is conceivable to peel off the seal seal 160 while sequentially changing the peeling direction so as to follow the shape of the boundary 136, but the peeling action becomes complicated. Further, in this case, since the fold generated in the seal seal 160 at the time of peeling becomes complicated, a large load is easily applied to the seal seal 160, and accordingly, the seal seal 160 is easily broken. Further, the antenna cut 176 is formed so as to sandwich the slit 173 therebetween, and the antenna cut 176 is arranged on both the front surface region 133 side and the back surface region 134 side with respect to the boundary 136. Therefore, when the boundary 136 is completely exposed, it is expected that the antenna member 172 is cut or broken at a position where the slit 173 is formed. If it does so, impedance matching will not be performed favorably, but it will become difficult to communicate, or communication will become impossible. In this case, the administrator can grasp the fact of unauthorized opening by confirming that communication using the reader device is difficult or cannot be performed.

  Next, the cover member 93 of the seal seal 160 will be described. FIGS. 16A and 16B are perspective views of the cover member 93 viewed from different directions, FIG. 17 is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which the cover member 93 is attached to the main control device 92, and FIG. FIG. 4 is a cross-sectional view of a portion where a cover member 93 is attached in the main controller 92.

  The cover member 93 is made of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as polycarbonate and is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 185 as shown in FIGS. A plurality of (specifically six) wall portions defining the internal space 185 can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 93. An opening 187 that opens the internal space 185 to the outside of the cover member 93 is formed in a predetermined wall portion 186 among the wall portions of the cover member 93. Hereinafter, the wall portion 186 is also referred to as an opening wall portion 186.

  As shown in FIG. 16 (b), the opening 187 is formed from one to the other of the pair of wall portions 188 and 189 facing each other with the opening wall portion 186 interposed therebetween, and the periphery of the opening portion 187. A part of the portion is formed so as to enter the inside of each of the wall portions 188 and 189. The opening 187 is formed along the boundary between the opening wall 186 adjacent to the opening wall 186 in a direction different from the side of each wall 188, 189. Yes.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the internal space 185 of the cover member 93 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 to which the seal seal 160 is attached, The opening 187 is formed in such a size that both the base portions 131 and 132 can be inserted into the internal space 185 from the front end side of the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132. For convenience of explanation, in the following explanation, a combination of the front side fixed base part 131 and the back side fixed base part 132 is also referred to as a fixed base 191.

  The distance between the two wall portions 188 and 189 of the cover member 93 is set to be equal to or slightly larger than the width direction dimension of the substrate box 102 in the fixed base 191, and the opening portions 187 are formed in these two wall portions 188 and 189. A claw portion 192 is integrally formed so as to project from the peripheral edge portion toward the boundary on the opening wall portion 186 side. The claw portion 192 is formed to be elastically deformable. In correspondence with the claw portion 192, as shown in FIG. 17, a receiving portion 193 is integrally formed on the side surface of the front side fixed base portion 131 of the substrate box 102 so as to protrude outward. The cover member 93 is installed in the substrate box 102 so that the fixed base 191 is inserted into the internal space 185 through the opening 187, and the claw 192 is received by the receiving unit 193 at the time of installation, whereby the substrate It is fixed to the box 102. Hereinafter, the wall portions 188 and 189 are also referred to as locking wall portions 188 and 189.

  Since the cover member 93 is fixed to the substrate box 102, the entire fixed base 191 is surrounded by the cover member 93. As a result, the seal seal 160 attached to the fixed base 191 is protected by the cover member 93. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the shrink film is thermally shrunk to cover the pachinko machine 10, but in a configuration in which the main controller 92 is exposed on the back of the pachinko machine 10, the shrink film is used. It is preferable to suppress the influence on the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag 163 such as a load in the shrinking direction and heat when the heat shrinks, and the influence is reduced by providing the cover member 93 as described above. be able to.

  Since the cover member 93 is colorless and transparent as described above, the seal seal 160 attached to the fixed base 191 is visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 93 in the configuration in which the cover member 93 is provided as described above. can do. The cover member 93 is not limited to being colorless and transparent. In order to make it possible to visually confirm the seal seal 160 from the outside of the cover member 93, the cover member 93 should be transparent enough to visually confirm the seal seal 160. What is necessary is just to be colored and transparent. In addition, the seal seal 160 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 93, but the cover member 93 may be made non-transparent.

  Next, the positional relationship between each wall portion of the cover member 93 and the seal seal 160 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 18, the entire fixed base 191 is accommodated with respect to the cover member 93, and the opening wall portion 186 abuts against the side surface of the bulging portion 114 in the front side structure 111 from the side. ing. In order to reduce the gap between the bulging portion 114 and the cover member 93, it is preferable that the bulging portion 114 and the cover member 93 are in contact with each other as described above. It is good also as a structure which the part 114 adjoins at predetermined intervals.

  The wall 190 adjacent to the opening wall 186 and the opening 187 is formed so that the opening 187 is along the boundary between the wall 190 and the opening wall 186 as described above. , And the back surface region 134 side of the fixed base 191 is overlapped. That is, the wall portion 190 is in contact with the seal seal 160 attached to the fixed base 191. Further, the wall portion 190 has a portion located on the base end side of the fixed base 191 with respect to the seal seal 160 and the end portions of the IC tag 163. As a result, when the cover member 93 is separated, an external force is applied to the seal seal 160 by the wall portion 190. Hereinafter, the wall portion 190 is also referred to as an overlapping wall portion 190. Further, as already described, since the distance between the locking wall portions 188 and 189 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the width direction of the substrate box 102 in the fixed base 191, as shown in FIG. These locking wall portions 188 and 189 overlap with both side surfaces of the fixed base 191.

  In the above configuration, as shown in FIG. 18, the opening wall portion 186 has a length dimension from the position of the opening portion 187 to the end on the opposite side, and is attached to the surface region 133 of the fixed base 191 in the seal seal 160. The set portion is set to be separated from the wall portion 194 facing the overlapping wall portion 190 by a predetermined distance. Thereby, the distance from the location affixed to the surface region 133 in the seal seal 160 to the surface of the wall portion 194 is L1. Hereinafter, the wall portion 194 is also referred to as a first separation wall portion 194. Incidentally, a member for blocking radio waves is not provided between the seal seal 160 and the first separation wall 194.

  Further, the overlapping wall portion 190 has a length dimension from an end portion on the peripheral edge side of the opening portion 187 to an end portion on the opposite side thereof, which is attached to the side surface region 135 of the fixed base 191 in the seal seal 160, and It is set so that the wall portion 195 facing the opening wall portion 186 is separated by a predetermined distance. Thereby, the distance from the location affixed to the side surface region 135 in the seal seal 160 to the surface of the wall portion 195 is L2. The distance L2 is set to be shorter than the distance L1 from the portion pasted on the surface region 133 in the seal seal 160 to the first separation wall 194. Hereinafter, the wall portion 195 is also referred to as a second separation wall portion 195. Incidentally, a member for blocking radio waves is not provided between the seal seal 160 and the first separation wall 194.

  The communicable distance of the IC tag 163 provided on the seal seal 160 is set to be the distance L3 when a ringing wave is output from the reader device R with a predetermined output intensity. The distance L3 is the distance L1 from the location affixed to the surface region 133 in the seal seal 160 to the surface of the first separation wall 194 and the location from the location affixed to the side region 135 in the seal seal 160 to the second separation wall. It is set to be larger than the distance L2 to the surface of the portion 195. The normal communicable range C1 of the IC tag 163 includes the outside of the entire first separation wall portion 194 and the outside of the entire second separation wall portion 195. Further, as already described, each wall portion of the cover member 93 is formed so as to transmit radio waves. Therefore, the manager or the like of the game hall can perform the reading operation without removing the cover member 93 from the board box 102 when reading the ID information from the IC tag 163.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 18, a series of protrusions 196 are integrally formed at the peripheral edge of the first separation wall 194 except for the peripheral edge at the boundary with the opening wall 186. The section screen 197 partitioned by the ridges 196 is flat. In this case, when reading ID information from the IC tag 163, the game hall manager or the like makes the ID information reading operation easy and reliable by bringing the tip of the reader device R into contact with or close to the section screen 197. Can be done. That is, the section screen 197 functions as a positioning unit for reading ID information.

  In particular, the portion where the cover member 93 is provided in the main controller 92 is not covered by the back pack unit 15, and the section screen 197 faces the back of the pachinko machine 10. Therefore, by rotating the gaming machine main body 12 forward of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the outer frame 11, the manager of the gaming hall can easily bring the reader device R closer to the section screen 197. Also from this point, the workability of the ID information reading work is improved.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 5A and 18, in the cover member 93, the distance from the mounting base 91 of the section screen 197 is substantially the same as the distance from the mounting base 91 on the bulging portion 114. It has become. That is, the section screen 197 is substantially flush with the surface on the bulging side of the bulging portion 114 and is not disposed at a position deep with respect to the surface. If the section screen 197 is arranged at a deep position, it is assumed that even if the tip of the reader device R is brought into contact with or in close proximity, the bulging portion 114 obstructs it, which makes it difficult to perform. Therefore, the occurrence of such inconvenience can be suppressed.

  Next, the operation of the cover member 93 provided for confirming the unauthorized opening of the board box 102 will be described.

  As described above, when the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, it is expected that some sort of disconnection occurs in the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 provided on the seal seal 160. When the antenna member 172 is cut, the IC tag 163 may not be able to communicate. In this case, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp that the unauthorized opening of the board box 102 has been performed because the ID information cannot be read even if the calling wave is output from the reader device R. .

  Even if the IC tag 163 is not disabled, if the antenna member 172 is disconnected, the communicable range of the IC tag 163 is narrowed. In this case, each antenna cut 176 of the seal seal 160 can communicate with the IC tag 163 as shown in FIG. 18 when the antenna member 172 is cut in the extending direction from any antenna cut 176. The distance is formed such that the distance L4 is shorter than the distance L1 from the position pasted on the surface region 133 in the seal seal 160 to the surface of the first separation wall 194. As a result, the communicable range C2 of the IC tag 163 does not include the section screen 197, and even if the manager of the game hall attempts to read the ID information with the reader device R positioned on the section screen 197, It becomes impossible. Thereby, the manager of the game hall can grasp that the board box 102 has been illegally opened.

  In addition, some game hall managers or the like may perform the ID information reading operation by bringing the reader device R close to the cover member 93 from the second separation wall 195 side, for example, without positioning on the section screen 197. . Even in this case, when the antenna member 172 is disconnected and the communicable distance of the IC tag 163 becomes L4, the second separation wall 195 is included in the communicable range of the IC tag 163. Therefore, it is impossible to read the ID information.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 5B, an audio lamp control device 66 is juxtaposed at a position on the side of one locking wall 188 with reference to the cover member 93, and the other locking wall. A payout control device 82 is arranged at a position on the part 189 side. Therefore, even if the manager or the like of the game hall tries to bring the reader device R closer from one of the locking wall portions 188 and 189, it is restricted. Therefore, the locking wall portions 188 and 189 are configured to overlap the fixed base 191, and the locking wall portions 188 and 189 are still included in the communicable range in a situation where a predetermined cut occurs in the antenna member 172. Does not cause any problems.

  Similarly, as shown in FIG. 5B, the mounting base 91 and the game board 33 are located at a position on the overlapping wall 190 side with respect to the cover member 93. Therefore, even if the manager of the game hall tries to bring the reader device R closer from the overlapping wall 190 side, it is restricted. Therefore, the overlapping wall portion 190 is configured to overlap the fixed base 191, and there is no problem even if the overlapping wall portion 190 is included in the communicable range in a situation where the antenna member 172 has been disconnected.

  Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG. In FIG. 19, a power supply line is indicated by a double line arrow, and a signal line is indicated by a solid line arrow.

  A main control board 101 provided in the main controller 92 incorporates a main control circuit 202 and a power failure monitoring circuit 203. The main control circuit 202 has a CPU chip 103 mounted thereon. The CPU chip 103 temporarily stores various control programs executed by the CPU chip 103 and ROM 205 storing fixed value data, and various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 205. And a RAM 206 as a memory for the memory, and various circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data input / output circuit.

  The CPU chip 103 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the CPU chip 103 are a power failure monitoring circuit 203 provided on the main control board 101, a payout control board 211 provided on the payout control device 82, and a switch group (not shown). In this case, the power failure monitoring circuit 203 is connected to a power source and launch control board 215 provided in the power source and launch control device 83, and power is supplied to the CPU chip 103 via the power failure monitoring circuit 203.

  On the other hand, a power failure monitoring circuit 203, a payout control board 211, and a relay terminal board 219 are connected to the output side of the CPU chip 103. Various commands such as a prize ball command are output to the payout control board 211. Various commands are output from the main control circuit 202 to the sound lamp control board 221 provided in the sound lamp control device 66 via the relay terminal board 219.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 203 relays between the main control circuit 202 and the power source and launch control board 215, and monitors a DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power source and launch control board 215.

  The payout control board 211 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 78. The CPU 212 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 213 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 212, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 214 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The CPU 212 of the payout control board 211 is provided with an input / output port. The main control circuit 202, the power and launch control board 215, and the back pack board are connected to the input side of the CPU 212. Further, the main control circuit 202 and the back pack substrate are connected to the output side of the CPU 212.

  The power source and launch control board 215 includes a power source unit 216 and a launch control unit 217. The power supply unit 216 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control circuit 202, the payout control board 211, etc., and the generated operating power is indicated by a double line arrow. This is supplied to the main control circuit 202 and the payout control board 211 through the path. The launch control unit 217 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 50, and the game ball launch mechanism 50 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

  The sound lamp control board 221 controls the display control device 225. The CPU 222 that is an arithmetic unit includes a ROM 223 that stores a control program executed by the CPU 222, fixed value data, and the like, and a RAM 224 that is used as a work memory or the like.

  The CPU 222 of the sound lamp control board 221 is provided with an input / output port. A main control circuit 202 is connected to the input side of the CPU 222 through a relay terminal board 219 and controls the display control device 225 based on various commands output from the main control circuit 202. The display control device 225 controls the symbol display device 41 based on a display command input from the sound lamp control board 221.

  Next, the confirmation work of the presence or absence of fraud based on reading ID information from the IC tag 163 will be described. FIG. 20 is a schematic view of a game hall H in which a large number of the pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  In FIG. 20, each pachinko machine 10 installed in the game hall H has an IC tag 163 attached to the main controller 92 as described above. The reader device R is a handy type reader and can read ID information from the IC tag 163 in a non-contact state. In this case, as described above, when reading the ID information, the gaming machine main body 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11, and the tip of the reader device R is brought into contact with or close to the section screen 197 of the cover member 93. The reading operation is performed in the state in which it has been performed.

  The management computer HC is an electronic arithmetic device having a management program for the pachinko machine 10, and is connected to the reader device R so as to be able to read information read by the reader device R. In FIG. 20, symbol DC is a data counter for displaying the number of game games, the number of jackpots, etc., and the data counter DC is assigned a machine number for each pachinko machine 10 in the game hall H.

  In the above configuration, when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163 of each pachinko machine 10 by the reader device R, the reading result is input and collected in the management computer HC. In this case, the reader device R outputs ID information together with unique information (such as a machine number) that identifies the pachinko machine 10 that is the output source of the ID information. That is, when the operator who operates the reader device R starts reading the ID information, the unique information of the pachinko machine 10 that starts reading is input to the reader device R, and the input unique information together with the read ID information. It is output to the management computer HC.

  The management computer HC stores management data in which management ID information is registered in association with the unique information of the pachinko machine 10. The management computer HC reads management ID information based on the input unique information, compares the management ID information with the input ID information, stores the comparison result, and displays the comparison result. The information is displayed on a display device provided in the management computer HC. As a result, after performing a replacement of the main control device 92 with an unauthorized device or an unauthorized control board or an unauthorized chip performed by opening the substrate box 102 as an illegal act against the main control device 92, Even if an illegal act of attaching an illegal IC tag capable of transmitting ID information is performed, it can be detected.

  In addition, if a response wave is not received by the reader device R even after a predetermined time has passed even though the calling wave is output from the reader device R, information indicating that is output to the management computer HC. May be. Then, in the management computer HC, the fact that the response wave is not received is stored in a manner specifying the pachinko machine 10 and displayed on the display device. As a result, after the main control device 92 is replaced with an unauthorized device or the substrate box 102 is opened and replaced with an unauthorized control board or an unauthorized chip, an unauthorized act of not attaching an unauthorized IC tag. If it is done, it will be possible to discover it.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Whether or not the game hall manager or the like can receive legitimate identification information from the IC tag 163 by sticking the seal sticker 160 with the IC tag 163 to the board box 102 of the main controller 92. By confirming the above, it is possible to manage the main control device 92 suitably.

  In this configuration, when the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, it is expected that some disconnection occurs in the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 provided on the seal seal 160. When the antenna member 172 is cut, the IC tag 163 may not be able to communicate. In this case, the manager of the game hall or the like can grasp that the unauthorized opening of the board box 102 has been performed because the ID information cannot be read even if the calling wave is output from the reader device R. .

  In addition, when the antenna member 172 is cut at an intermediate position in the length direction, the IC tag 163 can communicate, but it is assumed that the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, if the reading operation by the reader device R is performed outside the communicable distance after shortening, the fact of the fraudulent act can be recognized through the reading operation, but the reading operation is performed within the communicable distance after the shortening. If done, the fact of fraud cannot be recognized through the reading operation.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, the substrate box 102 is provided with the cover member 93, and the reading position when the reader device R reads the identification information from at least a specific direction with respect to the IC tag 163. Is limited to a position away from the IC tag 163 by a predetermined distance or more. As a result, if a game hall manager or the like decides that the IC tag 163 should be read by the reader device R from a specific direction, the antenna member 172 is cut and the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, by grasping the fact that the ID information cannot be read by the reader device R, it can be recognized that there is a possibility that the substrate box 102 has been illegally opened.

  Moreover, according to this structure, the said effect can be show | played by the comparative structure of providing the cover member 93. FIG. For game hall managers and the like, the reader device R is in contact with or close to the section screen 197 of the cover member 93 so that the reader device R is separated from the IC tag 163 by a predetermined distance or more. Become. Therefore, the above-described effects can be achieved while improving the workability of the ID information reading work.

  In addition, the cover member 93 performs a function of protecting the seal seal 160 and a function of making it difficult to access the seal seal 160. That is, by providing the cover member 93, various effects can be achieved simultaneously.

  A slit 173 for impedance matching is formed in the antenna member 172, and an antenna cut 176 extending toward the slit 173 is formed in the base sheet 161. Thereby, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off in order to open the substrate box 102 illegally, it is expected that the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is destroyed or cut through the antenna cut 176. . When the region where the slit 173 is formed is broken or cut, impedance matching is not performed well between the antenna member 172 and the IC chip 171, and the IC tag 163 becomes unable to communicate. Thereby, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize the occurrence of an illegal act by grasping that the ID information reading operation cannot be performed.

  The seal seal 160 is attached so that a region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 (hereinafter also referred to as a slit region) straddles the boundary 136. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136, the slit area is destroyed or cut accordingly, and it is impossible for the game hall manager or the like to read ID information. By grasping it, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of fraud. Further, even if the seal seal 160 is peeled off to expose the boundary 136, it is necessary to peel off the region where the slit 173 is disposed on the seal seal 160 in order to expose the entire boundary 136. Then, it is expected that the slit area will be destroyed or cut through the antenna cut 176, and it will be easy to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent behavior by knowing that the game hall manager cannot read ID information. Can do.

  Further, the antenna member 172 is arranged such that a part of the antenna cut 176 extending toward the slit region straddles the boundary 136. Further, among the antenna notches 176 extending toward the slit region, a portion of the boundary 136 between the one formed on one long side of the antenna member 172 and the one formed on the other long side is interposed. A seal seal 160 is arranged so as to be sandwiched between the two. As a result, even if the seal seal 160 is peeled off from either of the opposing ends of the seal seal 160 across the boundary 136, the slit region can be broken or cut through the antenna cut 176. Therefore, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off to expose the boundary 136, the slit region is easily broken or cut.

  Incidentally, the antenna notch 176 is formed on one long side of the antenna member 172 and on the other long side, so that the antenna notch 176 is removed when the seal seal 160 is peeled off. The slit region is easily broken or cut through.

  In addition, each antenna cut 176 is formed so that the region where the antenna member 172 is not disposed in the base sheet 161 is one end and the other end is slightly over the region where the antenna member 172 is disposed. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is broken through the antenna cut 176, the broken area easily reaches the slit region in the seal seal 160, so that the slit region through the antenna cut 176 is easily broken or cut. .

  Further, the antenna cut 176 is formed in the base sheet 161 and is not formed in the antenna member 172. Further, the antenna notch 176 formed on one long side of the antenna member 172 and the antenna notch 176 formed on the other long side are formed so as not to line up in the width direction of the antenna member 172. ing. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the slit region is easily broken or cut through the antenna cut 176, there is a possibility that the slit region is accidentally broken or cut when the seal seal 160 is properly attached to the sticking region. Reduced.

  In the pasting area where the seal seal 160 is pasted, the boundary 136 between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 is formed to have a bent portion. In the configuration in which the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary 136, the seal seal 160 is cut or cut along the boundary 136 so that the boundary 136 is exposed when the substrate box 102 is opened. It needs to be peeled off. On the other hand, since the boundary 136 is formed to have a bent portion, cutting the sealing seal 160 along the boundary 136 results in a wider cutting area than a configuration in which the boundary 136 is straight. It is difficult to perform cutting work. On the other hand, if the seal seal 160 is to be peeled off, it is considered that the seal seal 160 is torn during the peeling, and if the seal seal 160 is torn, the antenna member 172 is cut accordingly. There is expected. Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the seal sticker 160 with the IC tag 163 is enhanced.

  A hook portion 155 is formed in the recessed area 142 of the front-side fixed base portion 131, and the two constituent members 111 and 112 are slid in the direction restricted by the restricting means so as to separate the front-side constituent member 111 and the back-side constituent member 112. In the case of the movement, the hooking portion 155 comes into contact with the protruding wall portion 144 of the back side fixed base portion 132 so that the sliding movement is prevented. This makes it difficult even if the front side structure 111 and the back side structure 112 are separated to perform a predetermined fraud. Then, the protruding wall portion 144 enters the recessed region 142, so that a bent portion is generated at the boundary 136. That is, according to this configuration, a bent portion can be generated at the boundary 136 by using a configuration that prevents the front-side structure 111 and the back-side structure 112 from being separated.

<Second Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the structure for reliably separating the reading position of the ID information by the reader device by a predetermined distance from the position of the IC tag is different from that of the first embodiment. Such a different configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the configuration of the main controller 230 on the side where the cover member 239 is attached and the configuration of the periphery thereof. In addition, about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, it attaches | subjects the same number in FIG. 21, and abbreviate | omits description fundamentally.

  The main control device 230 is mounted on the game board 33 via the mount 91 in the same manner as the main control device 92 in the first embodiment. The main control device 230 includes a board box 233 formed by combining a front side structure 231 and a back side structure 232, and the main control board is accommodated in the board box 233.

  Similar to the substrate box 102 in the first embodiment, the substrate box 233 is provided with a fixed base 236 formed by combining a front side fixed base portion 234 and a back side fixed base portion 235. A seal seal 237 is affixed to 236 so as to straddle the boundary between the base portions 234 and 235. The seal seal 237 includes an IC tag 238. The configurations of the seal seal 237 and the IC tag 238 are the same as those of the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 in the first embodiment.

  A cover member 239 is attached to the substrate box 233 so as to surround the periphery of the seal seal 237. Similar to the cover member 93 in the first embodiment, the cover member 239 is formed in a box shape in which a predetermined internal space 240 is formed, and the fixed base 236 to which the seal seal 237 is attached is attached to the cover member 239. It is accommodated in the internal space 240.

  Here, unlike the cover member 93 in the first embodiment, the cover member 239 is not formed so that all wall portions can transmit radio waves, but only some wall portions transmit radio waves. It is made possible. Specifically, each wall portion 242 except for the transmissive wall portion 241 that forms a surface facing the game board 33 side in the cover member 239 is formed to have a shielding property that prevents or suppresses transmission of radio waves. . Although the specific structure for making it have the said shielding property is arbitrary, For example, the wall part 242 is formed by the structure which forms the said wall part 242 with a metal material with high electromagnetic shielding property, or the material with low electromagnetic shielding property. The base may be formed and the base may be coated with a material having a high electromagnetic sealability.

  By providing the cover member 239 as described above, the normal communicable range C1 of the IC tag 238 is restricted to the transmissive wall portion 241 side, that is, the game board 33 side. The game board 33 is made of a material that can transmit radio waves, specifically, wood. Further, a pedestal 243 for affixing a sticker on which manufacturing information of the pachinko machine 10 is described is provided at a portion of the surface of the game board 33 positioned in front of the pachinko machine 10 of the cover member 239. In 243, the sticking surface 244 to which the certificate paper is stuck is flat. The pedestal 243 and the certificate paper can transmit radio waves, and no member for blocking radio waves is provided between the pedestal 243 and the IC tag 238.

  The communicable range of the IC tag 238 includes the entire pasting surface 244 of the pedestal 243 and includes a space in front of the pachinko machine 10 relative to the pedestal 243. Therefore, when reading ID information, the game hall manager or the like opens the front door frame 14 to expose the surface of the game board 33, and the tip of the reader device R is attached to the pasting surface 244 or the pasting surface 244. The ID information reading operation can be performed easily and reliably by contacting or approaching the attached certificate paper. In other words, the pasting surface 244 functions as a positioning unit for reading ID information.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID information reading operation is performed from the front side of the gaming machine body 12 rather than from the back side of the gaming machine body 12.

  Since the IC tag 238 of the present embodiment has the same configuration as the IC tag 163 in the first embodiment, the antenna member of the IC tag 238 is opened when the board box 233 is illegally opened. It is expected that some disconnection will occur at 238a. When the antenna member 238a is cut, the IC tag 238 may be unable to communicate. In this case, it is possible for the game hall manager or the like to grasp that the board box 233 has been illegally opened because the ID information cannot be read even if the calling wave is output from the reader device R.

  Even if the IC tag 238 does not become disabled, if the antenna member 238a is disconnected, the communicable range of the IC tag 238 becomes narrower. In this case, since the pasting surface 244 is not included in the communicable range C2 of the IC tag 238, the manager of the game hall or the like reads the ID information with the reader device R positioned on the pasting surface 244. But it will be impossible.

  In particular, the cover member 239 has a shielding property in which the wall portions 242 other than the permeable wall portion 241 prevent or suppress the transmission of radio waves, so that the ID information is read from the back side of the gaming machine body 12. However, this is not possible, and the reading position is reliably restricted to the affixing surface 244 side. Therefore, when the antenna member 238a is cut, a situation in which the reading operation of the ID information cannot be performed by the reader device R is likely to occur, and accordingly, the unauthorized opening of the board box 102 is easily detected.

  In addition to the configuration in which the reading position of the ID information by the reader device R is positioned on the surface side of the game board 33, in the configuration where the normal communicable range of the IC tag 238 is wider than the above, It is good also as a structure positioned on the surface side of the front door frame 14. In this case, when the manager of the game hall or the like should read ID information from the front side of the front door frame 14 but would read the ID information from the front side of the game board 33, the IC tag 238 may be used. ID information can be read even if the communicable range of the ID is narrow, but it is not necessary to open the front door frame 14 when the ID information is normally read. The workability of the information reading operation can be improved.

<Third Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the positional relationship of the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 with respect to the boundary 136 between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 in the fixed base 191 is different from that in the first embodiment. Such a different configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the boundary 136 and the antenna member 172. In addition, about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, while attaching the same number in FIG. 22, description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  The boundary 136 is formed in a non-straight line as in the first embodiment, and is formed by sequentially connecting the first line 145 to the fifth line 149. The antenna member 172 is arranged so as to straddle the boundary 136 as in the first embodiment, but unlike the first embodiment, the antenna member 172 includes a plurality of lines 147 to 149 instead of a single line. Straddling. Specifically, the antenna member 172 straddles the third line 147, the fourth line 148, and the fifth line 149. In this case, a slit 173 is formed in a region across the third line 147 in the antenna member 172.

  According to the above configuration, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 136 so as to perform the unauthorized opening of the board box 102, the antenna member 172 is cut in more places than in the first embodiment. There is expected. Further, when the sealing seal 160 is peeled off from the fixed base 191 in order to open the board box 102 illegally, it is peeled off from the fixed base 191 in order to expose the boundary 136 in the region where the antenna member 172 is disposed on the sealing seal 160. The area that needs to be widened. Then, it is expected that the number of locations where the antenna member 172 is cut through the antenna cut 176 increases.

  As described above, the more the number of locations where the antenna member 172 is cut, the smaller the length of the antenna member 172 after fraud. Then, after the fraud, the communicable range can be further narrowed from the normal range, and fraud detection can be easily performed.

  Incidentally, in the antenna member 172, the region where the slit 173 is formed straddles the boundary 136, and the antenna cuts 176 on each long side portion formed so as to sandwich the slit 173 therebetween are on both sides of the boundary 136. Has been placed. Therefore, when the seal seal 160 is cut or removed from the fixed base 191 to illegally open the substrate box 102, the antenna member 172 is cut or broken in the region where the slit 173 is formed. It is expected that communication will be disabled.

  Note that in the above configuration, the number of locations where the antenna member 172 crosses the boundary 136 is not three, but may be two, or four or more.

<Fourth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the shape of the boundary between both base portions in the fixed base 191 is different from that in the first embodiment. Such a different configuration will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the boundary 253 and the antenna member 172. In addition, about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, it attaches | subjects the same number in FIG. 23, and abbreviate | omits description fundamentally.

  The boundary 253 of the both fixed base portions 251 and 252 constituting the fixed base 191 is formed in a non-linear manner, similar to the boundary 136 in the first embodiment. However, the boundary 253 is formed with a smaller number of lines than the boundary 136 in the first embodiment. Specifically, the first line 255 continuous from the boundary outside the side surface region 254 and the direction continuous to the first line 255 and intersecting the first line 255, more specifically, orthogonal or substantially A second line 256 extending in a direction orthogonal to the second line 256, a direction continuous with the second line 256 and intersecting the second line 256, more specifically, parallel or substantially parallel to the first line 255. And a third line 257 extending in the direction in which the third line 257 continues to the boundary outside the side surface region 254.

  The seal sticker 160 having the IC tag 163 is arranged so that the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the third line 257. In this case, the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 does not straddle the third line 257, but the region where the slit 173 is formed is closer to the back surface region 258 than the third line 257, and the first line. At least a part, specifically, the whole is included in the range on the surface region 259 side of 255. Accordingly, when the sealing seal 160 is peeled in the same direction so as to expose the entire boundary 253 when the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, the region where the slit 173 is formed is also peeled off. Then, the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is expected to be cut or destroyed through the antenna cut 176 formed toward the slit 173.

  Further, the antenna cuts 176 on the long side portions formed so as to sandwich the slit 173 therebetween are arranged on both sides of the third line 257. Therefore, even when the sealing seal 160 is peeled off while changing the direction to expose the entire boundary 253 when the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is the slit 173. It is expected to be cut or destroyed through the antenna cut 176 formed toward the front.

<Fifth embodiment>
Focusing on the feature that when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163 from a specific direction, the illegal position can be well detected by limiting the reading position to be a predetermined distance or more from the IC tag 163. Or when the antenna member 172 is formed with the slit 173 as the incapable state generating portion and the antenna notch 176 is formed with respect to the slit 173, and pays attention to the feature that the fraud can be detected well. The configuration shown in FIG. 24 may be adopted. Hereinafter, the configuration of FIG. 24 will be described. FIG. 24 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the positional relationship between the boundary 263 and the antenna member 172. In addition, about the structure similar to the said 1st Embodiment, it attaches | subjects the same number in FIG. 24, and abbreviate | omits description fundamentally.

  Unlike the boundary 136 in the first embodiment, the boundary 263 between the both fixed base portions 261 and 262 constituting the fixed base 191 is formed in a straight line. The seal seal 160 having the IC tag 163 is disposed so that the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the boundary 263. Accordingly, when the sealing seal 160 is cut along the boundary 263 when the substrate box 102 is illegally opened, the region where the slit 173 is formed is also cut.

  In addition, the antenna cuts 176 on the long side portions formed so as to sandwich the slit 173 are disposed on both sides of the boundary 263. Therefore, the area where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 is the slit 173 regardless of the direction in which the seal seal 160 is peeled off so as to expose the entire boundary 263 when the board box 102 is illegally opened. It is expected to be cut or destroyed through the antenna cut 176 formed toward the front.

<Sixth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the main control device 281 is different from that of the first embodiment. Below, the structure from which it differs is demonstrated. FIG. 25 is a perspective view showing the configuration of the main controller 281 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration of the main controller 281 where the seal seal 160 is provided. In addition, while using the same number about the same structure as the said 1st Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  The main control device 281 includes a substrate box 282 that accommodates the main control substrate 101, similarly to the main control device 92 in the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 25, the board box 282 includes a front side structure (box cover) 283 and a back side structure (box base) 284 as a plurality of case bodies. By combining the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284, the board box 282 is formed in a square box shape having an internal space for accommodating the main control board 101.

  The front-side structure 283 and the back-side structure 284 are similar to the board box 102 in the first embodiment, in which the element mounting surface 106 and the solder surface 107 of the main control board 101 housed in the board box 282 are connected to the board box. It is formed of a transparent material (for example, polycarbonate resin or acrylic resin) so that it can be visually recognized from the outside. Moreover, both the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 are formed so as to form a substantially rectangular shape, specifically, a substantially rectangular shape when viewed from the front.

  The front-side structure 283 and the back-side structure 284 are used to open the inner space of the substrate box 282 by separating the two structures 283 and 284 and opening the other of the two structures 283 and 284. Restricting means is provided for making it necessary to slide in the separating direction. As in the first embodiment, the restriction means includes a plurality of hook portions 285 and a hook receiving portion 286 that receives the hook portion 285 (for the hook portion 285 and the hook receiving portion 286). (See FIG. 27). In the present board box 282, unlike the board box 102 in the first embodiment, the hook part 285 is provided on the long side part facing each other in the front side structure 283, and the hook receiving part 286 is configured on the back side. The long sides of the body 284 facing each other are provided.

  In the case where both the structural bodies 283 and 284 are separated by the restricting means to open the internal space of the substrate box 282, the other of the two structural bodies 283 and 284 is set to one of the longitudinal directions of the substrate box 282. It is necessary to move the slide toward. Further, the sliding movement is restricted by the hook portion 285 coming into contact with the hook receiving portion 286, and thereafter, both the movements are performed to release the state where the hook portion 285 enters the hook receiving portion 286. It is necessary to separate the structural bodies 283 and 284 in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282.

  A fixed region 287 is provided on one of the pair of short sides in the substrate box 282. The fixing region 287 is formed with a plurality of coupling portions 288 that couple the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 to each other and require partial destruction when the coupling is released.

  The coupling portion 288 includes a front side coupling portion formed on the front side configuration body 283 and a back side coupling portion formed on the back side configuration body 284, and is formed in a coupling hole formed by overlapping both coupling portions. On the other hand, a broken screw, a one-way screw, or a locking claw member is attached, so that a coupled state is established. In order to release the coupled state, it is necessary to destroy the wall portion forming the coupling portion 288 and the connecting portion that couples the coupling portion 288 and the main body portion of the substrate box 282. It is possible to visually confirm that the opening operation of the internal space 282 has been performed.

  In the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284, the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292 are provided on the short side portion opposite to the side where the fixing region 287 is provided, as shown in FIG. ing. The front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 are integrally formed by extending laterally from the main body portion for housing the main control board 101. The side on which the fixed base portions 291 and 292 are provided is a destination side when the front side structure 283 is slid in the opening separating direction regulated by the regulating means. On the contrary, it may be the destination side when the back side structural body 284 is slid.

  In a state where the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 are combined, the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292 are juxtaposed in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282 to form a sticking base 293 having a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. ing. A pasting region 294 for pasting the seal seal 160 having the IC tag 163 is formed on the surface of the pasting base 293.

  The affixing region 294 is configured by both a front surface region 295 configured by the front side fixed base portion 291, a back surface region (not shown) configured by the back side fixed base portion 292, and the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292. And a side surface region 296 that is continuous with both the front surface region 295 and the back surface region via the corner portions and is interposed between the front surface region 295 and the back surface region. These front surface region 295, back surface region, and side surface region 296 are formed in a planar shape.

  Since the side surface region 296 is constituted by both the front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 as described above, the side surface region 296 has a boundary 297 between the two fixed base portions 291 and 292. Here, the configuration in which the boundary 297 occurs will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 27 in addition to FIG. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 293 and its periphery in an enlarged manner.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the front-side fixing base portion 291 includes a front-side sticking plate portion 301 that constitutes a part of the surface region 295 and the side surface region 296 and sandwiches the front-side sticking plate portion 301 therebetween. A pair of front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 are formed. Both front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 protrude toward at least the back-side fixed base portion 292.

  On the other hand, the back-side fixed base portion 292 includes a back-side pasting plate portion 304 that constitutes a back-side region, and the back-side pasting plate portion 304 is on the front-side pasting plate portion 301 side from the side opposite to the back-side region side. A pedestal portion 305 projecting toward the center is provided. The pedestal portion 305 is formed across a pair of back side opposing plate portions 306 and 307 formed so as to sandwich the back side sticking plate portion 304 therebetween. As shown in FIG. 26, the pedestal portion 305 protrudes so as to enter between the front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303, and the end surface on the protruding side of the pedestal portion 305 is connected to the surface region 295 side in the front-side sticking plate portion 301. Is close to the opposite surface. However, they are not in contact with each other, and a predetermined gap is formed.

  The side surface outside the board box 282 in the pedestal portion 305 is located on the same plane with respect to the protruding end surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 301 with the predetermined gap interposed therebetween. 296 is formed. A predetermined space is formed between the pedestal portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301 by the predetermined gap, and the space is formed between the pedestal portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301 on the side surface region 296. And is opened to the side by a boundary 297.

  In the space between the pedestal portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301, a sealing member 160 and a breaking member 311 for cutting the IC tag 163 are provided. The breaking member 311 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29 in addition to FIGS.

  FIG. 28A is a rear view of the breaking member 311, and FIG. 28B is a perspective view of the breaking member 311 as viewed from the back side. FIG. 29A is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 293 and its surroundings in an enlarged manner, and FIG. 29B is a side view showing the pasting base 293 and its surroundings in an enlarged manner.

  The breaking member 311 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. Further, as shown in FIGS. 27, 28A, and 28B, the breaking member 311 has a thickness dimension that allows entry into the space between the pedestal portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301, and the pedestal. A plate-like fracture base portion 312 having a length that is slightly larger than the distance between the back-side opposing plate portions 306 and 307 in the portion 305, and a pair of breakage base portions 312 formed at both ends in the length direction. The arm portions 313 and 314 are integrally formed.

  The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 protrude toward the back-side pasting plate portion 304 at positions outside the both end portions 305a and 305b close to the back-side facing plate portions 306 and 307 in the pedestal portion 305. Then, the base member 305 is sandwiched between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314, and the base member 311 is disposed so that the base portion 312 is inserted between the base portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301. ing.

  Here, both end portions 305a and 305b of the pedestal portion 305 are not covered with the back-side facing plate portions 306 and 307 as shown in FIG. Further, the front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 are recessed at the corners on the side region 296 side and on the back-side opposing plate portions 306 and 307 side so as not to cover both end portions 305a and 305b of the pedestal portion 305. Is formed. Therefore, both end portions 305a and 305b of the pedestal portion 305 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 293 as shown in FIG.

  In the above configuration, the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are provided with the pedestal portion 305 sandwiched therebetween as described above, so that as shown in FIG. It is exposed to the outside of the pasting base 293. Further, the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are disposed between the corresponding front side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 and the rear side opposing plate portions 306 and 307, and both end portions 305 a and 305 b of the pedestal portion 305 are attached to the pasting base 293. The exposed part is buried.

  While the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 293, the fracture base portion 312 is accommodated in the sticking base 293. If attention is paid to the pasting area 294, it can be said that the destruction base portion 312 is arranged on the opposite side of the pasting base 293 where the pasting area 294 is provided.

  Although the destruction base portion 312 has a plate shape as described above, as shown in FIGS. 28A and 28B, it is orthogonal to both the direction between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 and the thickness direction. A tapered region 315 is formed so as to taper from an intermediate position in the width direction that is a direction toward one end side in the width direction. Further, the tip of the tapered region 315 is formed so as to be inclined so as to intersect with the direction between the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 as shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 27, the breaking member 311 is arranged such that the tapered region 315 faces the boundary 297 side of the side surface region 296. In this case, the tapered region 315 enters the inside of the sticking base 293 with respect to the boundary 297, and the tapered region 315 does not protrude outside the side surface region 296. That is, the breaking member 311 is separated from the seal sticker 160 and the IC tag 163 attached to the attaching region 294. However, the tip of the breaking member 311 may be configured to be in contact with the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 by protruding on the boundary 297 or slightly outside the boundary 297. Since the taper region 315 is formed on the breaking member 311, the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag 163 attached to the attachment region 294 can be easily cut. This operation will be described in detail later. Explained.

  The breaking member 311 having the above-described configuration is attached to the sticking base 293 after the front-side structural body 283 and the back-side structural body 284 are combined and the relative positions of both the structural bodies 283 and 284 become the initial position. In detail, regarding the configuration relating to the mounting, when both the structural bodies 283 and 284 are combined and the relative positions of the both structural bodies 283 and 284 become the initial positions, as shown in FIG. A pasting base 293 is formed in a state where 305a and 305b are exposed and a space between the pedestal 305 and the front side pasting plate 301 is opened through the boundary 297 of the side region 296. Then, with respect to the sticking base 293, the end opposite to the tapered region 315 side is set as the insertion destination side, and the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 slide on both end portions 305a and 305b of the base portion 305. In this way, the breaking member 311 is inserted. In this case, the movement in the insertion direction is the periphery of the concave portion formed to expose both end portions 305a and 305b of the pedestal portion 305 in the front side opposing plate portions 302 and 303, and the insertion side of the breaking member 311 When the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are brought into contact with the peripheral edge, further movement is restricted. This restricted position is the position in which the breaking member 311 is installed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 27, the pedestal portion 305 has a plurality of screw holes 316 that are open toward the front-side sticking plate portion 301 side, as well as the breaking member 311 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301. Are formed with through holes 317 and 318 for opening the screw holes 316 to the outside of the front-side sticking plate portion 301. These through holes 317 and 318 are arranged so as to be on the same axis with respect to the corresponding screw holes 316. Then, a screw 319 as a fixing member that can be attached and detached using a predetermined tool such as a screwdriver is screwed into each screw hole 316 from the front-side sticking plate portion 301 side, whereby the breaking member 311. The fixed base portions 291 and 292 are fixed in a state where the plate is sandwiched between the front-side sticking plate portion 301 and the pedestal portion 305. By completing the screw fixing, the attachment of the breaking member 311 to the sticking base 293 is completed.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIG. 28A, the through hole 317 for allowing the screw 319 to pass through in the breaking member 311 is generally formed not on the tapered region 315 of the breaking base portion 312 but on the thick region side. Yes. Thereby, compared with the structure in which the through-hole 317 is formed with respect to the taper area | region 315, the improvement in the intensity | strength in the peripheral part of the through-hole 317 is achieved.

  As shown in FIGS. 29 (a) and 29 (b), a sealing seal 160 having an IC tag 163 is attached to the sticking base 293 to which the breaking member 311 is mounted as described above. The configurations of the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 are the same as those in the first embodiment. The seal seal 160 is pasted so as to cover substantially the entire pasting area 294. Therefore, the opening of each through-hole 318 formed in the surface region 295 is covered with the seal seal 160, and the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is one of the through-holes as in the first embodiment. It straddles the opening of the hole 318.

  In addition, since the seal seal 160 is affixed across the boundary 297 between the front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292, the opening operation of the substrate box 282 is hindered by the seal seal 160. Therefore, it is difficult to open the substrate box 282 without cutting the seal seal 160 along the boundary 297 or removing the seal seal 160.

  The positional relationship between the breaking member 311 and the seal seal 160 will be described. The seal seal 160 is disposed at a position separated from the breaking member 311. Further, since the breaking member 311 is provided so as to be slidable toward the boundary 297, it can be said that the seal seal 160 is provided at a position midway along the sliding movement of the breaking member 311.

  Further, substantially the entire boundary 297 in the side surface region 296 is covered with the seal seal 160, and the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the boundary 297. In this case, as shown in FIG. 29B, among the impedance matching slits 173 in the antenna member 172, the first slit portion 174 extending in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 297. As a result, when the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 297, the area where the first slit portion 174 is formed in the antenna member 172 is cut, and normal communication is impossible in the IC tag 163.

  Incidentally, also in the present embodiment, a surrounding portion 321 is formed on the sticking base 293 so as to partition the sticking region 294. In this case, a part of the surrounding portion 321 is formed by the front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 and the back-side opposing plate portions 306 and 307, but the pair of arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 correspond to each other as described above. The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321. The pair of arm portions 313 and 314 are disposed between the front side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 and the back side opposing plate portions 306 and 307. The operation and effect obtained by forming the surrounding portion 321 is as described in the first embodiment.

  The seal seal 160 attached to the attachment region 294 is covered with a cover member 331. The cover member 331 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 30 (a) and 30 (b) as appropriate in addition to FIG. 29 (a).

  FIG. 30A is a perspective view of the cover member 331, and FIG. 30B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 331 is attached to the substrate box 282. In FIG. 30B, the destructive member 311 is shown in a state other than a cross section for convenience of explanation.

  The cover member 331 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin into a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 332 as shown in FIGS. A plurality of (specifically, five) wall portions that define the internal space 332 can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 331. As shown in FIG. 30A, an opening 333 is formed in the cover member 331 so that one of the six surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and an internal space 332 is formed through the opening 333. The cover member 331 is open to the outside. Further, the opening 333 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 334 and 335 facing each other with the opening 333 interposed therebetween.

  The internal space 332 of the cover member 331 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 293 to which the breaking member 311 is integrated and the seal seal 160 is stuck. The opening 333 is formed in such a size that the sticking base 293 can be inserted into the internal space 332 from the protruding tip side of the sticking base 293.

  The distance between the both wall portions 334 and 335 of the cover member 331 is equal to or greater than the distance between the pair of opposed plate portions 302, 303, 306, and 307 facing each other across the pasting region 294 in the pasting base 293. It is set slightly larger. A pair of claw portions 336 and 337 are integrally formed on both the wall portions 334 and 335 so as to protrude from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 333 toward the sticking base 293 (note that the claw portion 337 is shown in FIG. see b)). The claw portions 336 and 337 have free ends at their distal ends, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  A pair of arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 integrated with the sticking base 293 as shown in FIGS. 28 (a), 28 (b) and 29 (a) corresponding to the claw portions 336 and 337. , Receiving portions 338 and 339 are integrally formed so as to protrude outward. The cover member 331 is installed in the substrate box 282 so that the sticking base 293 is inserted into the internal space 332 through the opening 333. At the time of installation, the claw portions 336 and 337 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward by coming into contact with the corresponding receiving portions 338 and 339 from the original side in the mounting direction, and hook portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 are hooked. However, when it reaches the front side in the mounting direction with respect to the receiving portions 338 and 339, it returns to the natural state by the restoring force. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 30 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 come into contact with the end portions of the receiving portions 338 and 339 from the front side in the mounting direction, and in the direction opposite to the mounting direction. Even if an attempt is made to move the cover member 331 in a certain removal direction, this is prevented by the contact. The cover member 331 is fixed to the substrate box 282 by locking (or engagement) between the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339.

  Here, the engaging portions of the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 are respectively arranged outside the sticking base 293 and can be accessed from the outside. Specifically, the engaging portion is exposed to the outside, and a pair of cover members 331 and a pair of attachment bases 293 are provided so as to be sandwiched in the width direction so that the engaging portion can be accessed. A predetermined space is formed between the coupling structures. The coupling structure will be described later.

  By fixing the cover member 331 to the substrate box 282, as shown in FIG. 25, substantially the entire sticking base 293 integrated with the breaking member 311 is surrounded by the cover member 331. Specifically, the front end side in the mounting direction of the cover member 331 is in contact with or close to the peripheral surface of the main body portion of the front-side component 283 and the back-side component 284, and the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 331 is the pasting region. 294 is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 321 on the front surface region 295 side, the side surface region 296 side, and the back surface region side.

  Here, the insertion amount of the sticking base 293 with respect to the internal space 332 of the cover member 331 is such that one component is slid from one initial position to the other in the longitudinal direction so as to separate the two components 283 and 284 from each other. The fixed base portions 291 and 292 are still set in the internal space 332 at the limit position. In this case, in order to separate both components 283 and 284 and completely open the internal space of the substrate box 282, the components 283 and 284 are separated in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282 after the sliding movement. There is a need. The amount of movement necessary for this separation is set to be larger than the dimension in the thickness direction at the opening 333 of the cover member 331. Therefore, in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 282, it is necessary to separate the cover member 331 from the sticking base 293.

  On the surface side wall portion 341 facing the surface region 295 in the cover member 331, a hole portion 342 for releasing the fixation is formed so as to be arranged on the same axis as each screw hole 316 of the sticking base 293. However, a seal seal 160 is interposed between the fixing-release hole 342 and the head of the screw 319 screwed into the corresponding screw hole 316. The unlocking hole 342 is used when the screw 319 is removed prior to opening the internal space of the board box 282. Details of this operation will be described later.

  The cover member 331 surrounds substantially the entire sticking base 293, so that the seal seal 160 is entirely surrounded by the cover member 331. As a result, the seal seal 160 is protected by the cover member 331. For example, when the pachinko machine 10 is shipped, the shrink film is thermally shrunk to cover the pachinko machine 10. However, in the configuration in which the main controller 281 is exposed on the back surface of the pachinko machine 10, the shrink film is used. It is preferable to suppress the influence on the seal 160 and the IC tag 163 such as a load in the shrinking direction and heat when the heat shrinks, and the influence is reduced by providing the cover member 331 as described above. be able to.

  Since the cover member 331 is colorless and transparent as described above, the sealing seal 160 can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 331 in the configuration in which the cover member 331 is provided as described above. However, the cover member 331 is not limited to colorless and transparent, and the cover member 331 may be transparent enough to visually confirm the seal seal 160 from the outside of the cover member 331. What is necessary is just to be colored and transparent. Further, the seal seal 160 cannot be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 331, but the cover member 331 may be made non-transparent. In this case, since the inside of the space surrounded by the cover member 331 cannot be confirmed from the outside, it is difficult for an unauthorized person to take measures against the cover member 331.

  As already described, the cover member 331 is formed so as to be able to transmit radio waves, and no member for blocking radio waves is provided between the IC tag 163 of the seal seal 160 and the cover member 331. Therefore, the manager or the like of the game hall can perform the reading operation without removing the cover member 331 when reading the ID information from the IC tag 163.

  Note that, similarly to the cover member 93 in the first embodiment, the cover member 331 has a positioning function of the reader device at the time of reading ID information and the reader device in advance from the IC tag 163 in the positioned state. It is good also as a structure which has the function to separate apart more than the defined distance.

  Next, a procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened will be described. FIGS. 31A to 31C are explanatory diagrams for explaining the procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened.

  As described above, since the regulation means is provided in the substrate box 282, it is necessary to slide the other of the two structural members 283 and 284 in the separating direction for opening. However, since the substrate box 282 is provided with the pasting base 293 and the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side stationary base portion 292 constituting the pasting base 293 are screwed, the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened. Prior to the operation, it is necessary to release the screw fixing. Further, as shown in FIG. 31A, since the cover member 331 is provided so as to prevent the separation between the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284, prior to the opening operation of the internal space of the substrate box 282. The cover member 331 needs to be separated.

  Of the screw fixing releasing operation and the cover member 331 separating operation, the cover member 331 is locked to the breaking member 311 and the breaking member 311 is separated from the sticking base 293 unless the screw fixing is released. Because it is not possible, it is necessary to release the screw fixing first. When the screw fixing release operation is performed, the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted from the fixing release hole 342 of the cover member 331. Then, the seal seal 160 covering the head of the screw 319 is pierced by the tip, so that the tip is inserted into the head of the screw 319 and the screw 319 is detached as shown in FIG. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through hole 318 for inserting the screw 319, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 319, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  When the screw 319 is detached as described above, the breaking member 311 can be separated from the sticking base 293, and accordingly, the cover member 331 can be separated from the sticking base 293. As already described, since the cover base 293 is inserted into the internal space 332, the cover member 331 covers the cover member 331 with the direction opposite to the installation direction at the time of installation as the separation direction (removal direction). The member 331 needs to be separated. In this case, since the claw portions 336 and 337 of the cover member 331 are in contact with the receiving portions 338 and 339 of the breaking member 311 from the front side in the mounting direction, the cover member 331 is moved in the separation direction. Then, the breaking member 311 also moves integrally in the separation direction.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), by separating the cover member 331 from the sticking base 293, the breaking member 311 is also attached to the sticking base 293 through the boundary 297 between the two fixed base portions 291 and 292 in the side region 296 of the sticking base 293. Separated from. In this case, since the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary 297, the seal seal 160 is cut along with the movement of the breaking member 311 from the inside to the outside of the pasting base 293, and the IC Since the antenna member 172 of the tag 163 is also provided so as to straddle the boundary 297, the antenna member 172 is cut as the destruction member 311 moves. In particular, since the region where the impedance matching slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 297, the slit 173 is destroyed as the destruction member 311 moves, and the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication. It becomes. Then, the obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 160 is released. Therefore, both the constituent members 283 and 284 can be slid and the internal space of the substrate box 282 can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the CPU chip 103 and the like.

  Incidentally, as already described, a tapered region 315 is formed in the destruction base portion 312 of the breaking member 311, and when the breaking member 311 is separated, the tip of the tapered region 315 becomes the leading side in the separation direction. . Therefore, a sharp point comes into contact with the seal seal 160 and the antenna member 172, and the sealing member 160 and the antenna member 172 can be easily cut, and the cover member 331 can be easily separated. . Further, since the tip of the tapered region 315 is inclined, the entire tip does not contact the seal seal 160 and the antenna member 172 at the same time, but the contact range at the tip gradually increases. Also in this respect, the cover member 331 can be easily separated as the sealing seal 160 and the antenna member 172 are easily cut.

  Note that the tip of the tapered region 315 may not be inclined and may be parallel to the boundary 297 as long as the function of cutting the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 is exhibited in the breaking member 311. Furthermore, the tapered region 315 may be omitted.

  From the above, by releasing the screw fixing and separating the cover member 331, the opening operation of the board box 282 can be performed. In this case, the breaking member 311 is slid along with the separation operation of the cover member 331, and the seal seal 160 is cut. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when performing the opening operation.

  In particular, when the cover member 331 for restricting the opening operation is attached, in addition to releasing the screw fixing and cutting the seal seal 160, it is necessary to separate the cover member 331 as a stage before performing the opening operation. For this reason, while an unauthorized opening operation can be suppressed, there is a concern about an increase in the amount of work required for a regular opening operation. In contrast, according to the present embodiment, since the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 are integrated by engagement, the sealing seal 160 is cut along with the separation work of the cover member 331. . Thereby, it is suppressed that workability | operativity in the case of performing opening operation falls extremely.

  Here, the cover member 331 is attached to the board box 282 by engaging with the breaking member 311, and the engaging portion is exposed so as to be accessible from the outside. For this reason, it is possible to release the integration of the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 by applying an external force to the engagement portion to release the engagement, and to separate only the cover member 331 from the substrate box 282. it can. Specifically, the claw portions 336 and 337 are disengaged by applying an external force toward the side opposite to the side from which the tip hook portion protrudes, and the direction opposite to the mounting direction at the time of installation is the separation direction. By sliding the cover member 331 as (removal direction), only the cover member 331 is separated from the substrate box 282. In this case, the breaking member 311 remains accommodated in the sticking base 293 and does not affect the sealing seal 160 at all. Thereby, the simple inspection which removes the cover member 331 from the board | substrate box 282, and confirms the sealing seal | sticker 160 and the member 311 for destruction directly without cut | disconnecting the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be performed.

  In particular, in a situation where the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 are surrounded by the cover member 331, it may be desired to remove the cover member 331 once in order to confirm these directly. In this case, when the cover member 331 is separated while the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 are engaged, the breaking member 311 is separated along with the separation of the cover member 331, and the breaking member 311 is separated. The sealing seal 160 is cut by separating the member 311. If it does so, the inconvenience that the check operation | work of the sealing seal | sticker 160 and the member 311 for destruction cannot be performed suitably will arise.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, by performing the separation operation of the cover member 331 in the state where the engagement between the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 is released, the sealing seal 160 is not cut. The cover member 331 can be removed from the substrate box 282. Accordingly, it is possible to easily cope with a case where a simple inspection for directly confirming the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 is performed.

  In addition, since the access to the seal seal 160 is restricted by the cover member 331 and the opening operation of the substrate box 282 is restricted, when the opening operation of the substrate box 282 is illegally performed, the cover member 331 is a preceding step. It is assumed that a separation operation is performed. Here, according to the present embodiment, since the sealing seal 160 is cut in accordance with the separation operation of the cover member 331, the cover member 331 is released without releasing the engagement of the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311. When the separating operation is performed, a cut portion of the seal seal 160 that is not intended for an unauthorized person is formed. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that an illegal separation operation of the cover member 331 has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to give up an unauthorized opening operation and to suppress a skillful fraud that performs the opening operation without forming a trace.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  Since the cover member 331 is provided so as to cover the seal seal 160, the seal seal 160 can be protected, and the cover member 331 is separated prior to the opening operation of the internal space of the substrate box 282. Need arises. In this case, when the cover member 331 is separated by providing the breaking member 311 separated through the boundary 297 of the pasting region 294 with the separation of the cover member 331 inside the pasting base 293, The sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 311. Thereby, when the opening operation of the internal space of the substrate box 282 is performed, a trace for visual confirmation due to the cutting of the seal seal 160 can be left.

  Further, when the sealing seal 160 is cut, the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is also cut. Thereby, when the opening operation of the internal space of the board box 282 is performed, it is expected that the ID information from the IC tag 163 cannot be read satisfactorily. Furthermore, the portion to be cut in the antenna member 172 is a region where the impedance matching slit 173 is formed. As a result, when the operation of opening the internal space of the board box 282 is performed, impedance matching is not accurately performed, and it is expected that reading of the ID information from the IC tag 163 becomes impossible. Therefore, even if the cover member 331 is returned to the original position after the unauthorized opening of the board box 282, the unauthorized opening of the board box 282 can be grasped through the ID information reading operation.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the surrounding portion 321 is provided from the viewpoint of suppressing the positioning of the seal seal 160 and the illegal act of peeling the seal seal 160, there is a concern that the workability in the opening operation may be reduced. On the other hand, according to this Embodiment, since the member 311 for a fracture | rupture which cut | disconnects the sealing seal | sticker 160 is provided separately, the fall of workability | operativity can be suppressed. Thereby, coexistence with suppression of the fraud to the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 and suppression of the workability | operativity at the time of opening operation can be aimed at.

  The arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 are formed so as to constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321. Thus, the breaking member 311 can be attached to the inside of the sticking base 293 without interference between the breaking member 311 and the portion constituting the surrounding portion 321.

<Seventh embodiment>
In the configuration in which the breaking member 311 is accommodated in the sticking base 293 and the cover member 331 covering the periphery of the sticking base 293 and the seal seal 160 is locked to the breaking member 311, the breaking member 311 and the cover Protective means may be provided to make access to the locking portion with the member 331 impossible or difficult to perform. A specific configuration of the protection means will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 32 (a) is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 293 and its surroundings in an enlarged manner for explaining the specific configuration of the protection means, and FIG. 32 (b) is for explaining the specific configuration of the protection means. It is explanatory drawing of. In FIG. 32B, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the breaking member 311 is shown in a state other than a cross section. The same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment, and description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 32A, a pair of protective wall portions 351 and 352 are integrally formed on the front side structure 283 of the substrate box 282 so as to sandwich the sticking base 293 in the width direction. The protective wall portions 351 and 352 are formed so as to protrude from the main body portion of the front side structure 283 in the same direction as the protruding direction of the sticking base 293, and each arm portion of the breaking member 311 integrated with the sticking base 293. They are arranged at positions spaced apart from 313 and 314 by a predetermined distance in the width direction.

  As shown in FIG. 32 (b), the wall surfaces 353 and 354 facing the sticking base 293 side in the protective wall portions 351 and 352 are the arm portions of the breaking member 311 in the sticking base 293 in which the breaking member 311 is integrated. It is formed so as to have a larger area than end surfaces 355 and 356 on the side where 313 and 314 are exposed, and faces the entire end surfaces 355 and 356. The distance between the wall surfaces 353 and 354 and the end surfaces 355 and 356 is within a range that does not hinder the attachment of the cover member 331 to the attachment base 293, specifically, when the cover member 331 is attached to the attachment base 293. It is set within a range that does not prevent elastic deformation of the claw portions 336 and 337 due to contact with the portions 338 and 339. Thus, in a state where the cover member 331 is attached to the sticking base 293, the wall portion on the side where the claw portions 336 and 337 of the cover member 331 are formed between the protective wall portions 351 and 352 and the sticking base 293. Has entered.

  The distance between the wall surfaces 353 and 354 and the end surfaces 355 and 356 is such that the tip of a general-purpose cutting tool such as a nipper is difficult to insert at the engaging portion between the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339. It is set with a range. Further, the distance between the wall surfaces 353 and 354 and the corresponding claw portions 336 and 337 is the same as or similar to the thickness dimension of the portion where the tip hook portion of the claw portions 336 and 337 is formed, and more specifically, slightly larger. It is about. Thereby, even if it is going to access the latching location of the nail | claw part 336,337 and the receiving part 338,339, it is difficult to do. The distance between the wall surfaces 353 and 354 and the corresponding claw portions 336 and 337 is not limited to the above, and is the same as or approximately the same as the protruding dimension of the receiving portions 338 and 339, more specifically. It may be slightly larger.

  As described above, since the protective wall portions 351 and 352 make it difficult to access the locking portion between the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331, the breaking member 311 does not follow when the cover member 331 is separated. Thus, it is possible to prevent or give up the act of releasing the lock. Therefore, when the cover member 331 is separated, the breaking member 311 follows, and the breaking member 311 follows to cut the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag as described in the sixth embodiment. Cutting of the antenna member 172 at 163 occurs.

<Eighth Embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the cover member surrounding the seal seal 160 and the structure for breaking the seal seal 160 when the cover member is separated are different from those of the sixth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 33 and 34. FIG. In addition, while using the same number about the same structure as the said 6th Embodiment, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  FIG. 33A is an exploded perspective view for explaining the configuration of the sticking base 362 provided in the substrate box 361, and FIG. 33B is a cross-sectional view of the sticking base 362 and its periphery. FIGS. 34A and 34B are explanatory views for explaining the cover member 371 mounted on the sticking base 362. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 33 (a), the sticking base 362 is configured by superimposing a front-side fixed base portion 364 formed on the front-side structure 363 and a back-side fixed base portion 366 formed on the back-side structure 365. Yes. A pair of grooves 368 extending from the base end side edge of the sticking base 362 to the tip end side edge in the protruding direction is formed in the surface region 367a of the sticking area 367 configured by the surface of the sticking base 362. ing. Ends on the distal end side in the protruding direction of the pair of groove portions 368 are open on the side surface region 367b side of the pasting region 367.

  A seal seal 160 having an IC tag 163 is attached so as to close the pair of grooves 368. The configurations of the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 are the same as those in the first embodiment. The seal seal 160 is pasted so as to cover the whole or almost the whole pasting region 367, and the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles one of the pair of groove portions 368. This straddling direction is a direction that intersects the length direction of the groove 368. The antenna member 172 may straddle both the groove portions 368.

  As shown in FIG. 33B, the periphery of the seal seal 160 attached to the attachment region 367 is covered with a cover member 371. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 34A and 34B, the cover member 371 includes a front cover member 372 that covers the front fixed base portion 364 side, and a back fixed base portion 366 side. And a back side cover member 373 for covering. The front side cover member 372 and the back side cover member 373 are formed of a synthetic resin material having transparency so that the sealing seal 160 covering the periphery can be visually confirmed from the outside of the cover member 371. It is made of a material that can transmit radio waves so as to enable communication between the reader device and the IC tag 163 by radio waves.

  Each of the front side cover member 372 and the back side cover member 373 is formed with mutual opening portions 374 and 375 that open the internal space toward each other, and the application side that opens the internal space toward the application base 362. Openings 376 and 377 are formed. The mutual opening portions 374 and 375 and the corresponding application side opening portions 376 and 377 are continuous.

  A cover locking portion 381 that protrudes toward the mutual opening 375 of the back cover member 373 is integrally formed at the peripheral edge of the mutual opening 374 in the front cover member 372 and facing each other. . The distance between the cover locking portions 381 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the distance between the opposing plate portions 383 and 384 forming the enclosing portion 382 of the application region 367 in the application base 362. Further, a breaking projection 385 that protrudes toward the back cover member 373 and can be fitted into the groove 368 of the sticking base 362 is integrally formed in the sticking side opening 376 of the front cover member 372.

  Incidentally, the breaking convex portion 385 has a tapered tip. However, the shape is not limited to the shape shown in FIG. 34A, and the front side in the removal direction of the cover member 371 may be tapered.

  When the cover member 371 is attached to the sticking base 362, the front-side cover member is set so that the sticking side openings 376 and 377 are located on the base end side of the sticking base 362 and the sticking base 362 is sandwiched therebetween. 372 and a back cover member 373 are disposed. In this case, the pair of breaking convex portions 385 enter the corresponding groove portions 368, and the cover locking portions 381 are formed on the peripheral edge portions of the mutual opening portions 375 in the back side cover member 373 from the inner space side of the back side cover member 373. Locked. Accordingly, the cover member 371 is attached to the sticking base 362, and the sticking base 362 and the seal seal 160 are covered by the cover member 371.

  A stopper 386 that protrudes inward from the peripheral wall portion of the groove portion 368 is integrally formed in the groove portion 368 of the adhesive base 362 at a position near the base end of the adhesive base 362. The breaking convex portion 385 entering the groove portion 368 is disposed on the proximal end side of the sticking base 362 relative to the stopper 386, and the front cover member 372 and the back cover member 373 are integrated with the sticking base 362 interposed therebetween. Even if the formed cover member 371 is slid in the separating direction, the cover member 371 cannot be separated unless an external force is applied to the extent that the contact state between the breaking projection 385 and the stopper 386 is released. .

  Note that the sealing seal 160 does not cover the base end side of the sticking base 362 with respect to the stopper 386 in the groove portion 368, and when the cover member 371 is attached to the sticking base 362, the breaker convex portion 385 and the sealing seal 160. Interference with is avoided.

  In the above configuration, in order to open the internal space of the substrate box 361, it is necessary to perform a separation operation for separating the cover member 371 from the sticking base 362 prior to the opening operation. In this case, in order to separate the cover member 371, it is necessary to slide the cover member 371 along the groove portion 368 of the sticking base 362. In this sliding movement, the breaking projection 385 slides on the groove portion 368. Will move. When the breaking convex portion 385 slides on the groove portion 368, an area of the sealing seal 160 covering the groove portion 368 is cut by the breaking convex portion 385, and the sealing seal 160 is broken. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether or not the substrate box 361 is illegally opened by visually confirming the damaged portion.

  Further, as already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is disposed so as to straddle the groove portion 368, when the seal seal 160 is cut by the destructive convex portion 385, the antenna member 172 straddles the above-described straddle. The protruding area is cut. As a result, it is expected that the ID information from the IC tag 163 cannot be read satisfactorily. Therefore, even if the cover member 371 is returned to the original position after the unauthorized opening of the board box 361, the unauthorized opening of the board box 361 can be grasped through the ID information reading operation.

  Incidentally, since the tip of the breaking projection 385 has a tapered shape, the sealing seal 160 is easily broken and the antenna member 172 is easily cut. In addition, an impedance matching slit 173 may be disposed in a region of the antenna member 172 that is cut by the destruction convex portion 385. Thereby, when the antenna member 172 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 371, it is expected that the ID information cannot be read from the IC tag 163.

  The pasting base 362 may not include the surrounding portion 382, and the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 371 may be positioned closer to the surface of the seal seal 160 than the above configuration. For example, the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 371 may be in contact with the surface of the seal seal 160 when the cover member 371 is installed.

<Ninth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration of the protection means and the configuration around it are different from those of the seventh embodiment. This different configuration will be described below with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 35A is an enlarged perspective view showing the cover member 331 and its periphery, and FIG. 35B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the configuration of the cover member 331 and its periphery. In FIG. 35B, for the sake of convenience of explanation, the breaking member 311 is shown in a state other than a cross section. The same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment, and description thereof is basically omitted.

  As shown in FIG. 35A, the substrate box 282 is provided with a pair of coupling structures 391 so as to sandwich the sticking base 293 in the width direction. Each coupling structure 391 has the same configuration, and a back-side coupling portion 392 integrally formed by extending laterally from a main body portion for accommodating the main control board 101 in the back-side configuration 284, and a front-side configuration The body 283 includes a front side coupling portion 393 integrally formed by extending laterally from a main body portion for accommodating the main control board 101. Then, the front side coupling portion 393 is overlaid on the back side coupling portion 392, and a break screw, a one-way screw or a locking claw member is attached to the combination of the superimposed coupling portions 392 and 393. Each coupling structure 391 is in a coupled state. In order to release the coupled state, it is necessary to destroy the wall portion that forms the coupling portions 392 and 393 and the coupling portion that couples the coupling portions 392 and 393 to the main body portion of the board box 282. It is possible to visually confirm that the opening operation of the internal space of the substrate box 282 has been performed by the traces of.

  Although not described in the sixth embodiment, the coupling structure 391 is also provided in the substrate box 282 in the sixth embodiment.

  Each coupling structure 391 is formed at a position separated from the pasting base 293 by a predetermined distance, and the same configuration as each other as a protection means is provided between each coupling structure 391 and the pasting base 293. A pair of accommodating portions 394 are integrally formed. The accommodating portion 394 is formed by overlapping the portions for the accommodating portion 394 formed on the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284 in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282.

  The housing portion 394 is integrally formed with the joint portions 392 and 393 constituting the joint structure 391, and the first wall portion 395 standing from the position near the extension destination in the joint portions 392 and 393 toward the sticking base 293, and And a second wall portion 396 formed from the tip of the first wall portion 395 on the side of the sticking base 293 to the main body portion of the substrate box 282. The second wall portion 396 has a wall surface 396 a facing the sticking base 293, and each wall surface 396 a is positioned so as to sandwich the sticking base 293 and the cover member 331 between the pair of housing portions 394. The distance between the pair of wall surfaces 396a is set to be slightly larger than the distance between the end portions on the wall surface 396a side of the cover member 331 so as not to hinder the attachment of the cover member 331 to the sticking base 293.

  In addition to the first wall portion 395 and the second wall portion 396, the accommodating portion 394 has a first wall portion 395 and a second wall portion 395 as viewed in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282 as shown in FIG. A pair of sandwiching wall portions 397 and 398 formed on both ends of the portion 396 are provided. The pair of sandwiching wall portions 397 and 398 are formed so as to fill a space defined by the coupling portions 392 and 393, the main body portion of the substrate box 282, the first wall portion 395 and the second wall portion 396, and Is integrally formed with the corresponding structural bodies 283 and 284 together with the first wall portion 395 and the second wall portion 396.

  The pair of sandwiching wall portions 397 and 398 extend to the sticking base 293 side with respect to the second wall portion 396, and the extending regions 397 a and 398 a face each other in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282. The distance dimension between these extension areas 397a and 398a is set to be the same as or approximately the same as the dimension in the thickness direction of the cover member 331, more specifically, slightly larger. Further, the distance dimension between the extension areas 397a and 398a The amount of extension from the wall portion 396 is set so as to face the plate surface of the cover member 331 in the thickness direction outside the cover member 331. Thereby, a pair of extension area | regions 397a and 398a are arrange | positioned so that the cover member 331 may be pinched | interposed in the said thickness direction. However, the extension amount of each extension region 397a, 398a is such that the side of the extension region 397a, 398a facing the surface side wall portion 341 of the cover member 331 has a hole 342 formed in the surface side wall portion 341. It is set in a range that does not cover.

  With the above-described configuration, the location where the cover member 331 attached to the sticking base 293 is engaged with the breaking member 311 is determined by the second wall portion 396 and the pair of extending regions 397a and 398a in the housing portion 394. It is housed in a partitioned housing space. In this case, the wall surface 396a of the second wall portion 396 is integrated with the arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 integrated with the attachment base 293 and the attachment base 293, as shown in FIG. It opposes in the predetermined distance part and the position spaced apart with respect to the latching location with the nail | claw parts 336 and 337 of the cover member 331 made. Further, the wall surface 396a is opposed to the entire locking portion.

  The distance between the wall surface 396a and the locking portion is a range that does not hinder the attachment of the cover member 331 to the attachment base 293, specifically, when the cover member 331 is attached to the attachment base 293, the receiving portion 338. , 339 is set in a range that does not prevent the elastic deformation of the claw portions 336 and 337 due to contact with the 339. Further, the distance between the wall surface 396a and the corresponding claw portions 336, 337 of the breaking member 311 is set in a range in which it is difficult to insert the tip of a general-purpose cutting tool such as a nipper at the locking portion. More specifically, the distance between the wall surface 396a and the corresponding claw portions 336, 337 is the same as or similar to the thickness dimension of the claw portions 336, 337 where the tip hook portions are formed. It is a big degree. Accordingly, even if a tool or the like is inserted from the mounting opening side in the storage space defined by the storage portion 394 to access the locking portion, it is difficult to do so.

  The distance between the wall surface 396a and the corresponding claw portions 336, 337 is not limited to the above, and is the same as or approximately the same as the protruding dimensions of the receiving portions 338, 339, and more specifically slightly larger. It may be a degree.

  Further, as already described, the extension regions 397a and 398a are opposed to the plate surface of the cover member on the outside of the cover member 331 in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282, and further extend. The regions 397a and 398a are in contact with or close to the plate surface of the cover member 331. Thereby, the accommodation space defined by the accommodation portion 394 is substantially closed in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282. Therefore, even if a tool or the like is inserted into the housing space from the end side in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282, it is difficult to do so.

  Moreover, since the said accommodation space is formed so that attachment of the cover member 331 to the sticking base 293 may not be inhibited, the said attachment operation | work can be performed favorably. Further, when the cover member 331 is separated from the sticking base 293, the cover member 331 is moved in the direction opposite to the mounting direction, and the breaking member 311 moving integrally with the cover member 331 is used. Does not have a portion protruding outward from the cover member 331. Thereby, the separation of the cover member 331 in which the breaking member 311 is integrated is not hindered by the housing portion 394, and the separation operation can be performed satisfactorily.

<Tenth Embodiment>
In the seventh embodiment and the ninth embodiment, the protective means for protecting the locking portion between the breaking member 311 and the cover member 401 is provided on the substrate box 282 side. In the embodiment, the protection means is provided on the cover member 401 side. This different configuration will be described below with reference to FIG.

  36A is an enlarged perspective view showing the cover member 401 and its periphery, and FIG. 36B is a longitudinal sectional view for explaining the configuration of the cover member 401 and its periphery. In FIG. 36B, the destructive member 311 is shown in a state other than a cross section for convenience of explanation. The same reference numerals are used for the same configurations as those in the sixth embodiment, and description thereof is basically omitted.

  The cover member 401 includes claw portions 402 and 403 as in the sixth embodiment, and the claw portions 402 and 403 are engaged with the receiving portions 338 and 339 of the breaking member 311, A cover member 401 is attached to the sticking base 293. In this case, as shown in FIG. 36B, the claw portions 402 and 403 are not formed to be exposed to the outside of the cover member 401, but are spaces defined by the respective wall portions of the cover member 401. Is formed inside.

  Specifically, the claw portions 402 and 403 are integrally formed with the wall 404 on the movement source side when the cover member 401 is mounted on the sticking base 293, and when the cover member 401 is mounted from the inner peripheral surface of the wall 404. It protrudes to the movement destination side, and its tip is a free end. The tips of the claw portions 402 and 403 are located closer to the mounting source than the opening 405 on the mounting destination side of the cover member 401, and the peripheral edge of the opening 405 in the cover member 401 is attached to the substrate box 282. The base 293 is adjacent to the side surface of the main body portion that is continuous with the base end side. The peripheral edge of the opening 405 may be in contact with the side surface of the main body portion of the substrate box 282.

  The claw portions 402 and 403 are formed at positions close to the inner peripheral surfaces of the pair of wall portions 406 and 407 that sandwich the sticking base 293 in the width direction in the wall portion of the cover member 401. In this case, the distance between the claw portions 402 and 403 and the inner peripheral surfaces of the adjacent wall portions 406 and 407 is within a range that does not hinder the attachment of the cover member 401 to the sticking base 293, specifically, the cover member 401. It is set within a range that does not prevent elastic deformation of the claw portions 402 and 403 due to contact with the receiving portions 338 and 339 when being attached to the sticking base 293.

  Due to the above configuration, the locking portion between the claw portions 402 and 403 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 is covered by the cover member 401, and even if the locking portion is accessed from the outside of the cover member 401, Is difficult to do. Furthermore, although the shape of the cover member 401 is complicated by covering the locking portion with the cover member 401, the cover member 401 can be mounted on the substrate box 282 as compared with the structure provided on the substrate box 282 side. A protective means can be provided without considering the alignment accuracy.

<Eleventh embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 6th Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  37A is a perspective view of the breaking member 501 in the present embodiment, FIGS. 37B and 37C are perspective views of the cover member 511 in the present embodiment viewed from different directions, and FIG. FIG. 39A is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 293 and its periphery in the main control device 281, FIG. 39A is a perspective view showing the cover member 511 and its periphery in the main control device 281, and FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating a mode that it is attached to the board | substrate box 282. FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 37A, the breaking member 501 includes a breaking base portion 502, arm portions 503 and 504, a tapered region 505, a through-hole 506, and the breaking member 311 of the sixth embodiment. Receiving portions 507 and 508 are provided. Since these are the same as the corresponding parts of the breaking member 311, the description thereof is omitted.

  As in the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 501 is installed so that the breaking base portion 502 enters the space formed in the sticking base 293, and is screwed at that position. , Attached to the sticking base 293. In this case, as shown in FIG. 38, the arm portions 503 and 504 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321. And the sealing seal | sticker 160 is affixed with respect to the sticking base 293 to which the member 501 for destruction is attached.

  Here, hook portions 509 and 510 are integrally formed on the arm portions 503 and 504, respectively. As shown in FIG. 38, the hook portions 509 and 510 are formed so as to protrude laterally from the arm portions 503 and 504 so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160, and the distal end side is a free end. Thereby, the hook parts 509 and 510 can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  A cover member 511 is attached to the sticking base 293 having such a configuration. The cover member 511 includes an internal space 512, an opening 513, and wall portions 514 and 515 as shown in FIG. 37 (b), and also includes a surface side wall portion 516 as shown in FIG. 37 (c). ing. Since these are the same as the corresponding parts in the cover member 331 in the sixth embodiment, description thereof will be omitted.

  Note that a screw opening 517 is provided in the front side wall 516 instead of the hole 342. The screw opening 517 is open so that the screw hole 316 of the sticking base 293 can be accessed when the cover member 511 is attached to the board box 282.

  The cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 282 in a state where the entire pasting base 293 is accommodated in the internal space 512. Specifically, the wall portion that defines the internal space 512 is formed such that the inner wall surface is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 321, and the opening portion 513 is large enough to pass the surrounding portion 321. Is formed. When the cover member 511 is slid from the opening 513 toward the sticking base 293, the cover member 511 is disposed at a predetermined attachment position while the inner wall surface slides on the surrounding portion 321 and is attached to the substrate box 282. It is done. The sticking base 293 is accommodated in the internal space 512 through the opening 513.

  In this case, the attachment direction when attaching the cover member 511 to the sticking base 293 is defined as one direction by sliding between the inner wall surface of the cover member 511 and the surrounding portion 321. That is, the path for attaching the cover member 511 to the sticking base 293 is defined.

  In a situation where the cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 282, an engaging relationship is generated between both the breaking member 501 and the substrate box 282.

  First, the engagement relationship between the cover member 511 and the board box 282 will be described. Both wall portions 514 and 515 of the cover member 511 are projected from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 513 toward the sticking base 293 side, and a pair of The claw portions 521 and 522 are integrally formed. The claw portions 521 and 522 are arranged at positions shifted from the hook portions 509 and 510 in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293. The front and back direction of the sticking base 293 can be said to be the overlapping direction of the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284.

  As shown in FIG. 38, corresponding to the claw portions 521 and 522, the front-side opposing plate portions 302 and 303 have box-side receiving portions 523 that protrude outward (opposite to the pasting base 293). 524 is provided (see FIG. 39B for the box side receiving portion 524). The box side receiving portions 523 and 524 have the same protruding amount as the receiving portions 507 and 508 provided on the arm portions 503 and 504 of the breaking member 501. The box side receiving portions 523 and 524 are formed to be continuous with the receiving portions 507 and 508 along the mounting direction. The cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 282 by engaging the claw portions 521 and 522 with the corresponding box side receiving portions 523 and 524, respectively.

  Specifically, tip hook portions are formed at the tips of the claw portions 521 and 522 so as to protrude in the direction in which the claw portions 521 and 522 face each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and includes inclined surfaces 521a and 522a that are inclined in the facing direction toward the proximal end side. The inclined surfaces 521a and 522a are disposed so as to contact the receiving portions 507 and 508 when the cover member 511 is attached. Specifically, the inclined surfaces 521a and 522a and the receiving portions 507 and 508 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 511.

  According to such a configuration, when the cover member 511 is slid in the mounting direction, the receiving portions 507 and 508 abut on the inclined surfaces 521a and 522a. In this case, the claw portions 521 and 522 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward (on the side opposite to the pasting base 293) along the inclined surfaces 521a and 522a. And the nail | claw part 521,522 returns to a natural state with a restoring force by reaching the front side of the attachment direction of the box side receiving part 523,524 via the receiving part 507,508. As a result, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 521 and 522 abut against the end portions of the box side receiving portions 523 and 524 from the front side in the mounting direction, and the reverse of the above mounting direction. Even if the cover member 511 is slid in the detaching direction, which is the direction, it is blocked by the contact. The cover member 511 is attached to the substrate box 282 by the engagement between the claw portions 521 and 522 and the box side receiving portions 523 and 524.

  In addition, since the hook parts 509 and 510 and the nail | claw parts 521 and 522 have shifted | deviated from each other in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293, they do not interfere in the sliding movement to an attachment direction. In other words, the hook portions 509 and 510 and the claw portions 521 and 522 are disposed so as not to interfere when the cover member 511 is attached. Thereby, even in a situation where the hook portions 509 and 510 are provided, smooth sliding movement is ensured.

  Next, the engagement relationship between the breaking member 501 and the cover member 511 will be described. As shown in FIG. 38, slits 532 and 533 are provided on the side wall portion 531 facing the side surface region 296 of the cover member 511 so as to correspond to the hook portions 509 and 510 of the breaking member 501. The slits 532 and 533 are formed in such a size that the hook portions 509 and 510 can be inserted. The hook portions 509 and 510 are engaged with the peripheral portions of the corresponding slits 532 and 533, respectively, whereby the engagement relationship between the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 is generated.

  Specifically, tip portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 are provided with tip hook portions that protrude in a direction opposite to the direction in which the hook portions 509 and 510 face each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the protruding amount gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a are inclined to the opposite side to the facing direction toward the proximal end side. It has. The inclined surfaces 509a and 510a are disposed so as to contact the edges of the slits 532 and 533 when the cover member 511 is attached. Specifically, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a and the slits 532 and 533 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 511.

  When the cover member 511 is slid in the mounting direction with respect to the board box 282, the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a of the hook portions 509 and 510 abut against the corresponding edge portions of the slits 532 and 533. In this case, the hook portions 509 and 510 are elastically deformed so as to escape toward the inside (the pasting base 293 side) along the inclined surfaces 509a and 510a. The cover member 511 is slid while the hook portions 509 and 510 interfere with the inner wall surfaces of the slits 532 and 533. And if the front-end hook part of the hook parts 509 and 510 passes the slits 532 and 533, it will return to a natural state with a restoring force. Thereby, as shown in FIGS. 39A and 39B, the tip hook portions of the hook portions 509 and 510 are engaged with the peripheral portions of the slits 532 and 533. Thereby, the cover member 511 is engaged with the breaking member 501, and both are integrated. In this case, as shown in FIG. 39A, the hook portions 509 and 510 protrude from the cover member 511 via the slits 532 and 533, so that an external force can be applied.

  According to the substrate box 282 configured as described above, the cover member 511 is separated from the substrate box 282 while only the engagement between the cover member 511 and the substrate box 282 is released. The seal seal 160 is cut. Thereby, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 is released, and the cut portion remains as a trace. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an opening operation that does not leave a trace while suppressing a decrease in workability of the opening operation.

  On the other hand, it is possible to separate only the cover member 511 from the substrate box 282 by releasing the engagement between the cover member 511 and the substrate box 282 and further releasing the engagement between the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501. It becomes. Thereby, only the cover member 511 can be replaced, and the cover member 511 can be removed to directly check the presence or absence of the seal seal 160.

  In particular, in the present embodiment, the engagement portion between the cover member 511 and the substrate box 282 and the engagement portion between the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 exist separately. As a result, when only the cover member 511 is illegally separated, it is necessary to release the respective engagements, so that the separation operation of only the cover member 511 is complicated.

  According to the embodiment described above in detail, the cover member 511 is engaged with both the board box 282 and the breaking member 501. Accordingly, the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 can be selectively separated, and an unauthorized separation operation using only the cover member 511 is complicated. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an unauthorized separation operation using only the cover member 511 while enabling simple inspection.

  Hook portions 509 and 510 are provided on the breaking member 501 so as to engage with the cover member 511. The hook portions 509 and 510 are formed so as to protrude sideways from the arm portions 503 and 504 so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160. Thereby, the fall of workability | operativity of the sticking work of the seal seal | sticker 160 which may arise by providing the hook parts 509 and 510 can be suppressed.

  Further, by attaching the cover member 511 to the substrate box 282, the relative positions of the hook portions 509 and 510 and the slits 532 and 533 are such that the engagement relationship between the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 is naturally generated. Set up a relationship. This eliminates the need for special work to integrate the cover member 511 and the breaking member 501 together. Therefore, the workability | operativity fall of attachment work can be suppressed.

<Twelfth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 601 and the cover member 611 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. Hereinafter, the different configuration will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 to 42. In addition, about the same structure as 6th Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  40A is a perspective view of the breaking member 601 in the present embodiment, FIG. 40B is a perspective view of the cover member 611 in the present embodiment, and FIG. 40C is an exploded perspective view of the cover member 611. 41 is an exploded perspective view showing the pasting base 293 and its periphery in the main control device 281 in an enlarged manner, FIG. 42A is a perspective view showing the cover member 611 and its periphery in the main control device 281, and FIG. ) Is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 282.

  As shown in FIG. 40A, the breaking member 601 in the present embodiment includes a breaking base portion 602, arm portions 603 and 604, a tapered region 605, a through hole 606, and receiving portions 607 and 608. About these, since it is the same as that of the corresponding | compatible site | part in the member 311 for a destruction of 6th Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  Similar to the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 601 is installed so that the breaking base portion 602 enters the space formed in the sticking base 293, and is screwed at the position. , Attached to the sticking base 293. In the situation where the breaking member 601 is attached, the arm portions 603 and 604 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321 as shown in FIG. And the sealing seal | sticker 160 is affixed with respect to the sticking base 293 to which the member 601 for destruction is attached.

  Here, as shown to Fig.40 (a), the hook parts 609 and 610 are integrally formed by each arm part 603 and 604, respectively. As shown in FIG. 41, the hook portions 609 and 610 are formed so as to protrude from the arm portions 603 and 604 to the side so as not to interfere with the seal seal 160. The hook portions 609 and 610 have free ends on the tip side, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  A cover member 611 is attached to the sticking base 293 having such a configuration. Similar to the cover member 331 of the sixth embodiment, the cover member 611 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 612, and a plurality of (specifically, a plurality of (specifically,) the internal space 612 is formed. The five wall portions can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 611 (see FIGS. 40B and 40C). An opening 613 is formed in the cover member 611 so that one of the six surfaces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and the internal space 612 is opened to the outside of the cover member 611 through the opening 613. . Further, the opening 613 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 614 and 615 facing each other with the opening 613 interposed therebetween.

  The internal space 612 of the cover member 611 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 293 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck and the entire breaking member 601 including the hook portions 609 and 610. Further, the distance between the two wall portions 614 and 615 of the cover member 611 is set to be larger than the distance between the arm portions 603 and 604 of the breaking member 601. Thus, the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 282 in a state where the breaking member 601 and the pasting base 293 are accommodated in the internal space 612. As described in the eleventh embodiment, the attachment direction of the cover member 611 when the cover member 611 is attached to the board box 282 is defined.

  A screw opening 617 is provided in the surface side wall 616 corresponding to the surface region 295 in the cover member 611. The screw opening 617 is open so that the screw hole 316 of the sticking base 293 can be accessed when the cover member 611 is attached to the board box 282.

  In a situation where the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 282, an engagement relationship is generated between both the breaking member 601 and the substrate box 282.

  First, the engagement relationship between the cover member 611 and the board box 282 will be described. The two wall portions 614 and 615 of the cover member 611 are protruded from the peripheral edge portion of the opening 613 toward the sticking base 293 side, and a pair of them. Claw portions 621 and 622 are integrally formed, and inclined surfaces 621a and 622a are formed on the claw portions 621 and 622, respectively. The claw portions 621 and 622 engage with the box side receiving portions 523 and 524. The details of the engagement are the same as the engagement between the claw portions 521 and 522 and the box side receiving portions 523 and 524, and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the engagement relationship between the cover member 611 and the breaking member 601 will be described. Tip portions of the hook portions 609 and 610 are provided with tip hook portions protruding in directions facing each other. The distal hook portion is formed so that the amount of protrusion gradually increases from the distal end side toward the proximal end side, and includes inclined surfaces 609a and 610a that are inclined in the facing direction toward the proximal end side.

  Corresponding to the hook portions 609 and 610, engagement portions with the hook portions 609 and 610 are provided in the internal space 612 of the cover member 611. Specifically, an engagement member 631 is attached inside the cover member 611. The engaging member 631 has a plate shape and is sized to be accommodated in the internal space 612. The length in the longitudinal direction of the engaging member 631 is set to be the same as or slightly smaller than the distance between the arm portions 603 and 604 of the breaking member 601. The engaging member 631 is fixed to a side wall portion 618 disposed to face the opening 613.

  Specifically, a boss 632 that opens toward the opening 613 is provided inside the side wall 618. The boss 632 is formed to protrude from the inner wall surface of the side wall 618 toward the opening 613. Corresponding to the boss 632, as shown in FIG. 40C, the engaging member 631 is provided with a through hole 633. The engaging member 631 is arranged so that the through hole 633 and the boss 632 are on the same axis, and the screw 634 is screwed from the through hole 633 side in this state, whereby the engaging member 631 is attached to the cover member 611. Fixed. In this case, a gap corresponding to the protruding amount of the boss 632 is formed between the engaging member 631 and the side wall portion 618.

  Here, the protruding amount of the boss 632 is set to be larger than the protruding dimension of the tip hook portions of the hook portions 609 and 610. As a result, the gap formed between the engaging member 631 and the side wall portion 618 has a size that allows the front hook portions of the hook portions 609 and 610 to protrude toward the side wall portion 618 of the engaging member 631. doing.

  The length dimension of the engaging member 631 in the longitudinal direction is set to be smaller than the distance dimension between the wall portions 614 and 615 in the cover member 611, and the distance between the both wall portions 614 and 615 of the cover member 611. Is set to be larger than the distance between the arm portions 603 and 604, so that gaps 635 and 636 are formed between the engaging member 631 and the wall portions 614 and 615 as shown in FIG. ing.

  The gaps 635 and 636 are formed in such a size that the hook portions 609 and 610 can be inserted therethrough. Specifically, the distance between the engaging member 631 and the wall portions 614 and 615 is set to be larger than the thickness of the tip hook portion in the hook portions 609 and 610.

  Here, when the cover member 611 slides in the mounting direction, the inclined surfaces 609a and 610a of the hook portions 609 and 610 are in contact with the edge of the engaging member 631 that forms the gaps 635 and 636. The positional relationship is specified. Specifically, in the mounting direction of the cover member 611, the inclined surfaces 609a and 610a and the edge of the engaging member 631 are arranged on the same line.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 611 is slid in the mounting direction so that the adhesive base 293 is accommodated in the internal space 612 via the opening 613, the inclined surfaces 609a and 610a of the hook portions 609 and 610 are provided. And the engaging member 631 abut. In this case, the hook portions 609 and 610 are elastically deformed along the inclined surfaces 609a and 610a toward the outside, that is, toward the wall portions 614 and 615, respectively. Then, the tip hook portions of the hook portions 609 and 610 pass through the gaps 635 and 636 and the tip hook portions of the hook portions 609 and 610 reach the side wall portion 618 side of the engaging member 631, so that the natural state is achieved by the restoring force. Return to. Thereby, as shown in FIG. 42 (b), the tip hook portions of the hook portions 609 and 610 engage with the peripheral portion of the engaging member 631. Therefore, an engagement relationship between the breaking member 601 and the cover member 611 is generated.

  In this case, the engagement portion between the breaking member 601 and the cover member 611 is accommodated in the internal space 612 of the cover member 611. This makes it difficult to access the engagement location.

  When performing the opening operation, first, the engagement between the cover member 611 and the board box 282 is released. Specifically, the claw portions 621 and 622 are elastically deformed outward. As a result, the engagement between the cover member 611 and the board box 282 is released, and in this state, the cover member 611 is slid in a removal direction that is opposite to the attachment direction. Thereby, the cover member 611 is separated. In this case, since the cover member 611 and the breaking member 601 are integrated, the sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 601 as the cover member 611 is separated. Therefore, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 is released, and the cut portion remains as a trace.

  That is, since the sealing seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 611, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability of the opening operation that may be caused by providing the cover member 611. On the other hand, when the cover member 611 is illegally separated, unintentional cutting is performed when the cover member 611 is separated, and a cut portion is formed as a trace. Can be confirmed.

  As described above, it is difficult to access the engaging portion by accommodating the engaging portion between the breaking member 601 and the cover member 611 in the internal space 612 of the cover member 611. While it is difficult to separate only 611, it is possible to prevent or give up the act of releasing the engagement so that the breaking member 601 does not follow when the cover member 611 is separated. Therefore, when the cover member 611 is separated, the breaking member 601 follows, and the breaking member 601 follows, so that the sealing seal 160 is cut and the IC tag is cut as described in the first embodiment. Cutting of the antenna member 172 at 163 occurs.

  In particular, the hook portions 609 and 610 are formed so as to protrude laterally from the sticking base 293. Thereby, in the situation where cover member 611 was attached to sticking base 293 from the side, hook parts 609 and 610 are engaged in the position which entered from opening 613. That is, since the engaging part is arranged at a position where it enters the back side (side wall part 618 side) with respect to the opening 613, it is difficult to access the engaging part. Thereby, the illegal act which accesses an engagement location via the opening part 613 of the cover member 611 can be suppressed.

  When the breaking member 601 and the cover member 611 are engaged in the internal space 612 of the cover member 611, an external force that assists the engagement cannot be applied to the hook portions 609 and 610. There is a problem that it is difficult to cope with the case where the engagement between the cover member 611 and the cover member 611 is not suitably performed. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, the inclined surfaces 609 a and 610 a are provided on the hook portions 609 and 610, and when the cover member 611 is attached to the substrate box 282, the inclined surfaces 609 a and 610 a have the gap 635. , 636 is defined so as to abut against the edge of the engaging member 631. As a result, the hook portions 609 and 610 are elastically deformed along the inclined surfaces 609a and 610a, and naturally engage with the engaging member 631. Therefore, inconveniences that may occur in the configuration in which the engagement portion is accommodated in the internal space 612 can be avoided.

<Thirteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the attachment mode of the breaking member 311 and the configuration relating to the cover member 711 are different from those of the sixth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. 43 to 45. In addition, about the same structure as 6th Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  FIG. 43A is a partial rear view of the front side structure 283 in a state where the breaking member 311 is attached to the front side sticking plate portion 301, and FIG. 43B shows a state in which the breaking member 311 rotates. 44 (a) and 44 (b) are perspective views of the cover member 711 in the present embodiment as seen from different directions, and FIG. 45 (a) shows the sticking base 293 and its periphery in the main controller 281. FIG. 45B is an explanatory diagram for explaining a state in which the cover member 711 is attached to the substrate box 282.

  As shown in FIGS. 43A and 43B, the breaking member 311 is pivotally supported with respect to the front-side sticking plate portion 301 and is formed to be rotatable. Specifically, a shaft portion 701 is provided on the back side of the front side sticking plate portion 301. The shaft portion 701 has a columnar shape, and is provided upright toward the back side pasting plate portion 304 side. The rising amount of the shaft portion 701 is set to be substantially the same as the thickness direction of the breaking base portion 312 of the breaking member 311. The shaft portion 701 is disposed at an end portion on the front side opposing plate portion 303 side in the front side sticking plate portion 301.

  Corresponding to the shaft portion 701, a bearing hole 702 is provided in the breaking base portion 312 of the breaking member 311. The bearing hole 702 is provided at the end portion on the arm portion 314 side of the fracture base portion 312 so as to correspond to the shaft portion 701. The hole diameter of the bearing hole 702 is formed to be equal to or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft part 701, and the shaft part 701 is inserted into the bearing hole 702. Thereby, as shown in FIG.43 (b), the member 311 for destruction can be rotated toward the outer side by using the axial support location which consists of the axial part 701 and the bearing hole 702 as a fulcrum. In this state, the breaking member 311 is attached to the board box 282 in a state where it cannot be removed or is difficult by combining the front-side structure 283 and the back-side structure 284.

  Specifically, in a state where the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 are combined, the breaking member 311 is sandwiched between the front side pasting plate portion 301 and the back side pasting plate portion 304. Thereby, the movement of the breaking member 311 in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282 is restricted by the front-side sticking plate portion 301 and the back-side sticking plate portion 304. Further, the movement of the breaking member 311 in the direction orthogonal to the thickness direction is restricted by contact with the shaft portion 701. Therefore, it is impossible or difficult to remove the breaking member 311 from the substrate box 282 without opening the substrate box 282.

  Further, in a state where the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 are combined, the breaking member 311 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 297 and is rotatable toward the boundary 297 side, Rotation in directions other than the boundary 297 side is restricted by contact with the front-side counter plate 302 and the like. The restricted position is set as the initial position. In the initial position, the arm portions 313 and 314 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321 and are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 293 so as to be accessible from the outside.

  In a situation where the breaking member 311 is arranged at the initial position, the breaking member 311 is rotated toward the boundary 297 by screwing the front-side sticking plate portion 301 and the back-side sticking plate portion 304 to each other. The seal seal 160 is affixed in a state where the movement is restricted and the screw is fixed.

  Here, as shown in FIG. 45 (a), in a situation where the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 are combined, the pivotal support portion is covered with the sticking base 293 and the seal seal 160. As a result, the pivot support location is protected by the sticking base 293 and the seal seal 160.

  Next, the cover member 711 in the present embodiment will be described. As shown in FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b), the cover member 711 is similar to the cover member 331 in the sixth embodiment. 712, an opening 713, and walls 714, 715. Since these configurations are the same as those of the cover member 331 in the sixth embodiment, description thereof is omitted. Further, as described in the eleventh embodiment, the attachment direction of the cover member 711 to the board box 282 is defined as one direction.

  The cover member 711 is attached to the substrate box 282 in a state where the sticking base 293 with the seal seal 160 attached is accommodated in the internal space 712. In this case, the cover member 711 is engaged with the substrate box 282.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 44A, the walls 714 and 715 are provided with claw portions 721 and 722 protruding inward, corresponding to the claw portions 721 and 722, as shown in FIG. 45 (a) and 45 (b), the front-side counter plate portions 302 and 303 are provided with box-side receiving portions 723 and 724 that protrude outward (the box-side receiving portion 724 is illustrated in FIG. 45). 45 (b)). Similarly to the box side receiving portions 523 and 524 of the eleventh embodiment, the box side receiving portions 723 and 724 are attached to the protruding portions 338 and 339 provided on the arm portions 313 and 314 of the breaking member 311 and the mounting direction. In order to be continuous. The relative positional relationship between the claws 721 and 722 is in contact with the protrusions 338 and 339 when the cover member 711 moves in the mounting direction. Specifically, the claw portions 721 and 722 and the protruding portions 338 and 339 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 711 is slid toward the substrate box 282 so that the sticking base 293 in which the breaking member 311 is integrated in the internal space 712 through the opening 713, As shown in FIG. 45 (b), the claw portions 721, 722 engage with the corresponding box side receiving portions 723, 724. As a result, the cover member 711 is attached to the substrate box 282. The engaging portion is exposed from the sticking base 293 and can be accessed from the outside.

  The claw portions 721 and 722 are provided with inclined surfaces 721a and 722a, respectively. Since the inclined surfaces 721a and 722a are the same as the inclined surfaces 721a and 722a of the claw portions 721 and 722 of the eleventh embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Here, since there is no cover member 711 corresponding to the hole 342, the screw fixing portion is covered with the cover member 711. This makes it impossible or difficult to release the screw fixing of the pasting base 293 without removing the cover member 711 from the substrate box 282.

  Further, since the sticking base 293 and the seal seal 160 are accommodated in the internal space 712 of the cover member 711, access to them is restricted. Further, since the breaking member 311 is accommodated by the cover member 711, access to the breaking member 311 is restricted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 282 will be described with reference to FIG. 46 (a) to 46 (c) are explanatory diagrams for explaining a procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened.

  As shown in FIG. 46A, in the situation where the cover member 711 is attached to the substrate box 282, the seal seal 160, the screw fixing location of the sticking base 293, and the seal seal 160 are surrounded by the cover member 711. For this reason, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation of the cover member 711 in order to enable access to them. Since the cover member 711 is engaged with the board box 282, it is necessary to release the engaged state. When releasing the engagement state, the claw portions 721 and 722 of the cover member 711 are elastically deformed toward the outside. Then, the cover member 711 is slid in the removing direction opposite to the attaching direction. As a result, only the cover member 711 is removed from the substrate box 282.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 711 and the breaking member 311 are not integrated. Specifically, the cover member 711 is not engaged or fixed to the breaking member 311. For this reason, the breaking member 311 is not separated along with the separation operation of the cover member 711. That is, even when the cover member 711 is separated, the breaking member 311 is accommodated in the sticking base 293. Thereby, it is possible to remove the cover member 711 from the substrate box 282 without destroying the seal seal 160, and it is suitable for the replacement of the cover member 711 and the confirmation work for directly confirming the seal seal 160. Is possible.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 46B, the screw 319 is removed. As a result, the breaking member 311 can be rotated and a trace is formed on the seal seal 160.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 46C, the breaking member 311 whose rotational movement restriction is released is rotated. Specifically, the arm portion 313 opposite to the arm portion 314 in the vicinity of the pivot support portion of the breaking member 311 is rotated toward the boundary 297 side (outside of the pasting base 293). In this case, since the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to straddle the boundary 297, the portion straddling the boundary 297 of the seal seal 160 is cut along with the rotation of the breaking member 311. Thereby, the obstruction by the seal seal 160 is released. Therefore, it becomes possible to slide the other of the components 283 and 284 in the separating direction with respect to the other.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  By providing a shaft support location on the arm portion 314 at one end of the breaking member 311 and rotating the arm portion 313 provided on the side opposite to the shaft support location as the operation portion (action portion) toward the boundary 297 side. The tapered region 315 existing between the shaft support portion and the arm portion 313 is configured to contact the seal seal 160. Thereby, the pressing force with respect to the contact portion between the breaking member 311 and the seal seal 160 becomes larger than the force applied to the arm portion 313. Further, when the breaking member 311 rotates, the breaking base portion 312 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state. As a result, only the tip portion of the tapered region 315 contacts the seal seal 160, and the contact portion shifts with rotation. Accordingly, the sealing seal 160 is gradually cut. Therefore, the sealing seal 160 and the antenna member 172 can be easily cut.

  It was set as the structure where the axial support location of the member 311 for destruction to the sticking base 293 is accommodated by the said sticking base 293. Thereby, since it is difficult to access these, it is possible to suppress fraudulent acts on the pivot support location.

  Further, since the seal sticker 160 is affixed to the sticking base 293, it is expected that traces due to the destruction of the seal sticker 160 will remain if the shaft support location is accessed via the sticking base 293. . Thereby, the fact of unauthorized access to the pivot support location can be easily confirmed.

<Fourteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, the configuration relating to the breaking member 801 and the cover member 821 is different from that of the sixth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  47 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 293 and the periphery thereof, FIG. 48 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 293 and the periphery thereof, and FIGS. 49A and 49B are explanatory views showing the rotation of the breaking member 801. It is.

  As shown in FIG. 48, the breaking member 801 in the present embodiment has a thickness dimension that can enter the space between the pedestal portion 305 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301, and is opposed to both back sides of the pedestal portion 305. A plate-shaped fracture base portion 802 having a length dimension slightly larger than the distance dimension between the plate portions 306 and 307 is provided. A first arm portion 803 is integrally formed with one end of the destruction base portion 802 in the length direction, and a second arm portion 804 is integrally formed with the other end on the opposite side. The first arm portion 803 is formed in a plate shape extending in a direction orthogonal to the length direction of the fracture base portion 802. The second arm portion 804 protrudes toward the front side of the sticking base 293. The breaking member 801 is attached to the substrate box 282 while being pivotally supported with respect to the sticking base 293.

  Specifically, a shaft portion 811 is provided on the outside of the sticking base 293, specifically, between the front-side counter plate portion 303 and the coupling structure 391. The shaft portion 811 has an annular shape with the front and back directions of the sticking base 293 as the axis, and is provided outside the front-side structure 283.

  As shown in FIG. 48, a receiving portion 812 is provided at one end of the breaking member 801 corresponding to the shaft portion 811. The receiving portion 812 is provided outside the first arm portion 803. The receiving portion 812 includes a bearing hole 813 that penetrates the sticking base 293 in the front and back direction. The inner diameter of the bearing hole 813 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the outer diameter of the shaft portion 811. Thereby, the shaft portion 811 can be inserted into the bearing hole 813. 49A and 49B, the breaking member 801 is attached to the sticking base 293 in a state where the shaft portion 811 is inserted into the bearing hole 813, and the bearing hole 813 is inserted into the bearing hole 813. On the other hand, it can be rotated to the outside of the sticking base 293 with the shaft support portion into which the shaft portion 811 is inserted as a fulcrum.

  Specifically, the shaft portion 811 is inserted into the bearing hole 813 in a state where the breaking member 801 is inclined with respect to the sticking base 293 so that the front-side sticking plate portion 301 and the breaking base portion 802 do not interfere with each other. In this manner, the breaking member 801 is attached from the front side of the sticking base 293. Then, the breaking member 801 is rotated toward the sticking base 293. Then, the front side sticking plate part 301 is sandwiched between the first arm part 803 and the second arm part 804, and the destruction base part 802 is inserted between the base part 305 and the front side sticking plate part 301. The member 801 for destruction is arrange | positioned.

  Corresponding to the first arm portion 803 of the breaking member 801, the side portion of the front facing plate portion 303 is recessed. Thereby, a part of edge part close | similar to the front side opposing board part 303 of the board part 301 for front side sticking is exposed. And the distance from a shaft support location to the 1st arm part 803 is set so that the 1st arm part 803 may be arrange | positioned in the space produced by having been dented. Thus, when the breaking member 801 rotates when the breaking member 801 is attached to the sticking base 293, the first arm portion 803 does not interfere with the front facing plate portion 303, and the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position. In this situation, the first arm portion 803 is continuous with the front-side facing plate portion 303 and the back-side facing plate portion 307 and comes into contact with the exposed portion of the front-side sticking plate portion 301.

  Corresponding to the second arm portion 804, a notch is formed in a corner portion on the front side of the sticking base 293 on the side surface region 296 side in the front side facing plate portion 302. Due to the notch, a part of the end portion of the front side sticking plate portion 301 adjacent to the front side facing plate portion 302 is exposed. And the distance from a shaft support location to the 2nd arm part 804 is set so that the 2nd arm part 804 may fit in a notch part. Accordingly, when the breaking member 801 rotates when the breaking member 801 is attached to the sticking base 293, the second arm portion 804 does not interfere with the front-side facing plate portion 302, and the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position. In this situation, the second arm portion 804 and the front-side facing plate portion 302 are continuous and come into contact with the exposed portion of the front-side sticking plate portion 301.

  Here, the contact between the second arm portion 804 and the front-side counter plate portion 302 and the contact between the first arm portion 803 and the front-side counter plate portion 303 cause further rotation in the mounting direction of the breaking member 801. It is regulated. The restricted position is set as the initial position. That is, the destruction member 801 can be easily positioned to the initial position by the contact.

  In addition, since the destruction base portion 802 is disposed inside the sticking base 293 at the initial position, even if the breaking member 801 is moved in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293, the destruction base portion 802 and the sticking base 293 The movement is restricted by the contact with the front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 that constitute the. In other words, the breaking member 801 cannot be removed from the substrate box 282 unless the breaking base portion 802 rotates to a position where it does not interfere with the sticking base 293 (front-side fixed base portion 291). That is, it can be said that the breaking member 801 cannot be removed from the substrate box 282 without rotating itself.

  Note that, in a situation where the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position, the front-side sticking plate portion 301 is sandwiched between the first arm portion 803 and the second arm portion 804. Further, the first arm portion 803 and the second arm portion 804 constitute a part of the surrounding portion 321, and the exposed portions of the front side sticking plate portion 301 and the like are the first arm portion 803 and the second arm portion 804. Covered by.

  As shown in FIG. 47, a handle 814 is provided on the second arm portion 804 of the breaking member 801. The handle 814 is formed integrally with the second arm portion 804 so as to protrude laterally from an end on the back side. In the situation where the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position, the handle 814 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 297 (destruction base portion 802), and a predetermined gap is provided between the handle 814 and the pasting base 293. Is formed. The thickness of the handle 814 is substantially the same as the boundary 297. The handle 814 has an annular shape and is formed so as to be graspable. By having the handle 814, it can be easily rotated to the boundary 297 side (the direction opposite to the rotation direction when the breaking member 801 is attached).

  Note that a tapered region 805 and a through hole 806 are formed in the fracture base portion 802. Since the tapered region 805 and the through hole 806 are the same as those in the sixth embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  The sticking base 293 is fixed with screws in a state where the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position. Specifically, a screw 319 is screwed into the communication holes of the through holes 318 and 806 and the screw hole 316. Thereby, the front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 are fixed, and the breaking member 801 is further fixed. Therefore, the sliding movement of the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 is restricted, and the rotational movement of the breaking member 801 is further restricted. A sealing seal 160 is affixed to the affixing base 293 fixed with screws.

  At the time of attachment, the seal seal 160 is attached so as to enter the gap between the handle 814 and the attachment base 293 so that the handle 814 and the seal seal 160 do not interfere with each other. Thereby, since the seal seal | sticker 160 is affixed over the boundary 297, the slide movement of the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284 is inhibited.

  A cover member 821 is attached to the sticking base 293 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck. The cover member 821 will be described below with reference to FIGS.

  50A is a perspective view showing the cover member 821 and its periphery in the substrate box 282, FIG. 50B is a side view of the substrate box 282, FIG. 51 is an exploded perspective view showing the sticking base 293 and its periphery, FIG. 52 (a) and 52 (b) are perspective views of the cover member 821 as seen from different directions.

  As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the cover member 821 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 822, and a plurality (specifically, 5 pieces) of the internal space 822 are defined. The wall portion allows radio waves to pass through the inside and outside of the cover member 821. The cover member 821 is provided with an opening 823, and the internal space 822 is released to the outside of the cover member 821 through the opening 823.

  The internal space 822 of the cover member 821 is formed to have a size that can accommodate a part of the sticking base 293 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck and one of the pair of coupling structures 391. In addition, the opening 823 is formed in accordance with the shape of each coupling portion 392 and 393 of the pasting base 293 and the coupling structure 391 so that one of the pasting base 293 and the coupling structure 391 can enter the internal space 822. . Specifically, the opening 823 is formed such that the peripheral edge of the opening 823 is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 321 and the coupling portions 392 and 393. The cover member 821 is slid so that one of the enclosing portion 321 and the coupling structure 391 enters the opening 823, so that a part of the pasting base 293 and one of the coupling structures 391 are accommodated in the internal space 822. A cover member 821 is attached to the substrate box 282.

  As the cover member 821 slides, the peripheral edge forming the opening 823, the surrounding portion 321 and the like slide. Thereby, the attachment direction of the cover member 821 to the board box 282 is defined in one direction, and the removal direction is also defined in one direction (a direction opposite to the removal direction).

  Further, since the opening 823 is formed in accordance with the shape of the surrounding portion 321 and the like, the opening 823 is blocked by the surrounding portion 321 and the coupling portions 392 and 393 in a situation where the cover member 821 is attached. ing. This makes it difficult to insert a jig through the opening 823.

  Here, in the situation where the cover member 821 is arranged, the rotation of the breaking member 801 is not restricted by the cover member 821. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 51, a slit 832 is provided in the side wall 831 facing the side region 296 so as to correspond to the handle 814. The slit 832 is disposed at a position facing the boundary 297 as shown in FIG. The slit 832 is provided on a path along which the breaking member 801 rotates. The slit 832 is formed in a size that allows the destruction base portion 802 and the handle 814 to pass therethrough. Specifically, the length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the slit 832 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than the length dimension of the fracture base portion 802, and the length dimension in the short direction of the slit 832 is set to the fracture base. The thickness dimension of the portion 802 and the handle 814 is set to be the same as or slightly larger than that. In the situation where the cover member 821 is disposed, the handle 814 protrudes through the slit 832.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 51, in a situation where the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position, the second arm portion 804 faces away from the front-side facing plate portion 302 (on the opposite side to the pasting base 293). The side arm 831 is provided with a second arm opening 833 corresponding to the protrusion. The second arm opening 833 is formed at one end of the slit 832 and at the corner of the side wall 831. The second arm portion opening 833 is formed in a size that allows the second arm portion 804 to pass therethrough. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 50 (b), the length dimension in the front and back direction of the adhesive base 293 in the second arm opening 833 is the same as or equal to the corresponding second arm section 804. Is set to be slightly larger. The wall portion 834 that defines the internal space 822 so that the length of the second arm portion opening 833 in the direction orthogonal to the front and back direction is larger than the corresponding projecting size of the second arm portion 804. , The corner portion corresponding to the second arm portion 804 is expanded outward. In the situation where the cover member 821 is disposed, the second arm portion 804 is disposed in the second arm portion opening 833.

  Further, a rotation opening 835 is formed on the other end side of the slit 832 so as to correspond to the pivotal support portion between the breaking member 801 and the pasting base 293. The opening 835 for rotation is formed in a size that allows the first arm 803 to pass therethrough so that the first arm 803 and the cover member 821 do not interfere when the breaking member 801 rotates.

  From the above, even when the cover member 821 is attached to the sticking base 293, the cover member 821 can be rotated when the screw fixing of the breaking member 801 is released. ing. In this case, since the handle 814 protrudes through the slit 832 of the cover member 821, a state in which it is easy to grasp is ensured.

  Further, in the situation where the cover member 821 is disposed, the second arm portion 804 and the pivot support location are accommodated in the internal space 822 of the cover member 821. This restricts access to them.

  In a situation where the cover member 821 is disposed at this position, the cover member 821 is engaged with the breaking member 801. Specifically, a first engagement and a second engagement are generated between the cover member 821 and the breaking member 801.

  First, the first engagement will be described with reference to FIG. 53 in addition to FIG. 51 and FIG. FIG. 53 is an explanatory diagram for explaining the first engagement, and is a diagram schematically showing a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 51, the wall portion 834 is provided with a first hook portion 841. As shown in FIG. 53, the first hook portion 841 protrudes toward the front-side counter plate portion 302 side. The first hook portion 841 is engaged with the second arm portion 804.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 52 (b), the periphery of the first hook portion 841 is cut out except for the end portion on the opening 823 side. Accordingly, the first hook portion 841 is formed to be elastically deformable with the side wall portion 831 side as a free end. Moreover, the 1st hook part 841 is provided with the hook side inclined surface 841a which inclines to the sticking base 293 side as it goes to the side wall part 831 side. Corresponding to the hook side inclined surface 841a, a second arm portion side inclined surface 804a having the same inclination as the hook side inclined surface 841a is provided on the second arm portion 804 side in the second arm portion 804. Is provided. When the cover member 821 slides in the mounting direction, the relative positional relationship between the hook side inclined surface 841a and the second arm portion side inclined surface 804a is defined. Specifically, the hook side inclined surface 841a and the second arm portion side inclined surface 804a are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction.

  According to such a configuration, when the cover member 821 is slid in the attachment direction, the two contact each other, and the first hook portion 841 is elastically deformed so as to escape to the outside (the side opposite to the pasting base 293). Then, when the first hook portion 841 reaches the front side in the mounting direction with respect to the second arm portion 804, the first hook portion 841 returns to the natural state by the restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIG. 53, the first hook portion 841 abuts on the end surface on the front side in the attachment direction of the second arm portion 804, so the cover member 821 is moved in the removal direction that is the reverse direction of the attachment direction. Even if it tries to make it, it will be regulated by the said contact.

  In the situation where the cover member 821 is disposed, the second arm portion 804 is surrounded by a wall portion that defines the second arm portion opening 833. Thereby, access to the second arm portion 804 is restricted, and access to the engaging portion between the second arm portion 804 and the first hook portion 841 is restricted. Furthermore, since the end surface of the second arm portion 804 that is in contact with the first hook portion 841 is disposed on the front side in the attachment direction, the engaging portion can be accessed through the second arm portion opening 833. It has become difficult.

  Next, the second engagement will be described with reference to FIG. 54 in addition to FIG. 51 and FIG. 54A is a front view showing the cover member 821 and its periphery in the substrate box 282, and FIG. 54B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line BB.

  The front side wall portion 851 disposed on the front side of the cover member 821 is provided with a second hook portion 852 that protrudes from the peripheral edge portion of the opening 823 toward the attachment direction. As shown in FIG. 52 (b), the second hook portion 852 has a free end on the tip side, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied. As shown in FIG. 54A, the second hook portion 852 is disposed at a position corresponding to the shaft support location and engages with the receiving portion 812.

  Specifically, the second hook portion 852 is provided with a tip hook portion that protrudes toward the receiving portion 812 side. Further, as shown in FIG. 51 and FIG. 54 (b), the receiving portion 812 is provided with a projection 853 corresponding to the second hook portion 852. The protrusion 853 is disposed at a position that engages with the second hook portion 852 in a situation where the breaking member 801 is in the initial position. Specifically, the protrusion 853 is disposed on the attachment direction side of the cover member 821 in a situation where the breaking member 801 is in the initial position. The relative positional relationship between the second hook portion 852 and the protrusion 853 is set so that the cover member 821 slides in the mounting direction. Specifically, the second hook portion 852 and the protrusion 853 are arranged on the same straight line in the mounting direction of the cover member 821.

  According to this configuration, when the cover member 821 is slid in the attachment direction, the tip hook portion of the second hook portion 852 contacts the receiving portion 812, and the second hook portion 852 is elastically deformed to the front side by the contact. . When the tip hook portion of the second hook portion 852 reaches the front side in the attachment direction with respect to the protrusion 853 of the receiving portion 812, the second hook portion 852 returns to the natural state by the restoring force. Thereby, as shown in FIG.54 (b), the 2nd hook part 852 and the protrusion 853 engage.

  The tip hook portion of the second hook portion 852 is provided with a hook-side inclined surface 852a as shown in FIG. 54 (b), and the front-side peripheral portion of the receiving portion 812 is provided with FIG. As shown in FIG. 54 (b), a receiving portion-side inclined surface 812a is provided. Since these relationships and their effects are the same as those of the hook-side inclined surface 841a and the second arm portion-side inclined surface 804a, the description thereof is omitted.

  Here, the influence of the rotation of the breaking member 801 on the engagement will be described.

  First, the first engagement will be described. When the breaking member 801 rotates, the second arm portion 804 also rotates and moves to the side opposite to the side where the first hook portion 841 is disposed. Thereby, the engagement relationship between the second arm portion 804 and the first hook portion 841 does not occur. Therefore, the sliding movement in the removing direction of the cover member 821 is not hindered. That is, the second arm portion 804 moves toward the side where the engagement with the first hook portion 841 is released as the breaking member 801 rotates.

  Next, the second engagement will be described. When the breaking member 801 rotates, the rotational direction position of the protrusion 853 changes accordingly. Then, the second hook portion 852 engages with the receiving portion 812 instead of the protrusion 853. In this case, since play is generated by the amount of the protrusion 853, the engaged state is easily released compared to the state in which the protrusion 853 is engaged.

  From the above, when the breaking member 801 is rotated, the first engagement is released and the second engagement is easily released.

  Incidentally, when the breaking member 801 is rotated, the protrusion 853 and the front-side counter plate portion 303 are formed to contact each other. Specifically, the protrusion amount of the protrusion 853 is set to be larger than the interval between the receiving portion 812 and the front side opposing plate portion 303. Thereby, the rotatable range of the breaking member 801 is defined.

  In the situation where the cover member 821 is attached to the substrate box 282, one of the coupling structures 391 is covered with the cover member 821. Thereby, access to the coupling structure 391 is restricted. Therefore, fraudulent acts on the coupling structure 391 can be suppressed. In particular, since the opening for inserting the breaking screw in the coupling structure 391 is covered by the cover member 821, access to the breaking screw is impossible or difficult.

  Further, a portion of the surface side wall portion 851 facing the surface region 295 is recessed so as to contact the surface region 295. As a result, the seal seal 160 is sandwiched between the surface side wall portion 851 and the front side sticking plate portion 301.

  The surface side wall 851 is provided with a hole 861 for releasing the fixation. Since the hole 861 is the same as the hole 342 in the sixth embodiment, description thereof is omitted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 282 will be described. 55 and 56 are explanatory diagrams for explaining the procedure in the case where the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened.

  Since the separation of the cover member 821 is restricted by contact with the breaking member 801, it is necessary to release the restriction prior to the removal of the cover member 821.

  Here, the restriction by the breaking member 801 is easily released by rotating the breaking member 801. The rotation of the breaking member 801 is limited by screw fixing of the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292. Therefore, first, the screw fixing is released.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 55 (b), the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted through the hole 861, and the seal seal 160 covering the head of the screw 319 is broken, so that the tip is screwed. 319 is inserted and the screw 319 is removed. As a result, the breaking member 801 can rotate. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through hole 318 for inserting the screw 319, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 319, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the breaking member 801 is rotated by holding the handle 814. Thereby, the seal seal 160 is cut along the boundary 297, and the inhibition of the seal seal 160 is released. In this case, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is also provided so as to straddle the boundary 297, the antenna member 172 is cut along with the rotational movement of the breaking member 801.

  The cutting of the seal seal 160 by rotation is described in detail. Since the seal seal 160 is disposed in the middle of the rotational movement of the breaking member 801, when the breaking member 801 is rotated, the breaking member 801 is separated from the sealing seal 160. Abut. In this case, unlike the configuration in which the breaking member 801 slides, a part of the breaking base portion 802 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160, and the contacting portion between the breaking base portion 802 and the sealing seal 160 is gradually increased with the rotation. In order to shift, cutting is performed with a small contact area. Further, the tapered region 805 that comes into contact with the seal seal 160 is sharply formed, and since the tip thereof is inclined, the contact area is smaller. As a result, the pressing force applied to the seal seal 160 is increased.

  Further, since the contact portion between the fracture base 802 as the force point and the seal seal 160 is disposed between the shaft support location as the fulcrum and the handle 814 as the action point, the pressing force against the seal seal 160 Becomes larger than the force applied to the handle 814. In this case, since the shaft support location is arranged outside the sticking base 293, the shaft support location and the operation unit (the first operation unit for applying external force) are compared with the configuration in which the shaft support location is arranged inside the sticking base 293. In the thirteenth embodiment, the distance between the arm portion 313 and the handle 814) in this embodiment is large. As a result, the distance between the fulcrum and the action point is increased, so that the force applied to the sealing seal 160 by the fracture base portion 802 is increased.

  Further, since the handle 814 is provided, the breaking member 801 can be easily grasped and rotated. Thereby, it is possible to suitably apply a force for rotating the breaking member 801.

  From the above, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut.

  Further, since the pivot support portion is disposed outside the sticking base 293 and the fracture base portion 802 is disposed along the boundary 297 inside the sticking base 293, the entire seal seal 160 straddling the boundary 297 is provided. The amount of rotation stroke of the breaking member 801 required for cutting is reduced. As a result, the inhibition by the seal seal 160 can be easily released, and the inconvenience that a part of the seal seal 160 remains without being cut can be avoided. Note that the rotation range of the breaking member 801 is defined by the protrusion 853 coming into contact with the front-side facing plate portion 303.

  Then, when the breaking member 801 rotates, the restriction on the sliding movement of the cover member 821 by the second arm portion 804 is released, and the engagement between the second hook portion 852 and the protrusion 853 is released. In this case, the second hook portion 852 is engaged with the receiving portion 812, but play corresponding to the protrusion 853 occurs in the engagement.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (b), the cover member 821 is slid while the second hook portion 852 is elastically deformed to the side from which the engagement is released by utilizing the play generated by the rotation. As a result, the cover member 821 is separated from the sticking base 293.

  In this case, since the sealing seal 160 is cut prior to the separation of the cover member 821, the cover member 821 can be more easily compared with the configuration in which the sealing seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 821. Can be separated. That is, as in the sixth embodiment, when the seal seal 160 is cut along with the separation of the cover member 331, a force necessary to cut the seal seal 160 when the cover member 331 is separated is used. It is necessary to grant. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the cover member 821 and the seal seal 160 do not interfere with each other, so that the cover member 821 can be easily separated.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 56C, the relative position of the cover member 821 with respect to the breaking member 801 is adjusted so that the cover member 821 can pass through the second arm portion 804 and the handle 814. Specifically, the relative position of the cover member 821 with respect to the breaking member 801 is determined so that the second arm portion 804 can enter the second arm portion opening 833.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 56 (d), the cover member 821 is slid along the longitudinal direction of the breaking member 801 so that the first hook portion 841 does not contact the second arm portion 804. As a result, the cover member 821 is removed. In the situation where the cover member 821 has been removed, as already described, the cut portion of the seal seal 160 is formed along the boundary 297, and further, the trace of the screw 319 being removed is formed (see FIG. 55C). ). Therefore, it is possible to visually confirm that the opening operation has been performed.

  56B, the cover member 821 is separated together with the breaking member 801 by sliding the breaking member 801 to the front side of the sticking base 293. Accordingly, only the cover member 821 can be separated, and the cover member 821 and the breaking member 801 can be integrally separated. In this case, the integral separation of the cover member 821 and the breaking member 801 can be performed more easily than the separation of the cover member 821 alone.

  That is, in a situation where the mounting direction of the cover member 821 to the substrate box 282 is defined in one direction by sliding between the peripheral edge of the opening 823 and the surrounding portion 321, the first hook is placed outside the sticking base 293. Part 841, a second arm part 804 that engages with the second hook part 852, and a protrusion 853 are provided, and the first hook part 841 is disposed at a position on the same straight line as the second arm part 804 in the attachment direction. In the direction, the second hook portion 852 is disposed at a position on the same straight line as the protrusion 853. The hook portions 841 and 852 are provided with hook-side inclined surfaces 841a and 852a for guiding the hook portions 841 and 852 so as to be elastically deformed to the side over the corresponding second arm portion 804 and the receiving portion 812. . As a result, the cover member 821 and the breaking member 801 are naturally engaged by attaching the cover member 821 to the substrate box 282 in a state where the breaking member 801 is disposed in the initial position in advance. In this case, even if the cover member 821 is to be separated and slid in the removing direction, the sliding movement is restricted by contact with the breaking member 801. The restriction is easily released when the breaking member 801 rotates.

  Here, in order to allow the cover member 821 to be separated after the breaking member 801 is rotated, the breaking member 801 is normally prevented from being separated after the cover member 821 is attached first. A configuration is possible in which the is attached. In this case, it is difficult to accommodate the breaking member 801 in the internal space 822 of the cover member 821 and the inside of the sticking base 293, and there is a concern about an increase in the size of the substrate box 282. However, if the mounting structure avoids the above inconvenience, there is a concern that the configuration is complicated and the workability of the cover member 821 is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, the second arm portion 804 and the protrusion 853 are disposed outside the sticking base 293 in a situation where the breaking member 801 is disposed at the initial position. Correspondingly, the relative positions of the hook portions 841 and 852 are defined. Accordingly, the breaking member 801 is first attached so that the breaking base portion 802 is accommodated in the sticking base 293, and then the cover member 821 is slid in the attaching direction, whereby the cover member 821 is moved in the removal direction. The cover member 821 is attached to the substrate box 282 in a state where the cover member 821 is regulated by the breaking member 801. Thereby, the said inconvenience can be avoided.

  Next, the fraud suppression will be described. Since it is difficult to separate the cover member 821 without cutting the seal seal 160, it is difficult to separate the cover member 821 without leaving a trace. . Thereby, since the opening operation which does not leave a trace is difficult, the skillful fraud which performs the opening operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  Further, since the separation work is more complicated than the attachment work of the cover member 821, unauthorized attachment of the cover member 821 can be suppressed while the attachment work of the cover member 821 is easily performed.

  Further, since the region where the impedance matching slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 straddles the boundary 297, the slit 173 is broken as the breaking member 801 rotates. As a result, the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication with the separation of the cover member 821 from the sticking base 293.

  According to the present embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A breaking member 801 for cutting the seal seal 160 along the boundary 297 is provided. Thereby, the sealing seal | sticker 160 along the boundary 297 can be cut | disconnected easily. Therefore, since the obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 160 can be easily released, the opening operation can be easily performed.

  A cover member 821 that is difficult to remove without cutting the sealing seal 160 with the breaking member 801 is provided. Accordingly, it is necessary to cut the sealing seal 160 prior to removing the cover member 821. Therefore, when the cover member 821 is removed, the sealing seal 160 is surely cut. Therefore, since the opportunity to cut the seal seal 160 is likely to occur, an illegal act of performing the opening operation without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  A surface side wall portion 851 was formed so as to sandwich the seal seal 160 with the front side sticking plate portion 301. Thereby, the shearing force that the breaking member 801 imparts to the seal seal 160 can be increased. That is, the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut by the cover member 821 that restricts the opening operation of the substrate box 282.

<Fifteenth embodiment>
In the present embodiment, a part of the pasting base 293, the member for breaking 910, and the cover member 961 are different from those in the sixth embodiment. The different configuration will be described below with reference to FIGS. In addition, about the same structure as 6th Embodiment, while attaching | subjecting the same number in each drawing, the description is abbreviate | omitted fundamentally.

  First, the sticking base 293 of this embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 57 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 281 in the present embodiment as viewed from the front surface side, FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of a part of the main control device 281 as viewed from the back side, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows 293 and its periphery.

  As shown in FIG. 57, the front side fixed base portion 291 is provided with a pair of front side opposing plate portions 901 and 902 formed so as to sandwich the front side sticking plate portion 301 therebetween. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 58, the back-side fixed base portion 292 protrudes from the side opposite to the back surface region 903 side in the back-side pasting plate portion 304 toward the front-side pasting plate portion 301 side and the front-side facing plate portion 901. , 902 facing each other (the direction in which each of the fixed base portions 291 and 292 protrudes and the direction perpendicular to both the overlapping directions) are provided with a pair of pedestal portions 904 and 905 provided at predetermined intervals. It has been. Between the pair of back-side opposing plate portions 906 and 907 formed so as to sandwich the back-side pasting plate portion 304 therebetween, a base portion 904 and 905 and an extended region 908 sandwiched between both are formed. As shown in FIG. 59, the pedestal portions 904 and 905 protrude so as to enter between the front-side opposing plate portions 901 and 902, and the protruding end surfaces of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 are surfaces of the front-side sticking plate portion 301. It is close to the surface opposite to the region 295 side. However, they are not in contact with each other, and a predetermined gap is formed.

  The side surface outside the board box 282 in the pedestal portions 904 and 905 is located on the same plane with respect to the protruding end surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 301 with the predetermined gap therebetween. A side region 296 is formed. The predetermined gap is opened to the side by a boundary 909 between the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292. The boundary 909 is formed along the direction in which the plate portions 901, 902, 906, and 907 face each other, and a part of the boundary 909 extends in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293 by the expansion region 908. As a result, a bent portion extending in a direction different from the facing direction, specifically, a direction orthogonal to each other, is formed on the periphery of the boundary 909.

  In the space between the pedestal portions 904 and 905 and the front side sticking plate portion 301, a breaking member 910 for cutting the seal seal is provided. The breaking member 910 will be described below in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 and 61 in addition to FIGS. 57, 58 and 59.

  60A is a perspective view of the breaking member 910 viewed from the front side, FIG. 60B is a perspective view of the breaking member 910 viewed from the back side, and FIG. 60C is the back side of the breaking member 910. 61 and 61 are exploded perspective views showing the pasting base 293 and its periphery in an enlarged manner.

  The breaking member 910 is integrally formed of synthetic resin. In addition, as shown in FIG. 57, the breaking member 910 has a thickness dimension that allows entry into the space between the pedestal portions 904 and 905 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301, and between the back-side opposing plate portions 906 and 907. A plate-shaped fracture base portion 911 having a length slightly larger than the distance dimension is integrally formed with a pair of arm portions 912 and 913 formed at both ends of the fracture base portion 911 in the length direction.

  The pair of arm portions 912 and 913 project toward the back-side sticking plate portion 304 at positions outside the end portions 904a and 905a adjacent to the back-side facing plate portions 906 and 907 in the pedestal portions 904 and 905, respectively. Yes. And the relative position of both is set so that the base parts 904 and 905 arrange | positioned via the expansion area | region 908 may be pinched | interposed between a pair of arm parts 912 and 913.

  An extended portion 914 is integrally formed on one end side in the width direction of the destruction base portion 911 so as to correspond to the extended region 908. As shown in FIG. 60B, the extended portion 914 is formed in a plate shape so as to protrude in the thickness direction of the fracture base portion 911. The extension region 908 is formed in a size that allows the extension part 914 to pass through. Specifically, the distance between the pair of pedestal parts 904 and 905 is larger than the length of the extension part 914 in the longitudinal direction. Is set to When the breaking member 910 is inserted into the sticking base 293 so that the pedestal parts 904 and 905 extended area 908 is disposed between the pair of arm parts 912 and 913, the extended part 914 passes through the extended area 908 and is pasted. The relative position between the extended portion 914 and the extended region 908 is set so as to enter the base 293.

  As shown in FIG. 60A, the fracture base portion 911 is provided with a fracture portion 915 protruding in the thickness direction. The breakage portion 915 includes a breakage base portion 916 formed so as to extend in the width direction of the breakage base portion 911, and a breakage protrusion 917 provided on one end side of the breakage base portion 916 and protruding from the breakage base portion 916 in the thickness direction. And. The projecting dimension of the fracture part 915 including the fracture protrusion 917 is larger than the thickness dimension of the front-side sticking plate part 301.

  Corresponding to the protrusion of the breaking portion 915, as shown in FIG. 59, the front side sticking plate portion 301 is formed with a breaking portion opening 918 through which the breaking portion 915 can pass. The opening for broken portion 918 is formed in a size that allows the broken portion 915 to enter. The opening for broken portion 918 is open to the side and communicates with the boundary 909. When the breaking member 910 is inserted so that the pedestal portions 904 and 905 are disposed between the pair of arm portions 912 and 913, the relative positions of the two are such that the breaking portion 915 fits into the breaking portion opening 918. Is set.

  The breaking member 910 having the above-described configuration is attached to the sticking base 293 after the front-side structural body 283 and the back-side structural body 284 are combined and the relative positions of both the structural bodies 283 and 284 become the initial position. Specifically, when the two structural bodies 283 and 284 are combined and the relative positions of the two structural bodies 283 and 284 become the initial position, as shown in FIG. 59, the expansion region 908 is opened to the side, Further, the outer end portions of the pedestal portions 904 and 905, specifically, the end portions 904a and 905a on the back-side counter plate portions 906 and 907 are exposed, and the pedestal portions 904 and 905 and the front-side sticking plate portion 301 are exposed. A sticking base 293 is formed in a state in which the space between the two is opened through the boundary 909 of the side surface region 296. The side where the extended portion 914 and the rupture portion 915 are formed is the insertion destination side with respect to the sticking base 293, so that the rupture portion 915 enters the rupture portion opening 918 and the extension portion 914 passes through the extension region 908. By inserting the breaking member 910 in such a manner, the breaking member 910 enters the sticking base 293. In the following description, the insertion direction of the breaking member 910 is also referred to as an attachment direction.

  The movement of the breaking member 910 in the mounting direction is the periphery of the recess formed to expose the end portions 904a and 905a of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 in the front-side opposing plate portions 901 and 902, and the breaking member 910 When the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 come into contact with the peripheral edge on the insertion destination side, further movement is restricted. This restricted position is the initial position of the breaking member 910. In a situation where the breaking member 910 is disposed at the initial position, the expansion portion 914 is accommodated in the sticking base 293. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 61, the breaking protrusion 917 of the breaking portion 915 protrudes from the front sticking plate portion 301 to the front side via the breaking portion opening 918.

  Here, the end portions 904a and 905a of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 are not covered with the back-side facing plate portions 906 and 907 as shown in FIG. Further, the front-side opposing plate portions 901 and 902 are concave on the side region 296 side and the corner portions on the back-side opposing plate portions 906 and 907 side so as not to cover the end portions 904a and 905a of the pedestal portions 904 and 905. Not formed. Therefore, the end portions 904a and 905a of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 293 as shown in FIG.

  In the above configuration, as described above, the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 are arranged with the pedestal portions 904 and 905 sandwiched therebetween, so that the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 are attached to each other as shown in FIG. 293 is exposed to the outside. Further, the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 are disposed between the corresponding front side opposing plate portions 901 and 902 and the back side opposing plate portions 906 and 907, and end portions 904 a of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 in the pasting base 293. The portion where 905a is exposed is buried.

  While the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 are exposed to the outside of the sticking base 293, the fracture base portion 911 is accommodated in the sticking base 293. If attention is paid to the pasting area 294, it can be said that the destruction base portion 911 is arranged on the opposite side of the pasting base 293 where the pasting area 294 is provided.

  Here, in consideration of the dimensional variation in the manufacturing stage, the length dimension in the longitudinal direction of the fracture base part 911 (distance between the arm parts 912 and 913) is the length dimension of the corresponding sticking base 293 (front side opposing plate part) (Distance between 901 and 902). Thereby, even if a dimension variation occurs in the manufacturing stage, the fracture base portion 911 can be accommodated in the sticking base 293. The dimensional difference (play) is set to be small within a range in which dimensional variation can be accommodated. Thereby, since the clearance gap produced between the destruction base part 911 and the sticking base 293 becomes small, the fraudulent act which inserts a jig | tool from the said clearance gap can be suppressed. In this case, the diagonal dimension based on the width dimension and the longitudinal dimension of the fracture base portion 911 is larger than the length dimension of the sticking base 293. For this reason, in a situation where the breaking member 910 is disposed at the initial position, the breaking member 910 may be loose with respect to the sticking base 293.

  In order to suppress the rattling, a regulation structure that regulates the movement of the breaking member 910 is provided inside the sticking base 293. The restriction structure will be described with reference to FIG. 62 in addition to FIG. FIG. 62 is an explanatory view for explaining an attachment mode of the breaking member 910 to the front-side sticking plate 301, and is a longitudinal sectional view of the sticking base 293 as seen from the side.

  On the back side of the front-side sticking plate portion 301, that is, on the side opposite to the surface region 295, a pair of restricting convex portions 921 and 922 arranged at a predetermined interval in the direction in which the front-side facing plate portions 901 and 902 face each other. Is provided. As shown in FIG. 58, the restricting convex portions 921 and 922 protrude toward the back side. The restricting convex portions 921 and 922 are inclined in a direction away from each other, and intersect with the direction in which the breaking member 910 is separated from the front-side sticking plate portion 301, specifically, the front and back directions of the sticking base 293. Is formed.

  Corresponding to the restricting convex portions 921 and 922, as shown in FIG. 60, restricting openings 923 and 924 are formed in the breaking member 910. The restricting openings 923 and 924 are formed in a size that allows the restricting convex portions 921 and 922 to enter, and are opened toward the attachment direction of the breaking member 910. When the breaking member 910 is moved in the mounting direction, the regulating convex portions 921 and 922 enter the regulating openings 923 and 924 and come into contact with the breaking base portion 911.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 60C, in correspondence with the inclination of the restricting convex portions 921 and 922, the peripheral portion on the arm portion 912 side of the restricting opening 923 is the first portion. An inclined surface 925 is provided, and a second inclined surface 926 is provided on the peripheral edge of the restriction opening 924 on the arm portion 913 side. As shown in FIG. 62, the first inclined surface 925 and the second inclined surface 926 are formed so as to have the same inclination as the inclination of the restricting convex portions 921, 922, and the front and back directions of the sticking base 293 Intersect. The restricting convex portions 921 and 922 are in contact with the first inclined surface 925 and the second inclined surface 926 from the front side in the direction in which the back surface of the front-side sticking plate portion 301 faces. Specifically, a part of the breaking member 910 is sandwiched in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293 in a gap formed between the regulating convex portions 921 and 922 and the front sticking plate portion 301. Thereby, the movement to the front-back direction of the member 910 for destruction is controlled.

  Further, the abutting surface intersects the direction in which the front-side opposing plate portions 901 and 902 face each other, and is inclined in different directions. Thereby, the movement of the member 910 for destruction in the direction where the front side opposing board part 901,902 is facing is controlled. Specifically, the movement of the breaking member 910 toward the front-side counter plate portion 902 is restricted by the contact between the restriction convex portion 921 and the first inclined surface 925, and the restriction convex portion 922 and the second convex portion 922 Due to the contact with the inclined surface 926, the movement of the breaking member 910 toward the front-side counter plate portion 901 is restricted.

  From the above, the breaking member 910 is attached to the sticking base 293 in a state where rattling is suppressed. In this case, the destruction member 910 is restricted from moving in a direction other than the removal direction. In other words, it can be said that the breaking member 910 is regulated to move in the removal direction by contact between the restricting convex portions 921 and 922 and the restricting opening portions 923 and 924.

  The restriction structure is not limited to the above-described structure. For example, a hook part may be provided instead of the restriction convex parts 921 and 922, and a slit may be provided on the destruction base part 911 so as to engage with the hook part. . In short, it is only necessary to engage with the breaking member 910 and suppress the backlash of the breaking member 910, and the specific shape thereof is arbitrary.

  As shown in FIG. 58, on the back side of the front-side sticking plate portion 301, protrusions 930 and 931 that protrude toward the back-side sticking plate portion 304 are provided. The protrusions 930 and 931 extend in a direction orthogonal to the mounting direction, and specifically extend in a direction in which the front-side opposing plate portions 901 and 902 face each other.

  Corresponding to the protrusions 930 and 931, protrusion grooves 932 and 933 are provided on the front side of the fracture base portion 911 (see FIG. 60A). The protrusion grooves 932 and 933 are formed in a size that allows the protrusions 930 and 931 to be fitted therein. In the situation where the breaking member 910 is disposed at the initial position, the protrusions 930 and 931 are fitted in the protrusion grooves 932 and 933. As a result, the breaking member 910 is temporarily fixed to the front-side sticking plate portion 301. Therefore, the breaking member 910 can be attached to the front-side sticking plate portion 301 first, and then the front-side structure 283 and the back-side structure 284 can be combined.

  Incidentally, as shown in FIGS. 60 (b) and 60 (c), the destruction base portion 911 is directed from the middle position in the width direction toward the side opposite to the side where the expansion portion 914 and the breaking protrusion 917 are provided. A tapered region 941 is formed so that the thickness dimension of the destruction base portion 911 is reduced. The breaking member 910 is arranged so that the tapered region 941 faces the boundary 909 side of the side surface region 296. In this case, the tapered region 941 enters the inside of the sticking base 293 from the boundary 909, and the tapered region 941 does not protrude outside the side surface region 296.

  The tapered region 941 is provided with a plurality of inclined portions inclined with respect to the seal seal attached to the attaching region 294, and the plurality of inclined portions facilitate the cutting of the seal seal. However, the details will be described later.

  As shown in FIG. 57, each of the pedestal portions 904 and 905 is formed with screw holes 942 that are opened toward the front-side sticking plate portion 301 side, and each screw hole 942 is provided on the front side of the breaking member 910. A through hole 943 is formed outside the sticking plate 301 for opening. The through holes 943 are arranged so as to be on the same axis with respect to the corresponding screw holes 942 and the through holes 318 of the front-side pasting plate portion 301. Then, a screw 319 as a fixing member that can be attached and detached using a predetermined tool such as a screwdriver is screwed into each screw hole 942 from the front-side sticking plate portion 301 side, so that the breaking member 910 is attached. The fixed base portions 291 and 292 are fixed in a state where the base plate portion 301 and the pedestal portions 904 and 905 are sandwiched. By completing the screw fixing, the mounting of the breaking member 910 to the sticking base 293 is completed.

  As shown in FIG. 61, a sealing seal 160 having an IC tag 163 is affixed to the affixing base 293 to which the breaking member 910 is mounted as described above. Since the configuration of the seal seal 160 is as described in the first embodiment, the description thereof is omitted.

  Next, the configuration related to the sticking position of the seal seal 160 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 in addition to FIG. 63A is a side view showing the sticking base 293 and its periphery, FIG. 63B is an explanatory view for explaining the positional relationship of the seal seal 160 in the sticking region 294, and FIG. 64 is a sticking base 293. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the positional relationship of the member 910 for destruction accommodated in the inside, and the sealing seal | sticker 160, Comprising: It is a partial sectional view at the time of seeing the sticking base 293 from the front side. For convenience of explanation, the corner side cut 177 and the outer edge cut 178 are omitted in FIG. 63B, and the breaking member 910 is shown in a cross-sectional state in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 61 and FIG. 63 (b), the seal seal 160 is affixed to the affixing region 294. In this case, the sealing seal 160 is bent and attached in a U-shape so that the sealing seal 160 is disposed across the front surface region 295, the side surface region 296, and the back surface region 903 in the pasting region 294. The seal seal 160 covers substantially the entire surface region 295, approximately the entire extended region 908, approximately the entire side surface region 296, and approximately the entire back surface region 903. Therefore, the opening of each through hole 318 formed in the front surface region 295 and the opening of each screw hole 942 formed in the back surface region 903 are covered with the seal seal 160 and the front side fixing in the side surface region 296 is performed. The boundary 909 and the extended region 908 between the base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 are also almost entirely covered with the seal seal 160. That is, the seal seal 160 is pasted across the boundary 909 and the extended region 908 of the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292. Thereby, the opening operation of the substrate box 282 is hindered by the seal seal 160. Therefore, it is difficult to open the substrate box 282 without cutting a portion of the seal seal 160 pasting the boundary 909 and the extended region 908 or removing the seal seal 160.

  Further, the positional relationship between the breaking member 910 and the sealing seal 160 will be described. The sealing seal 160 is disposed at a position separated from the breaking member 910. Further, since the breaking member 910 is provided so as to be movable toward the boundary 909, it can be said that the seal seal 160 is provided in the middle of the movement of the breaking member 910.

  As described in the first embodiment, the antenna member 172 in the seal seal 160 is disposed from one corner side to the diagonal corner side in the base sheet 161. Similarly to the above, the antenna member 172 is also arranged in a U shape over the front surface region 295, the side surface region 296, and the back surface region 903.

  The positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through hole 318 will be described.

  One end of the antenna member 172 in the longitudinal direction straddles the opening of one through hole 318 in the surface region 295 as shown in FIGS. 61 and 63B. Specifically, the dimension of the antenna member 172 in the short direction is smaller than the hole diameter of the opening portion of the through hole 318, and the antenna member 172 sandwiches the opening portion of the through hole 318 to define the peripheral portion of the opening portion. It is arranged so as to cross over. By arranging the antenna member 172 in this manner, the end of the antenna member 172 is opposed to the end of the screw 319 opposite to the screw groove. However, since the end portion of the screw 319 opposite to the screw groove side is disposed at an intermediate position in the axial direction of the through hole 318, the screw 319 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other.

  In the antenna member 172, the end on the side opposite to the end across the opening extends over the opening of one screw hole 942 in the back surface region 903. In this case, since the end on the screw groove side of the screw 319 is disposed at an intermediate position in the axial direction of the screw hole 942, the screw 319 and the antenna member 172 are not in contact with each other.

  For example, when the antenna member 172 contacts the screw 319, the set operating frequency (for example, 2.45 GHz) changes, and communication through the antenna member 172 may not be performed satisfactorily. Then, there is a possibility that the ID information stored in the IC chip 171 may not be read even if it is read by the reader device. However, since the antenna member 172 and the screw 319 are not in contact as described above, Occurrence is suppressed.

  Next, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 908 will be described.

  The antenna member 172 is disposed across the side surface region 296 from the front surface region 295 to the back surface region 903, and straddles the extended region 908 in the side surface region 296. Specifically, one end of the antenna member 172 sandwiching the IC chip 171 is disposed in the front surface region 295, the other end is disposed in the back surface region 903, and the antenna member 172 includes an extension region. In the corner portion of the extended region 908 formed by the edge portion on the back surface region 903 side and the edge portion extending in the direction orthogonal to the edge portion from the edge portion on the front surface region 295 side in the peripheral portion of 908. It is arranged over. That is, the antenna member 172 is disposed so as to straddle a plurality of locations in the peripheral edge portion of the extended region 908. Thereby, when the part corresponding to the peripheral part of the expansion area | region 908 is cut | disconnected in the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160, several site | parts in the antenna member 172, specifically the site | part of both sides which pinched | interposed IC chip 171 will be cut | disconnected. .

  Further, since the antenna member 172 is arranged from the one corner side to the diagonal corner side of the base sheet 161, the antenna member 172 straddles in an inclined state with respect to the expansion region 908. For this reason, the region of the antenna member 172 that overlaps the extended region 908 is larger than the configuration in which the antenna member 172 is disposed along the front and back direction of the sticking base 293.

  As shown in FIGS. 63A and 63B, among the impedance matching slits 173 in the antenna member 172, the end of the first slit portion 174 extending in the longitudinal direction of the antenna member 172 on the IC chip 171 side is expanded. While disposed in the region 908, the end opposite to the IC chip 171 side is disposed closer to the surface region 295 than the boundary 909. Thereby, when the area | region corresponding to the boundary 909 is cut | disconnected in the seal seal | sticker 160, the area | region in which the 1st slit part 174 was formed in the antenna member 172 is cut | disconnected, and normal communication becomes impossible in IC tag 163. .

  Here, a surrounding portion 950 is formed on the pasting base 293 so as to partition the pasting region 294.

  The surrounding portion 950 is formed in the same manner as the surrounding portion 321 described in the sixth and eleventh embodiments. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 57 and 59, a front-side step portion is provided between a portion of the peripheral portion of the front-side structure 283 that is continuous with the front-side fixed base portion 291 and a surface region 295 of the front-side fixed base portion 291. 950a is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, a back-side step 950b is formed between a portion that is continuous with the back-side fixed base portion 292 in the peripheral portion of the back-side structure 284 and a back surface region 903 of the back-side fixed base portion 292. Yes. Further, the front side fixed base portion 291 is formed with a pair of front side protrusions 950c facing each other with the surface region 295 and the side surface region 296 sandwiched therebetween, and the back side fixed base portion 292 has a side surface region 296 and a back surface region. A pair of back side protrusions 950d are formed to face each other with 903 interposed therebetween. A part of the arm portions 912 and 913 of the breaking member 910 is disposed between the front-side ridge portion 950c and the back-side ridge portion 950d, and the front-side ridge portion is interposed via the arm portions 912 and 913. 950c and the back side protrusion part 950d are arranged on the same side. That is, a part of the arm portions 912 and 913 constitutes a surrounding portion 950.

  A surrounding part 950 is formed by the arm parts 912, 913, the front side step part 950a, the back side step part 950b, the front side protrusion part 950c, and the back side protrusion part 950d, and the pasting region 294 is surrounded by the surrounding part 950. The entire periphery of the seal seal 160 attached to the attachment region 294 is close to the enclosing portion 950. Thereby, even if it is going to peel off the seal seal | sticker 160, the peeling act becomes very difficult.

  Since the entire periphery of the seal seal 160 is close to the enclosing portion 950, when the seal seal 160 is applied, the seal seal 160 is attached so that it does not protrude from the area surrounded by the enclosing portion 950. Thus, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 908, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172, the screw hole 942, and the through-hole 318, and the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 909 are naturally as described above. .

  Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the region surrounded by the surrounding portion 950 is wider than the area of the seal seal 160. As a result, when the seal sticker 160 is pasted, a predetermined clearance is created at the pasting position, and the workability of the pasting work is improved. In this case, the clearance of the affixing position includes the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the extended region 908, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the boundary 909, the positional relationship between the antenna member 172 and the through hole 318, and the antenna member. The positional relationship between 172 and the screw hole 942 is set within a range that is naturally maintained.

  Since the breaking member 910 is arranged so that the tapered region 941 faces the boundary 909 side, the tapered region 941 comes into contact with the sealing seal 160 when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction. By the contact, a pressing force related to the movement is applied to the seal seal 160, and the region corresponding to the boundary 909 in the seal seal 160 is cut.

  Details of the tapered region 941 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIGS. 60B, 60C, and 64, a cutting edge 951 sharpened toward the sealing seal 160 by a tapered region 941 is provided at the front side in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 in the breaking base portion 911. Is formed. The cutting edge 951 has a plurality of inclined portions formed on the same plane, specifically, a first inclined portion 952 inclined with respect to the sealing seal 160 attached to the side surface region 296, and A second inclined portion 953 inclined in a different direction with respect to the first inclined portion 952. The first inclined portion 952 is inclined so as to enter the direction opposite to the removing direction of the breaking member 910 from the end portion on the arm portion 912 side toward the center side in the longitudinal direction of the breaking base portion 911 and the second inclined portion. The portion 953 is inclined so as to enter the direction opposite to the removal direction of the breaking member 910 from the end on the arm portion 913 side toward the center. Due to the inclined portions 952 and 953, the distance from the both ends of the cutting edge 951 to the sealing seal 160 is the same in the removing direction of the breaking member 910.

  In addition, a saw portion 954 formed by an inclined portion having a larger inclination angle than the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 between the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 in the cutting edge 951. Is provided. The saw portion 954 has blades 955 and 956 that are convex in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 by a pair of inclined portions with opposite inclination directions. The blades 955 and 956 are juxtaposed in the direction in which the arm portions 912 and 913 face each other, and both are continuous.

  The saw portion 954 is continuous with the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953. Specifically, one of the pair of inclined portions forming the blade 955 is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the first inclined portion 952, and the valley portion 957 is formed by the blade 955 and the first inclined portion 952. . One of the pair of inclined portions forming the blade 956 is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the second inclined portion 953, and the valley portion 958 is formed by the blade 956 and the second inclined portion 953. As a result, the distance from both ends of the cutting edge 951 to the seal seal 160 in the removing direction of the breaking member 910 is smaller than the distance from the valleys 957 and 958 to the seal seal 160.

  The distance from the tip of the saw portion 954 (tips of the blades 955 and 956) to the seal seal 160 and the distance from both ends of the cutting edge 951 to the seal seal 160 in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 are set to be the same. Yes. As a result, when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction, both ends of the cutting edge 951 and the tip of the saw portion 954 come into contact with the seal seal 160.

  Here, both ends of the cutting edge 951 are arranged outside the both ends corresponding to the cutting edge 951 in the seal seal 160. Specifically, the length dimension between both ends of the cutting edge 951 (the distance from the end portion on the arm portion 912 side of the first inclined portion 952 to the end portion on the arm portion 913 side of the second inclined portion 953) is: The sealing seal 160 is set to be larger than the corresponding length dimension. As a result, when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction, the cutting edge 951 comes into contact with both ends of the seal seal 160, and the seal seal 160 is cut from both ends.

  Note that both ends of the cutting edge 951 may be at the same positions as the corresponding ends in the seal seal 160. However, the configuration in which both ends of the cutting edge 951 are on the outside is easier to cope with the positional deviation of the seal seal 160.

  The position of the saw portion 954 is set so that the saw portion 954 contacts the portion of the seal seal 160 where the antenna member 172 is provided when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 64, the cutting edge 951 is sawed at a position opposite to the direction in which the breaking member 910 is removed with respect to the range Z corresponding to the place where the antenna member 172 is disposed. A portion 954 is provided. The range Z is a range corresponding to the clearance of the attaching position generated between the enclosing portion 950 and the seal seal 160, and specifically, is a range in which the position of the antenna member 172 varies due to the clearance. A plurality of blades 955 and 956 are provided so that the saw portion 954 is formed over at least the range facing the range Z in the cutting edge 951. Accordingly, even when the antenna member 172 and the saw portion 954 are displaced due to the clearance of the pasting position, the saw portion 954 comes into contact with the antenna member 172.

  Next, the relationship between the break protrusion 917 and the seal seal 160 will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, the seal sticker 160 is made to correspond to the fact that the break protrusion 917 protrudes from the front sticking plate portion 301 to the front side. Is provided with a cutout recess 959 formed by cutting out a part thereof. By sticking the sealing seal 160 so that the breaking protrusion 917 enters the cut-out recess 959, the breaking protrusion 917 comes into contact with the end of the sealing seal 160 when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction. . Accordingly, the seal seal 160 is cut by the breaking protrusion 917 by moving the breaking member 910 in the removal direction.

  In the removal direction of the breaking member 910, the length dimension of the cut-out recess 959 is set so that the distance from the breaking projection 917 to the sealing seal 160 is different from the distance from both ends of the breaking base portion 911 to the sealing seal 160. Specifically, the length dimension of the cut-out recess 959 in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 is set to be larger than the dimension obtained by adding the diameter of the breaking protrusion 917 and the distance from both ends of the breaking base portion 911 to the seal seal 160. .

  Further, by sticking the seal seal 160 so that it does not protrude from the region surrounded by the enclosing portion 950, the positional relationship between the breaking projection 917 and the cut-out recess 959 is set so as to be the above-described relationship. ing. Furthermore, the clearance of the application position generated between the enclosing portion 950 and the seal seal 160 is set within a range in which the above-described positional relationship between the fracture protrusion 917 and the cutout recess 959 is maintained.

  Incidentally, an inclined surface 916 a that is inclined with respect to the sealing seal 160 attached to the side surface region 296 is formed at a portion of the fracture base portion 916 on the sealing seal 160 side. The inclined surface 916a is inclined so that the thickness dimension of the breaking base portion 916 becomes smaller toward the sealing seal 160 side, and the breaking base portion 916 is formed to be tapered toward the removing direction of the breaking member 910. . The inclined surface 916a facilitates the cutting of the seal seal 160 by the fracture base portion 916. This action will be described later.

  The seal seal 160 attached to the attachment region 294 is covered with a cover member 961. The cover member 961 will be described in detail below with reference to FIGS. 65A, 65B and 66 in addition to FIG.

  65 (a) is a perspective view of the cover member 961, FIG. 65 (b) is an explanatory view for explaining a state in which the cover member 961 is attached to the substrate box 282, and FIG. It is sectional drawing. In FIG. 65 (b), the destructive member 910 is shown in a state other than a cross section for convenience of explanation.

  The cover member 961 is formed of a colorless and transparent synthetic resin such as a polycarbonate resin in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a predetermined internal space 962 as shown in FIGS. 61 and 65A. A plurality of (specifically, five) wall portions that form a partition can transmit radio waves into and out of the cover member 961. As shown in FIG. 65A, an opening 963 is formed in the cover member 961 so that one of the six faces of the rectangular parallelepiped is not provided, and an internal space 962 is formed through the opening 963. The cover member 961 is open to the outside. Further, the opening 963 is formed so that the peripheral edge thereof enters the inside of each of the pair of wall portions 964 and 965 facing each other with the opening 963 interposed therebetween.

  An internal space 962 of the cover member 961 is formed to have a size that can accommodate the entire sticking base 293 to which the seal seal 160 is stuck. The opening 963 is formed in a size that allows the sticking base 293 to be inserted into the internal space 962 from the protruding tip side of the sticking base 293.

  The distance between the two wall portions 964 and 965 of the cover member 961 is equal to or greater than the distance between the pair of opposed plate portions 901, 902, 906, and 907 facing each other across the pasting region 294 in the pasting base 293. It is set slightly larger.

  A pair of claw portions 966 and 967 are integrally formed on both wall portions 964 and 965 so as to protrude from the peripheral edge portion of the opening portion 963 toward the sticking base 293 (note that the claw portion 967 is shown in FIG. )). The claw portions 966 and 967 have free ends at their distal ends, and can be elastically deformed when an external force is applied.

  In correspondence with the claw portions 966 and 967, as shown in FIGS. 60 and 61, the pair of arm portions 912 and 913 of the breaking member 910 integrated with the sticking base 293 are received by protruding outward. Portions 968 and 969 are integrally formed. The cover member 961 is installed in the substrate box 282 so that the pasting base 293 is inserted into the internal space 962 through the opening 963. At the time of this installation, the claw portions 966 and 967 are elastically deformed so as to escape outward by coming into contact with the corresponding receiving portions 968 and 969 from the original side in the mounting direction, and the tip hook portions of the claw portions 966 and 967 However, when it reaches the front side in the mounting direction with respect to the receiving portions 968 and 969, it returns to the natural state by the restoring force. As a result, as shown in FIG. 65 (b), the tip hook portions of the claw portions 966, 967 abut against the end portions of the receiving portions 968, 969 from the front side in the mounting direction, and in the opposite direction of the mounting direction. Even if the cover member 961 is to be moved in a certain removal direction, the contact is prevented by the contact. The cover member 961 is fixed to the substrate box 282 by the engagement between the claw portions 966 and 967 and the receiving portions 968 and 969.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 66, the breaking protrusion 917 is engaged with the cover member 961. Specifically, the breaking protrusion 917 protrudes to the front side with respect to the front-side stepped portion 950a that is a part of the surrounding portion 950, and the surface facing the surface region 295 in the cover member 961 corresponding to the breaking protrusion 917. An engaging recess 971 is formed on the inner wall surface of the side wall portion 970. The engaging concave portion 971 is formed by denting a part of the inner wall surface of the surface side wall portion 970 so that the breaking protrusion 917 can be inserted. When the cover member 961 is attached, the breaking projection 917 is arranged so as to enter the engaging recess 971. As a result, when the cover member 961 is moved in the removal direction, the breaking projection 917 is caught by the cover member 961 and the movement is hindered.

  That is, the cover member 961 and the breaking member 910 are connected by the first engagement of the claw portions 966 and 967 and the receiving portions 968 and 969 and the second engagement of the breaking protrusion 917 and the engagement recess 971. Has been. A cover member 961 is attached to the substrate box 282 through these two connections. Thus, the breaking member 910 is interlocked with the movement of the cover member 961.

  By fixing the cover member 961 to the substrate box 282, substantially the entire sticking base 293 integrated with the breaking member 910 is surrounded by the cover member 961. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 66, the inner wall surface of the cover member 961 is in contact with or close to the surrounding portion 950 on the surface region 295 side, the side surface region 296 side, and the back surface region 903 side of the pasting region 294. . In this case, the second engaging portion of the breaking protrusion 917 and the engaging recess 971 is disposed inside the cover member 961, and access from the outside is restricted. Specifically, the inner wall surface of the front side wall portion 970 of the cover member 961 and the front side surface of the front protrusion 950c are in contact with each other, and the second engagement portion is more open than the contact portion. Are arranged on the opposite side. As a result, an illegal act of accessing the second engagement location through the opening 963 of the cover member 961 can be suppressed.

  Incidentally, both dimensions are set between the cover member 961 and the surrounding portion 950 so that a play corresponding to the dimensional variation in the manufacturing stage is generated. As a result, it is possible to avoid the inconvenience that the cover member 961 cannot be attached due to dimensional variations at the manufacturing stage. The play is set to be small within a range capable of dealing with the dimensional variation so that a gap formed between the cover member 961 and the sticking base 293 becomes small when the cover member 961 is attached. Thereby, the illegal act which inserts a jig | tool from a clearance gap between the cover member 961 and the surrounding part 950 can be suppressed.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 59, inclined surfaces that are inclined in a direction facing each other toward the removing direction of the breaking member 910 are provided on the surfaces of the front facing plate portions 901 and 902 and the back facing plate portions 906 and 907. (Refer to FIG. 8 for the back side counter plate portion 907). Corresponding to the inclined surface, the wall portion 964, 965 of the cover member 961 is formed with the same inclination as the inclined surface at a portion facing the inclined surface. As a result, in the situation where the cover member 961 is attached, the surfaces of the opposing plate portions 901, 902, 906, and 907 and the inner wall surfaces of the wall portions 964 and 965 are in contact with or close to each other. The gap formed between the two and 961 is small.

  A hole 981 is provided in the surface side wall portion 970 of the cover member 961. The configuration of the hole 981 is the same as that of the hole 342 of the sixth embodiment, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  Next, a procedure for opening the internal space of the substrate box 282 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 and 68. FIG. 67 (a) to 67 (c) are explanatory views for explaining the procedure when the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened, and FIGS. 68 (a) to 68 (d) are cuts of the seal seal 160 by the breaking member 910. FIG. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating, and is sectional drawing at the time of seeing the sticking base 293 from the back surface side.

  As already described, sliding the other of the constituent members 283 and 284 in the separating direction for opening the front side fixing base portion 291 and the back side fixing base portion 292 constituting the sticking base 293 with screws. And is restricted by the cover member 961 and obstructed by the seal seal 160. For this reason, as a pre-process for performing the slide movement, the separation operation of the cover member 961, the screw fixation release, and the inhibition by the seal seal 160 are released.

  The cover member 961 is connected to the breaking member 910 by the first engagement and the second engagement, and the breaking member 910 is fixed to the sticking base 293 by screw fixing. The screw fixing of the breaking member 910 is released as a pretreatment for separation 961. Specifically, the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver is inserted from the fixing release hole 981 of the cover member 961. Then, the sealing seal 160 covering the head of the screw 319 is pierced by the tip of a tool such as a screwdriver, so that the tip is inserted into the head of the screw 319. As shown in FIG. To leave. As already described, since the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 straddles the through hole 318 for inserting the screw 319, when the tip of the tool is inserted into the head of the screw 319, the seal seal 160 Not only a part of the damage but also a part of the antenna member 172 is broken.

  When the screw 319 is detached as described above, the breaking member 910 can be separated from the sticking base 293, and accordingly, the cover member 961 can be separated from the sticking base 293. In this case, since the cover member 961 and the breaking member 910 are engaged with each other, if the cover member 961 is moved with the direction opposite to the mounting direction at the time of installation as the separation direction (the removal direction), The member 910 also moves in the separation direction integrally.

  Here, in order to reduce the gap formed between the breakage base portion 911 and the sticking base 293, the play is set small in the design stage, and the gap is formed between the cover member 961 and the surrounding portion 950. Since the play at the design stage is set to be small in order to reduce the gap, when the cover member 961 is moved in the removal direction, in addition to the interference between the breaking member 910 and the seal seal 160, the breaking member 910 Interference between the cover member 961 and the cover base 293, interference between the cover member 961 and the surrounding portion 950, and the like, make it difficult to move the cover member 961. For this reason, the cover member 961 is separated while repeating the operation of inclining the other end side with both ends of the cutting edge 951 as a fulcrum so that the fulcrum side is alternately replaced. In this case, since the restriction structure described above is provided, the breaking member 910 moves in the removing direction while maintaining a state parallel to the sticking base 293 at the start of separation, and the sealing seal 160 of the cutting edge 951 is provided. The contact with respect to is preferably guided. In the following description, the operation of inclining the other end side with one end side as a fulcrum of both ends of the cutting edge 951 is also referred to as a unit operation.

  As already described, since the cutting edge 951 and the tip of the saw portion 954 are arranged at positions close to the seal seal 160, when the separation operation of the cover member 961 is started, the contact with the seal seal 160 from these starts. Is started. In this case, in order to perform the separation operation while repeating the operation of inclining the one end side as described above, the leading side of both ends of the cutting edge 951 comes into contact with the seal seal 160 and starts cutting. In this case, the pressing force against the seal seal 160 is increased by the lever principle. After that, although depending on the degree of rotation, cutting by the center side is started, and cutting of the other end is started by setting the rotation to the opposite side.

  In particular, since the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 are provided, the seal seal 160 is cut regardless of which direction the rotation is performed. Thereby, since the stroke amount required for cutting the seal seal 160 is small, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut.

  Furthermore, since both ends of the cutting edge 951 are disposed outside the seal seal 160, the cutting edge 951 abuts against both ends of the seal seal 160, and the seal seal 160 is cut from both ends. As a result, uncut portions are less likely to occur in the seal seal 160.

  In addition, since the position of the saw portion 954 is set so that the saw portion 954 contacts the antenna member 172, when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction, the antenna member 172 is first cut and communication is performed. It becomes impossible. Thereby, even when the cover member 961 is moved to an intermediate position, the fact can be grasped.

  The strength of the sealing seal 160 at the location where the antenna member 172 is disposed is increased by the amount corresponding to the antenna member 172, but the saw portion 954 formed by an inclined portion having a relatively large inclination angle with respect to the location. Because of the contact, the contact range between the saw portion 954 and the antenna member 172 is reduced. Thereby, the cutting | disconnection of the said range can be performed easily.

  The relative position between the breaking member 910 and the antenna member 172 is defined by a restriction structure provided inside the sticking base 293. This makes it difficult for the saw portion 954 to be displaced relative to the antenna member 172. Further, the two blades 955 and 956 were formed so that the saw portion 954 abuts over a range Z including a clearance of the attaching position generated between the seal seal 160 and the surrounding portion 950. This ensures that the saw portion 954 abuts against the antenna member 172.

  While the IC chip 171 is disposed in the extended region 908, the end of the first slit portion 174 opposite to the IC chip 171 side is disposed on the surface region 295 side relative to the expanded region 908. . For this reason, the area | region in which the 1st slit part 174 was formed is cut | disconnected. As a result, the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication.

  As shown in FIG. 68A, a taper region 941 is formed in the fracture base portion 911 of the breaking member 910, and the cutting edge 951 is moved in the direction of removing the breaking member 910 by the taper region 941. Pointed. When the breaking member 910 is separated, the cutting edge 951 is the front side in the separation direction. Therefore, a sharp point comes into contact with the seal seal 160, and the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut.

  Returning to the description of the opening operation, after the separation operation is started and the cutting by the saw portion 954 and both ends of the cutting edge 951 is started, the cutting by the breaking protrusion 917 is started. That is, as already described, the breaking projection 917 moves along the breaking portion opening 918 as the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction, and the distance from the breaking projection 917 to the seal seal 160 The distance from both ends of the cutting edge 951 to the seal seal 160 and the distance from the tip of the saw portion 954 to the seal seal 160 are set to be larger. Thereby, the cutting start timing by the breaking protrusion 917 is later than the cutting start timing by the cutting edge 951. In other words, the cutting start timing by the breaking protrusion 917 and the cutting start timing by the cutting edge 951 are shifted. Therefore, since the load related to the start of cutting is distributed, the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut.

  In this case, the part which covers the opening part 918 for broken parts in the seal seal | sticker 160 by the fracture | rupture protrusion 917 is fractured | ruptured. Therefore, the seal sticker 160 attached to the part different from the part pasted over the boundary 909 in the seal seal 160, specifically, the surface sticker 295 is destroyed. Therefore, since a part of different surfaces in the seal seal 160 is destroyed, it is easy for an administrator to confirm the destruction location.

  Further, if the separation operation of the cover member 961 is continued, the restriction by the restriction structure is relaxed. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 60C, the second inclined surface 926 is formed from the end opposite to the open end of the restriction opening 924 to the open end, while the first The inclined surface 925 is formed from the end opposite to the open end of the restriction opening 923 to the middle position on the open end side. As a result, when the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction, as shown in FIG. 68B, the first inclined surface 925 and the restricting convex portion 921 do not come into contact with each other, and the first inclined surface 925 and the restricting convex portion are not contacted. The restriction by the part 921 is released. As a result, the backlash of the breaking member 910 with respect to the sticking base 293 increases, and accordingly, the amount of displacement per unit operation increases.

  It should be noted that the movement of the breaking member 910 in the front and back direction of the sticking base 293 (the overlapping direction of the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292) is regulated by the regulation structure. Thereby, the positional deviation of the breaking member 910 in the direction is suppressed.

  As shown in FIG. 68 (c), when the breaking member 910 is further moved, the restriction by the second inclined surface 926 and the restricting convex portions 921, 922 is released, and the displacement amount is further increased. That is, since the displacement amount per unit operation increases stepwise with the movement of the breaking member 910 in the removal direction, the cutting range of the seal seal 160 per unit operation increases. Therefore, the sealing seal 160 can be cut more suitably.

  Further, when the cover member 961 is moved in the removal direction, the gaps formed between the wall portions 964 and 965 and the opposing plate portions 901, 902, 906, and 907 gradually increase. Accordingly, the unit operation is not easily inhibited by the interference between the cover member 961 and the pasting base 293. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 68 (d), the displacement amount of the unit operation becomes large. Therefore, the cutting range per unit operation becomes large, and the seal seal 160 can be suitably cut.

  Here, the breaking portion 915 moves along the breaking portion opening 918, but does not hinder the separation operation of the cover member 961. Specifically, the length of the opening 918 for the breaking portion in the direction in which the arm portions 912 and 913 face each other is set to be larger than that of the breaking base portion 916 and the breaking protrusion 917. As a result, a predetermined gap is formed between the fracture portion 915 and the peripheral edge of the fracture portion opening 918 in the direction in which the arm portions 912 and 913 face each other. Therefore, when the other end is inclined with one end of the cutting edge 951 as a fulcrum, interference between the fracture portion 915 and the peripheral edge of the fracture portion opening 918 is unlikely to occur. Therefore, the separation operation of the cover member 961 is not easily hindered by the breaking portion 915.

  Thereafter, as the cover member 961 is separated, the entire cutting edge 951 including the valleys 957 and 958 moves outward from the boundary 909, whereby the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is completed.

  Here, in the cutting edge 951, the distance in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 between the shortest distance (both ends) and the longest distance (the valleys 957 and 958) with respect to the boundary 909 is the first inclined portion 952. Compared to the case only, it is shorter. Thereby, the stroke amount from the cutting start of the cutting edge 951 to the completion of cutting is reduced.

  By performing a further separation operation after the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is completed, the sealing seal 160 is broken by the fracture base portion 916. Specifically, the breaking portion opening 918 is opened in the removal direction, and the boundary 909 and the breaking portion opening 918 communicate with each other. The fracture base portion 916 disposed in the fracture portion opening 918 is formed to be tapered toward the sealing seal 160 side by the inclined surface 916a, and the tip thereof is disposed on the fracture base portion 911 side. (See FIG. 66). The distance between the tip of the fracture base portion 916 and the seal seal 160 in the removal direction of the fracture member 910 is set to be larger than the distance between the valley portions 957 and 958 of the cutting edge 951 and the seal seal 160. Thereby, after the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is completed, the breakage by the fracture base portion 916 is started. Thereby, the cutting by the fracture base portion 916 is started after the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is completed. In this case, the fracture base portion 916 breaks the seal seal 160 so as to widen the portion cut by the cutting edge 951 (tapered region 941).

  Further, in synchronism with the timing or before or after the timing, expansion of the cut portion already formed by the expansion portion 914 is started. Specifically, when the expansion portion 914 passes through the expansion region 908, a portion corresponding to a portion extending in the front-back direction in the peripheral portion of the expansion region 908 in the seal seal 160 is cut. In this case, the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is completed at a timing before the extended portion 914 passes through the extended region 908, and the extended portion 914 expands the cutting portion cut by the cutting edge 951. Destroy. As a result, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), the area to be broken in the seal seal 160 is increased, and the fact that the seal seal 160 has been broken can be easily confirmed.

  In particular, from the viewpoint of ease of cutting, if the contact area is narrowed by providing a tapered region 941 or the like, the unevenness of the cut surface becomes smaller and the cut portion becomes inconspicuous, so whether or not the opening operation has been performed is confirmed. There is a concern that workability will be reduced. On the other hand, according to the present embodiment, since the cut portion is expanded by the expansion unit 914, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  In addition, after the seal seal 160 is broken by the cutting edge 951, the seal seal 160 is broken by the extended portion 914, so that the load required for each break is distributed. Thereby, compared with the structure destroyed at once, the seal seal 160 can be easily broken.

  Here, as shown in FIGS. 60B and 68, etc., the extended portion 914 is provided with an inclined surface 914a that is inclined so that the thickness dimension of the extended portion 914 becomes smaller toward the direction of removing the breaking member 910. The extended portion 914 is tapered toward the direction in which the breaking member 910 is removed. The tapered tip is disposed on the cutting edge 951 side. As a result, when the breaking member 910 is moved in the removal direction, the expansion portion 914 comes into contact with the side near the portion cut by the cutting edge 951, and is sealed so as to spread the portion cut by the cutting edge 951. The seal 160 is broken. Therefore, the destruction which expands the location cut | disconnected by the edge 951 for cutting can be performed suitably.

  The antenna member 172 is disposed across the expansion region 908, and the IC chip 171 is disposed in the expansion region 908. For this reason, when cutting by the extended portion 914 is performed, portions on both sides of the antenna member 172 sandwiching the IC chip 171 are cut. Therefore, since the length dimension of the antenna member 172 becomes small, the communication possible range becomes larger and narrower than the normal range after fraud. Therefore, it is possible to reliably grasp that the opening operation has been performed. Furthermore, since the several location of the antenna member 172 will be cut | disconnected and a several trace will be formed, it can confirm easily that opening operation was performed.

  From the above, as shown in FIG. 67 (c), by moving the breaking member 910 in the removal direction, the region pasted on the boundary 909 and the breaking portion opening 918 in the seal seal 160 is cut. The obstruction of the opening operation by the seal seal 160 is released. Therefore, both the constituent members 283 and 284 can be slid and the internal space of the substrate box 282 can be opened. Therefore, it is possible to inspect the CPU chip 103 and the like. That is, since the breaking member 910 is moved in accordance with the separation operation of the cover member 961 and the seal seal 160 is cut, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability when performing the opening operation.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

  A breaking member 910 for cutting the sealing seal 160 along the boundary 909 was provided. Thereby, since the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be cut | disconnected easily, the improvement of workability | operativity of opening operation can be aimed at. Further, when the sealing seal 160 is cut by the breaking member 910, the cut portion remains as a trace, so that it can be easily confirmed that the opening operation has been performed.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the surrounding portion 950 is provided from the viewpoint of suppressing the positioning of the seal sticker 160 and the illegal act of peeling the seal sticker 160, there is a concern that workability in the opening operation may be reduced. On the other hand, according to this Embodiment, since the member 910 for destruction which cuts the sealing seal | sticker 160 is provided separately, the fall of workability | operativity can be suppressed. Thereby, coexistence with suppression of the fraud to the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 and suppression of the workability | operativity at the time of opening operation can be aimed at.

  The arm portions 912 and 913 of the breaking member 910 are formed so as to constitute a part of the surrounding portion 950. Thereby, the breaking member 910 can be attached to the inside of the sticking base 293 without interference between the breaking member 910 and the portion constituting the surrounding portion 950.

  The cutting edge 951 is provided with a first inclined portion 952 inclined with respect to the seal seal 160 affixed to the side region 296 and a second inclined portion 953 inclined in a direction different from the first inclined portion 952. It was. Thereby, while aiming at size reduction of the destruction base part 911, the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be cut | disconnected suitably by starting the cutting | disconnection from a predetermined location.

  In the cutting edge 951, the distance in the removal direction of the breaking member 910 between the shortest distance location (both ends) and the longest distance location (the valleys 957 and 958) with respect to the boundary 909 is only the first inclined portion 952. The second inclined portion 953 is formed so as to be shorter than in the case. As a result, the stroke amount of the breaking member 910 required to cut the location of the boundary 909 is reduced, so that the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut.

  The breaking member 910 is provided with an expansion portion 914 that breaks the seal seal 160 so as to expand the cutting portion after the cutting by the cutting edge 951 is performed. Thereby, since it becomes easy to see a cutting | disconnection location, it can confirm easily that the cutting | disconnection was performed.

  Further, the breaking member 910 is provided with a breaking portion 915 that cuts a part of the surface on the surface region 295 side that is orthogonal to the surface on the side region 296 side that is cut by the cutting edge 951. Thereby, since the broken part in the seal seal | sticker 160 is easy to see, the fact that opening operation was performed can be confirmed easily.

  In the present embodiment, the cover member 961 can be slid in the removal direction by setting a large gap between the cover member 961 and the surrounding portion 950 and a large gap between the arm portions 912 and 913 and the pasting base 293. It is good. Even in this configuration, since the cutting edge 951 is formed, the sealing seal 160 can be easily cut. However, in this case, since an illegal act such as inserting a jig through the gap can be performed, the above embodiment is superior from the viewpoint of suppressing the illegal act.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the breaking protrusion 917 may be formed so as to constitute a part of the surrounding portion 950. Thereby, the breaking projection 917 can be made multifunctional, and the cutting area by the breaking projection 917 can be increased by reducing the length of the cut-out recess 959.

  In addition, the breaking protrusion 917 is configured to engage with the engaging recess 971. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and it may not be engaged, for example. In this case, since the cover member 961 can be isolated separately, a simple inspection can be suitably performed.

  As a specific configuration for preventing the engagement, for example, a configuration in which the projecting dimension of the breaking projection 917 is reduced or the engaging recess 971 is opened toward the opening 963 is conceivable.

  In addition, the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 are provided so that both end portions of the cutting edge 951 protrude toward the seal seal 160, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and for example, as shown in FIG. 69 (a). Thus, it is good also as a structure by which the front-end | tip part 992 sharpened toward the seal seal | sticker 160 side by the two inclined parts 991a and 991b is formed. Thereby, since the contact location of the destruction base part 911 and the seal seal | sticker 160 decreases, pressing force can be raised.

  In this case, the positional relationship between the two may be set so that the tip 992 contacts the antenna member 172. Thereby, since the location where the strength is increased by the antenna member 172 can be easily cut, the sealing seal 320 can be easily cut.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 69 (b), the first inclined portion 993a and the second inclined portion 993b having the same inclination direction and different inclination angles with respect to the seal seal 160 attached to the side surface region 296 are provided. In addition, a third inclined portion 993c and a fourth inclined portion 993d that are inclined in a direction different from the inclined portions 993a and 993b and have different inclination angles are provided, and inclined portions having a large inclination angle on the arm portions 912 and 913 sides. It is good also as a structure which installs (the 1st inclination part 993a, the 3rd inclination part 993c). In this case, at the initial stage of cutting the seal seal 160, the first inclined portion 993a and the third inclined portion 993c abut on the seal seal 160. Since the contact range is narrower than that of the second inclined portion 993b and the fourth inclined portion 993d, the pressing force against the seal seal 160 is increased.

  On the other hand, at a later stage of cutting the seal seal 160, the second inclined portion 993b and the fourth inclined portion 993d abut against the seal seal 160. In this case, the seal seal 160 can be cut with a small stroke amount.

  From the above, the external force and stroke amount required for cutting are adjusted.

  Further, since the second inclined portion 993b and the fourth inclined portion 993d are provided, the width dimension of the fracture base portion 911 is secured. Accordingly, the strength of the breaking member 910 is increased as compared with the configuration of only the first inclined portion 993a and the third inclined portion 993c.

  Moreover, although the saw part 954 is provided corresponding to the range Z in which the antenna member 172 is disposed, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the saw part 954 may not be provided. Even in this case, the seal seal 160 including the antenna member 172 can be cut by moving the cover member 961. However, if attention is paid to the fact that the antenna member 172 is cut first and the ease of cutting, the configuration in which the saw portion 954 is provided is superior. Further, the number of blades of the saw portion 954 is arbitrary.

  In addition, the antenna member 172 may be disposed so as to straddle the opening 918 for the breaking portion. Thereby, since the destruction location of the antenna member 172 increases, the fact that it has been destroyed can be easily confirmed, and the length of the antenna member 172 can be further reduced. As a specific configuration, a configuration in which the breaking portion 915 and the breaking portion opening 918 are provided on the arm portion 912 side can be considered.

  As shown in FIG. 70, the extension region 994 may be defined such that the first slit portion 174 straddles the boundary 909 and straddles the peripheral edge of the extension region 994. In this case, since the 1st slit part 174 is cut | disconnected by multiple places, the destruction of the 1st slit part 174 can be performed more reliably.

  As shown in FIG. 71, the expansion portion 914 is provided with inclined surfaces 995a and 995b having different inclination directions with respect to the seal seal 160 attached to the side surface region 296, and the inclined surfaces 995a and 995b expand the expansion portion 914. The end of the portion 914 opposite to the destruction base portion 911 side may be arranged closer to the seal seal 160 than the end of the destruction base portion 911 side. In this case, the part on the back surface region 903 side can be suitably cut at the peripheral edge of the extended region 908.

  Although the tapered region 941 is provided so that the cutting edge 951 is sharpened in the direction in which the breaking member 910 is removed, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the tapered region 941 may not be provided. However, from the viewpoint of ease of cutting the seal seal 160, the configuration in which the tapered region 941 is provided is superior.

  Although the extended part 914 and the fracture | rupture part 915 were provided, it is not restricted to this, For example, it is good also as a structure which provides either one.

  In addition, although the breaking member 910 is configured to be screw-fixed, the configuration is not limited thereto, and a configuration in which the screw is not fixed may be employed. Even in this case, the breaking member 910 is attached to the front side sticking plate by the restriction structure (the restriction convex portions 921, 922 and the restriction opening portions 923, 924, the protrusions 930, 931 and the protrusion grooves 932, 933). Since it is attached to the portion 301, the breaking member 910 is prevented from moving by mistake. However, from the viewpoint of suppressing fraudulent acts on the breaking member 910, the configuration in which the breaking member 910 is screwed is superior.

  In the present embodiment, the cutting by the breaking protrusion 917 is set to start after the cutting of the sealing seal 160 by the cutting edge 951 is started. The cutting edge 951 may be cut after the cutting is started.

  In addition, with the movement of the breaking member 910 in the removal direction, the restriction of the movement between the arm portions 912 and 913 of the breaking member 910 due to the restriction structure was released in stages. For example, the movement restriction between the arm portions 912 and 913 of the breaking member 910 by the restriction structure may be loosened stepwise as the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction. Specifically, the clearance between the restricting convex portions 921 and 922 and the corresponding inclined surfaces 925 and 926 may be set to gradually increase as the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction. Even in this case, the operation range of the unit operation gradually increases as the breaking member 910 moves in the removal direction.

  The first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 are formed with the directions of inclination reversed. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the first inclined portion 952 and the second inclined portion 953 may be configured to have the same inclination direction. In this case, it is preferable to provide a third inclined portion that is continuous with the end portion on the center side of the first inclined portion 952 and the end portion on the center side of the second inclined portion 953. Even if it is the said structure, while being able to form the front-end | tip part sharpened toward the removal direction of the member 910 for destruction, the member 910 for destruction can be made compact. In short, it is only necessary that the cutting edge 951 be provided with a plurality of inclined portions that come into contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state. However, the configuration in which the inclination angle or the inclination direction is different can cut the seal seal 160 more suitably, and the breaking member 910 can be downsized.

  Further, as shown in the following fifth or sixth embodiment, the breaking member 910 is attached to the sticking base 293 in a rotatable state, and the sealing seal 160 is cut by rotating the breaking member 910. It is good also as composition to do. In this case, the cutting edge 951 may be formed in parallel to the seal seal 160 attached to the side surface region 296. Even in such a configuration, when the breaking member 910 is rotated, the cutting edge 951 is in contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state, and the sealing seal 160 is gradually cut with the rotation. Is called. That is, when the breaking member 910 rotates, the portion formed in parallel in the cutting edge 951 functions as an inclined portion.

  Further, in such a configuration, an inclined portion inclined so as to approach the seal seal 160 may be provided on a part of the cutting edge 951. As a result, the contact range between the cutting edge 951 and the seal seal 160 can be further reduced, so that the seal seal 160 can be more suitably cut.

  When the breaking member 910 is moved in the removal direction, a portion corresponding to a portion extending in the front and back direction of the pasting base 293 in the peripheral portion of the expansion region 908 may not be cut by the expansion portion 914. Even in this case, the extended portion 914 comes into contact with the portion around the boundary 909, and the portion of the contact portion is deformed so that the boundary 909 is pushed and spread. Thereby, a trace location becomes conspicuous and the fact that the seal seal 160 is broken can be easily confirmed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, the configurations of the following different modes may be applied individually to the configurations of the above embodiments, or may be applied in combination with each other. Moreover, you may apply the structure of the following other forms with respect to embodiment different from embodiment illustrated as application object.

  (1) In the first embodiment, the cover member 93 is provided as the limiting means. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, a plate-like member is more than a predetermined distance from the IC tag 163. The ID information may be read by placing the reader device in contact with or approaching the plate-like member from the side opposite to the IC tag 163 side. In addition, a frame-like or net-like member is provided instead of a box-like shape, and a reader device is attached to a part of the member located at a position that is a predetermined distance away from the IC tag 163 from the side opposite to the IC tag 163 side. You may make it read ID information by contact | abutting or adjoining.

  In addition, the main cover 92 is covered from the back of the pachinko machine 10 by the protective cover portion 75 of the back pack unit 15, and at least a predetermined distance from the back surface of the protective cover portion 75 with respect to the IC tag 163. The ID information may be read by bringing the reader device into contact with or close to the back surface of the protective cover portion 75. In this case, the back pack unit 15 serves as a limiting means.

  (2) In the first embodiment, the section screen 197 of the cover member 93 is not limited to the configuration facing the back of the pachinko machine 10. For example, the main controller 92 is connected to the game board 33. It is good also as a structure which the section screen 197 faces the rotation front end side or rotation base end side of the game machine main body 12 by standing and installing. In this case, by making the ward screen 197 face the rotating front end side of the gaming machine main body 12, the work of bringing the reader device closer to the ward screen 197 can be easily performed.

  (3) In the first embodiment, the cover member 93 may be fixed to the substrate box 102 so that a predetermined part needs to be broken during separation. In this case, in the cover member 93, even if the front side fixed base portion 131 and the back side fixed base portion 132 are illegally separated, the effect of making it difficult to do so is enhanced.

  (4) In the first embodiment, when the ID information is read from the IC tag 163 from a specific direction, the reading position is limited to be a predetermined distance or more from the IC tag 163. If the IC tag 163 is attached to the seal seal 160, the configuration in which the IC tag 163 is attached to the seal seal 160 is not essential. It is good also as a structure fixed to the board | substrate box 102 by the above.

  (5) In the first embodiment, the boundary 136 between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 may have at least a region that is V-shaped or U-shaped. Further, it may be formed in an L shape, or may be formed so that a bent portion has a curved shape. Furthermore, the entire boundary 136 may be formed to be curved, or may be formed to have a continuous mountain shape in the extending direction of the boundary 136.

  (6) In the first embodiment, the seal seal 160 may be arranged so that the region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 does not straddle the boundary 136. However, in this case, at least the slit 173 is interposed between the second line 146 and the fourth line 148 so that the region where the slit 173 is formed is peeled off when the seal seal 160 is peeled off so as to expose the boundary 136. The seal seal 160 is arranged so that a part thereof is included, or at least a part of the slit 173 is included on the surface region 133 side with respect to the first line 145 and on the back surface region 134 side with respect to the third line 147. A seal seal 160 may be disposed.

  Further, in this configuration, the sealing seal 160 may be disposed so that the antenna cut 176 extending toward the slit 173 extends over the boundary 136, and the antenna cut 176 on one long side side of the antenna member 172 and the other The seal seal 160 may be arranged so that the boundary 136 is sandwiched between the antenna cuts 176 on the long side portion. In these cases, even if the seal seal 160 is peeled off from any of the opposing ends of the seal seal 160 across the boundary 136, the slit 173 through the antenna cut 176 is expected to be destroyed.

  (7) In the first embodiment, the seal seal 160 may be disposed so that the antenna member 172 does not straddle the boundary 136. However, in this case, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off so as to expose the boundary 136, a part of the antenna member 172 and a region where the slit 173 is formed in the antenna member 172 are also peeled off. The seal seal 160 is disposed so that a part of the antenna member 172 and the slit 173 is included between the four lines 148, or the back surface region is located on the surface region 133 side from the first line 145 and from the third line 147. The seal seal 160 may be disposed so that at least a part of the antenna member 172 and the slit 173 is included on the 134 side.

  (8) In the first embodiment, the boundary 136 between the front-side fixed base portion 131 and the back-side fixed base portion 132 is limited to a configuration in which only the side region 135 is formed in the pasting region. Alternatively, it may be configured only on the front surface region 133 or may be configured only on the back surface region 134. Further, the boundary 136 may be formed over both the front surface region 133 and the side surface region 135, and the boundary 136 may be formed over both the back surface region 134 and the side surface region 135. Furthermore, the boundary 136 may be formed over all of the front surface region 133, the side surface region 135, and the back surface region 134. In any of the configurations described above, it is preferable that a bent portion is generated at the boundary 136 on any surface.

  (9) In each of the above embodiments, the pasting region is not limited to the configuration consisting of three surfaces that are continuous through the corner portion, but is through two surfaces or corner portions that are continuous through the corner portion. It is good also as a structure which consists of four continuous surfaces. That is, in the configuration in which the pasting area is composed of a plurality of surfaces that are continuous via the corner portion, the specific number of surfaces is arbitrary. As described above, according to the configuration in which the sticking region is formed of a plurality of surfaces that are continuous through the corner portion, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off from the sticking region, a large stress may be applied to the sealing seal 160 at the corner portion. As expected, the seal seal 160 is easily broken and the antenna member 172 is easily cut.

  Further, the pasting region is not limited to a configuration composed of a plurality of surfaces that are continuous via the corner portion, and may be configured as a single surface.

  (10) The long antenna member 172 is not limited to the configuration in which the long antenna member 172 is linearly arranged with respect to the base sheet 161, and may be configured in a substantially linear shape or a curved shape. Moreover, you may arrange | position so that it may have a single or several bending part in the middle position of the length direction.

  (11) The easily breakable portion that makes the slit 173 easily broken when the seal seal 160 is peeled off is not limited to the slit shape like the antenna notch 176, but is a broken line shape that extends intermittently. It may be. Moreover, an opening part may be sufficient and the thin film part formed thinner than the surrounding area | region may be sufficient. Furthermore, a recess that is recessed from the end of the antenna member 172 toward the slit 173 may be used. Thus, in the structure which forms an easily breakable part as a recessed part, the said easily breakable part will be formed in the antenna member 172 instead of the base sheet 161. In this case, as the easily breakable portion, the easily breakable portion exemplified above may also be formed on the base sheet 161 in addition to the recess. With such a configuration, the slit 173 is easily broken when the seal seal 160 is peeled off.

  (12) In the first embodiment, the antenna notch 176 is formed on the base sheet 161 and is not formed on the antenna member 172. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The member 172 may also be formed with a cut continuous with the antenna cut 176 of the base sheet 161. However, it is necessary to form the cut in a range where the antenna member 172 is not cut and a range where the slit 173 is not reached.

  (13) A loop antenna member may be used instead of the long antenna member 172. In this case, when the loop portion is cut, it is configured so that communication is impossible or difficult to communicate, and the loop portion is assumed to correspond to the slit 173 in each of the above embodiments, and the positional relationship with the boundaries 136 and 297 And the positional relationship with the antenna notch 176 may be set. For example, by forming an easily breakable portion that extends toward the loop portion, when the seal seal 160 is peeled off, the loop portion is expected to be cut. In addition, when the seal seal 160 is arranged so that the loop portion straddles the boundaries 136 and 297, when the seal seal 160 is cut to expose the boundaries 136 and 297, or when the seal seal 160 is peeled off Cutting the loop is expected.

  The disabled state generation unit is not limited to the slit 173 or the loop unit of each of the above embodiments, and if the IC tag 163 cannot communicate or becomes difficult to communicate due to its own destruction, it is specifically The configuration is arbitrary. However, in the configuration in which the unusable state generating portion is formed by the slit 173 and the loop portion, the unusable state generating portion can be provided as a simple structure.

  (14) In the configuration in which the substrate box 102 is formed of a box body in which an opening is formed in one wall portion and a plate-like lid body covering the opening portion, a peripheral edge portion and a lid body of the opening portion The seal seal 160 may be affixed so as to cover a part of the boundary, and the seal seal 160 may be affixed so as to cover all of the boundary.

  (15) In the first embodiment, the front side fixed base portion 131 may be formed with the protruding wall portion 144 and the back side fixed base portion 132 may be formed with the recessed region 142. Further, the configuration related to the fixing of the fixed base portions 131 and 132 in the recessed region 142 and the protruding wall portion 144 is not limited to the configuration using the hooking portion 155, and separation after fixing such as a breaking screw is impossible or impossible. It is good also as a structure using the fixing tool made difficult. Further, the fixing through the through holes 151 and the screw holes 152 of both the fixing base portions 131 and 132 may be performed using normal screws that can be easily released using a tool.

  (16) In a configuration in which a cutting section for opening is defined in the substrate box 102, and the internal space of the substrate box 102 can be opened by cutting the cutting section, it straddles at least a part of the cutting section. In this manner, the seal seal 160 may be attached. In the configuration in which the seal seal 160 is pasted so as to cover the cut portion, an act of cutting the seal seal 160 together to cut the cut portion and an act of peeling the seal seal 160 to expose the cut portion are assumed. Is done. On the other hand, the cut portion may be formed so that a bent portion is generated in an area covered by the seal seal 160 in the cut portion, and the bent portion is the same as the shape of the boundary 136 in each of the above embodiments. It may be a thing. Furthermore, the positional relationship between the cut portion and the antenna member 172 or the positional relationship between the cut portion and the slit 173 is the same as the positional relationship between the boundary 136 and the antenna member 172 or the position between the boundary 136 and the slit 173 in each of the above embodiments. It may be set like a relationship. As a result, it is possible to suitably manage whether or not the cutting portion has been illegally cut using the seal seal 160.

  In addition, as the cut portion, a configuration in which a through portion that penetrates the wall portion of the substrate box 102 inward and outward is formed in an annular shape so as to have a perforation shape, and is thinner than the surrounding region. A configuration in which the formed thin portion is formed in an annular shape is also conceivable.

  (17) The sticking target of the seal seal 160 is not limited to the main control device 92, and may be another control device such as the payout control device 82. Moreover, it is good also as a structure by which the seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 was affixed with respect to the some control apparatus. Furthermore, the seal seal 160 may be affixed to a device other than the control device such as the dispensing device 78, or the seal seal 160 may be affixed across the boundary between the control device and the mounting base. In any of these configurations, it is preferable to apply the positional relationship between the boundary 136 and the antenna member 172 and the positional relationship between the boundary 136 and the slit 173 in the first to fifth embodiments. It is preferable to apply a configuration in which the reading position is limited to a predetermined distance or more. Further, as described in the sixth to tenth embodiments, a pre-operation is required prior to a specific operation for any one of the monitoring targets, and a trace unit such as a seal seal 160 is used for the pre-operation. It is preferable to apply the configuration of the means for pre-operation so as to be destroyed.

  (18) When ID information is read from the IC tag 163 from a specific direction, the illegal position can be found well by limiting the reading position to be a predetermined distance or more from the IC tag 163. When paying attention to the feature, focusing on the feature that the fraud detection effect through the seal seal 160 is enhanced because the boundary 136 is formed to have a bent portion, or a means for prior operation is provided. Therefore, it is not indispensable that the antenna member 172 is formed with the unusable state generating portion, and the base sheet 161 can be easily formed. It is not essential that the destruction part is formed.

  (19) When attention is paid to the feature that an illegal act can be found well by the antenna member 172 having the slit 173 as the incapable state generating portion and the antenna cut 176 formed in the slit 173 In addition, when focusing on the feature that the fraud detection effect through the seal seal 160 is enhanced by forming the boundary 136 to have a bent portion, the ID information is read from the IC tag 163 from a specific direction. When performing, the structure which restrict | limits a reading position to become more than predetermined distance from IC tag 163 is not essential.

  (20) In each of the above embodiments, the IC tag 163 is configured to transmit identification information as a response wave by receiving a ringing wave from the reader device. Instead, a radio wave including identification information is transmitted. It is good also as an IC tag transmitted constantly.

  (21) It is not limited to the configuration in which the substrate box 102 is formed by combining the two components 111 and 112, and the substrate box 102 is formed by combining three or more components. Also good. In addition, the antenna member 172 is not limited to the configuration in which the sealing seal 160 is disposed obliquely, and may be configured in a direction other than the oblique direction. Further, the base sheet 161 of the seal seal 160 is not limited to a rectangular shape, and may be a square shape, another polygonal shape, or a circular shape.

  (22) As described in the sixth to fifteenth embodiments, the pre-operation means is the cover members 331, 371, 401, 511, 611, 711, 821, 961 (hereinafter simply referred to as the cover member 331 or the like). The seal seal 160 is not limited to a configuration in which a predetermined part (for example, the breaking member 311) abuts the seal seal 160 in accordance with the displacement of the seal seal 160. For example, A part of the seal seal 160 may be bonded, fixed, or locked to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 331 or the like in a state covered with the cover member 331 or the like. In this case, the seal seal 160 is pulled by the cover member 331 or the like with the displacement of the cover member 331 or the like, and the seal seal 160 is broken. Further, it is expected that the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 is cut with the destruction of the seal seal 160. Further, instead of the seal seal 160, the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 may be bonded, fixed, or locked to the inner peripheral surface of the cover member 331 or the like.

  (23) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments, instead of the cover member 331 and the like covering the whole seal seal 160, the whole seal seal 160 is not covered but adjacent to or partially opposed It is good also as a structure which provides the member which restricts complete peeling from the sticking area | region 294 of the said seal | sticker seal | sticker 160 by arrange | positioning. In this case, the seal seal 160 or the IC tag 163 may be destroyed as the member is displaced from a position where the peeling is restricted to a position where the restriction is released.

  (24) In the sixth to thirteenth and fifteenth embodiments, trace means such as the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 may be installed at a position where separation is not required when opening the internal space of the substrate boxes 282 and 361. Good. However, a member that needs to be separated when opening the substrate boxes 282 and 361, such as the cover member 331, is provided, and trace means such as the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 are destroyed when the members are separated. preferable.

  (25) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments, at least part of the cover member 331 or the pasting bases 293 and 362 is required to be broken when the cover member 331 or the like is separated from the pasting bases 293 and 362. In addition, the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 may be destroyed when a part of the seal is broken. In this case, the seal seal 160 and the IC tag 163 are destroyed when a preliminary operation of destroying the part is performed.

  (26) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments, the seal means 160 that has the IC tag 163 is the trace means that is destroyed when a preliminary operation such as the separation operation of the cover member 331 or the like is performed. It is not limited to this, and the seal sticker 160 that does not have the IC tag 163 may be used, or the IC tag 163 in a state where the seal sticker 160 is not provided. Further, the seal is not limited to the seal sticker 160 or the IC tag 163 as long as a trace can be left.

  (27) In the sixth embodiment, the connection between the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 is not limited to a configuration in which the claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 are locked. The cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 may be connected using a screw or the like, or may be connected using an adhesive or a binding band. Further, the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 may be integrally formed. However, in the configuration in which the breaker member 311 is accommodated in the sticking base 293 and the cover member 331 is provided so as to cover the sealing seal 160, the above-described members 311 and 331 can be easily installed. It is preferable that both members 311 and 331 are connected by locking as in the sixth embodiment.

  In addition, it is good also as a structure connected similarly using a screw etc. about the structure regarding the connection of the cover members 511 and 611 and the members for destruction 501 and 601 in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments. In this case, it is necessary to perform a separate connection work. On the other hand, in the eleventh and twelfth embodiments, the cover members 511 and 611 are connected to each other as they are attached to the board box 282, so that deterioration in workability is suppressed. Can do.

  (28) In the seventh embodiment, instead of the protective wall portions 351 and 352 that make it difficult to access the connection portion between the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331, the connection is made so that the access is impossible. It is good also as a structure which provides the protective cover which covers the circumference | surroundings of a location so that a clearance gap may not arise.

  (29) In the sixth and eleventh to fifteenth embodiments, instead of the detachable screw 319 as a coupling for connecting the front side fixed base portion 291 and the back side fixed base portion 292, a break screw or a one-way A screw may be used.

  (30) In each of the above embodiments, a transparent sheet may be attached to the surface side of the seal seal 160 so as to cover the seal seal 160. In this case, the sealing seal 160 can be protected by the transparent sheet. However, in the sixth to twelfth and fifteenth embodiments, it is preferable that the strength of the transparent sheet is set so that the seal seal 160 may be broken when the cover member 331 and the like are separated.

  (31) In the sixth and eleventh to fifteenth embodiments, the regulating means for regulating the separation direction when separating the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 so as to open the internal space of the substrate box 282. Is not limited to a configuration that restricts the movement in two stages, that is, the sliding movement along the mating surfaces of the two structural bodies 283 and 284 and the movement in the thickness direction of the substrate box 282. It is good also as a structure restrict | limited to the movement in only one or three steps or more. Even in this case, in order to require the separation operation of the cover member 331 as a preliminary operation with respect to the opening operation of the internal space of the substrate box 282, if the separation operation of the cover member 331 is not performed, the above restriction is imposed. It is preferable that the two components 283 and 284 are not separated according to the regulations of the means.

  (32) In the sixth and eleventh to fifteenth embodiments, the breaking members 311, 501, 601, 801, and 910 (hereinafter also simply referred to as a breaking member 311) may be made of metal. However, when the breaking member 311 or the like is made of metal, it is necessary to affix the seal seal 160 to the sticking base 293 so that the breaking member 311 or the like and the antenna member 172 of the IC tag 163 do not contact each other. There is. Specifically, a configuration in which the destruction member 311 and the antenna member 172 are separated from each other or a resin-made interposition member is provided between the destruction member 311 and the antenna member 172 is conceivable as the configuration. .

  For example, when the antenna member 172 contacts the metal breaking member 311 or the like, the set operating frequency (for example, 2.45 GHz) changes, and communication through the antenna member 172 may not be performed satisfactorily. . In this case, there is a possibility that the ID information stored in the IC chip 171 may not be read even if it is read by the reader device. However, as described above, the antenna member 172 and the metal breaking member 311 and the like are not in contact with each other. By doing so, the occurrence of the inconvenience is suppressed.

  (33) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the destruction member 311 and the like are configured to be screwed. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the destruction member 311 etc. are fixed to either the front side fixed base part 291 or the back side fixed base part 292 by using a different tool from the screw 319 used for connecting the front side fixed base part 291 and the back side fixed base part 292. It is good. In this case, when assembling the main control device 281, the timing at which the breaking member 311 and the like are fixed is arbitrary, but for example, the breaking member 311 before the timing at which the front side structure 283 and the back side structure 284 are combined. It is good also as a structure by which fixation etc. are performed. Even in the above configuration, when the cover member 331 or the like is separated, it is preferable that the breaking member 311 or the like is separated following the separation, and in order to realize the configuration, the cover member 331 or the like is installed. In this state, it is preferable that the screws for fixing the breaking member 311 and the like can be released.

  Further, the fixing of the breaking member 311 or the like is not limited to the configuration performed by screws, and for example, the breaking member 311 or the like may be broken by a locking portion formed on at least one of the front side fixed base portion 291 or the back side fixed base portion 292 The member 311 and the like may be locked. Even in this configuration, in the sixth to twelfth embodiments, when the cover member 331 or the like is separated, it is preferable that the breaking member 311 or the like is separated following the cover member 331 or the like. In order to realize, it is preferable that the cover member 331 is moved in the separating direction with a predetermined force or more to release the locking state of the breaking member 311 with respect to the locking portion.

  Furthermore, it is good also as a structure which does not perform screw fixation of the member 311 for destruction to the sticking base 293, etc. In this case, in the sixth, seventh, ninth, tenth, or thirteenth embodiment, the cover member 331 is attached so that the arm portions 313, 314 and the like and the inner wall surface of the cover member 331 come into contact with each other. Good. Thereby, the rattling of the member 311 for destruction which may arise in the situation where screw fixation is not performed can be suppressed.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, even if the breaking member 801 is not fixed with screws, the breaking member 801 is attached to the sticking base 293 in a state that is difficult to remove. Unauthorized destruction or removal of the member 801 can be suppressed.

  (34) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the region across the boundary 297 in the antenna member 172 is limited to the region where the first slit portion 174 is formed. In other words, it may be a region where the second slit portion 175 is formed or a region where the IC chip 171 is mounted. Even in this case, when the sealing seal 160 and the antenna member 172 are cut by the breaking member 311, it is expected that the IC tag 163 cannot perform normal communication.

  Further, the antenna member 172 may be configured such that a region where the slit portions 174 and 175 are not formed and a region where the IC chip 171 is not mounted straddles the boundary 297. Even in this case, when the seal seal 160 and the antenna member 172 are cut by the breaking member 311 or the like, it is expected that the communicable range in the IC tag 163 is narrower than the regular one. However, in order to detect the unauthorized opening of the substrate box 282 with certainty, it is preferable that the region where the slits 173 and 174 are formed as described above and the region where the IC chip 171 is mounted straddle the boundary 297. .

  (35) In the sixth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, and the like, the claw portions 336 and 337 of the cover member 331 are the breaking members in a state where the cover member 331 is attached to the sticking base 293. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the claw portions 336 and 337 are locked to the receiving portions 338 and 339 in the mounted state. There may be no configuration. However, in order to displace the breaking member 311 integrally when the cover member 331 is separated, at least a part of the cover member 331 and the breaking member 311 are separated before the cover member 331 is separated from the sticking base 293. It is preferable to have a structure that begins to displace in a unitary manner, for example, when a part thereof abuts.

  More preferably, the sealing member 160 or the IC tag 163 is broken by the breaking member 311 within a range in which the separation operation of the front side structural body 283 and the back side structural body 284 is blocked by the cover member 331. The timing at which the integral displacement of the member 311 and the cover member 331 is started may be set. Further, the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 are disposed so that the breaking member 311 breaks the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag 163 within a range where the separation operation of the sealing seal 160 and the IC tag 163 is blocked by the cover member 331. It is preferable that a timing at which an integral displacement with the start is set.

  The same applies to the eleventh, twelfth and fifteenth embodiments.

  (36) In the sixth embodiment, the ninth embodiment, and the like, the claw portions 336 and 337 formed on the cover member 331 are elastically deformed when the cover member 331 is attached to the sticking base 293. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the breaking member 311 side is elastically deformed toward the inside of the sticking base 293. Thus, the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 may be integrated. In this case, even if the integrated part of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 is exposed as in the sixth embodiment, it is not on the cover member 331 located on the exposed side but on the non-exposed side. Since the destruction member 311 that is positioned is configured to elastically deform, it is difficult to release the integration of the two.

  In addition, for the configuration in which the protective wall portions 351 and 352 are formed as in the seventh embodiment and the configuration in which the housing portion 394 is formed as in the ninth embodiment, By applying the configuration in which the breaking member 311 side is elastically deformed as described above, the elastic deformation formed between the protective means such as the protective wall portions 351 and 352 and the accommodating portion 394 and the integrated portion is allowed. It is possible to narrow or eliminate the gap. This makes it difficult to access the integrated part.

  (37) A part of the peripheral surface of the housing space defined by the housing portion 394 in the ninth embodiment may be configured by the coupling structure 391. In this case, the accommodation space can be formed using the coupling structure 391. Further, in the substrate box 282 in the seventh embodiment, a coupling structure 391 is provided so as to sandwich the sticking base 293 therebetween, and the coupling structure 391 is brought close to an integrated part of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331. It is good also as a structure which the coupling structure 391 fulfill | performs the function as the protective wall part 351,352 by providing in a position.

  (38) In the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 311 is not limited to a configuration in which the breaking member 311 moves from the inside to the outside of the sticking base 293 through the boundary 297 between the both fixing base portions 291 and 292. It is good also as a structure which moves to the outer side of the sticking base 293 through the opening part formed so that it might cross | intersect with the boundary 297 of the parts 291 and 292. In this case, it is possible to form the overlapping portion of the two fixed base portions 291 and 292 without considering the movement of the breaking member 311.

  The same applies to the eleventh to fifteenth embodiments.

  (39) In each of the above embodiments, the present invention is applied to the pachinko machine 10 provided with the upper plate 57a and the lower plate 58a as the outer storage unit. Instead, a single outer storage unit is provided. The present invention may be applied to a pachinko machine. Further, by providing the power failure monitoring device separately from the main control device 92, the main control board 101 may be configured to have only the function of the main control circuit 202.

  (40) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the cover member 331 and the like are attached to the substrate box 282. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure which does not have the cover member 331 grade | etc.,. Even in this case, the seal seal 160 can be cut along the boundaries 297 and 909 by sliding or rotating the breaking member 311 and the like. However, it is preferable that the cover member 331 or the like is provided from the viewpoint of protecting the seal seal 160 and the breaking member 311 or the like.

  (41) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the breaking member 311 and the like are arranged inside the sticking base 293. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is good also as a structure arrange | positioned on the outer side of the sticking base 293. However, in this case, it is easier to remove or destroy the breaking member 311 or the like without cutting the seal seal 160 as compared with the configuration in which the breaking member 311 or the like is disposed inside the sticking base 293. Therefore, the above embodiments are superior from the viewpoint of fraud suppression.

  (42) According to the sixth to fourteenth embodiments, the boundary 297 is formed in a straight line. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the boundary 297 is formed so that a bent portion is generated. Also good. In this case, the breaking member 311 and the like may be formed so as to correspond to the bent portion so as to pass through the boundary 297. Thereby, since a cutting area becomes large compared with the case of a straight line, it can be confirmed that the opening operation has been performed more suitably.

  (43) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the breaking member 311 for cutting the seal seal 160 is provided. However, the present invention is not limited to this. By providing an easy-cutting portion that is intermittently formed in an annular shape so that the through-hole that penetrates the front-side structure 283 that forms the box 282 into a perforation is formed, and cutting along the easy-cutting portion, In a configuration in which the portion formed by the easy-cut portion is removed and the internal space of the substrate box 282 is opened, a breaking member that cuts the easy-cut portion by applying an external force may be provided.

  (44) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments, the cover member 331 and the like limit the opening operation of the substrate box 282 and cover the sealing seal 160. However, the present invention is not limited to this. It may have one of these functions.

  (45) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the sealing seal 160 is more than the other part so that the breaking member 311 and the like can easily cut the sealing seal 160. It is good also as a structure which provides the easy cut part formed easily. Thereby, the sealing seal | sticker 160 can be cut | disconnected more suitably.

  (46) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the breaking member 311 and the like are formed between the opposing plate portions 302, 303, 306, and 307. When the breaking member 311 or the like slides or rotates, the entire portion of the seal seal 160 that straddles the boundaries 297 and 909 is cut. However, the present invention is not limited to this. What is necessary is just to be comprised so that a part may be cut | disconnected. In this case, the seal seal 160 is cut from the cut portion in accordance with the opening operation. In other words, the force that hinders the opening operation by the seal seal 160 is weakened by the formation of the cut portion. As a result, the opening operation can be performed. However, from the viewpoint of workability when performing the opening operation, a configuration in which the entire portion where the breaking member 311 and the like straddle the boundaries 297 and 909 are formed is preferable.

  (47) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), the cover to the substrate box 282 is covered by sliding between the surrounding portions 321 and 950 and the inner wall surface of the cover member 331 or the like. The attachment direction of the member 331 or the like is defined in one direction, but is not limited to this. For example, after the guidance in a predetermined direction, the attachment direction is defined in two stages so that the direction is different from the predetermined direction. May be. In short, it suffices if the attachment path of the cover member 331 or the like to the board box 282 is defined.

  (48) In the sixth to fifteenth embodiments (excluding the eighth embodiment), boundaries 297 and 909 between the front-side fixed base portion 291 and the back-side fixed base portion 292 are included in the pasting region 294. The present invention is not limited to the configuration formed only on the side region 296, and may be configured only on the front surface region 295, or may be configured only on the back surface region opposite to the front surface region 295. Also good. Further, the boundaries 297 and 909 may be formed over both the front surface region 295 and the side surface region 296, and the boundaries 297 and 909 may be formed over both the back surface region and the side surface region 296. . Furthermore, boundaries 297 and 909 may be formed over all of the front surface region 295, the side surface region 296, and the back surface region. In any of the configurations described above, the seal seal 160 is pasted across the boundaries 297 and 909, and the breaking member 311 and the like are displaced from the inside to the outside of the pasting base 293 via the boundaries 297 and 909. If possible.

  (49) In the fourteenth embodiment, the cover member 821 is attached to the substrate box 282 by engaging with the breaking member 801. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the substrate box 282 is separately provided. It is good also as a structure engaged with. Accordingly, after the breaking member 801 is rotated, it is necessary to separately release the engagement with the substrate box 282. Therefore, since the separation operation of the cover member 821 becomes complicated, an unauthorized separation operation can be suppressed.

  In this case, the cover member 821 can be attached to the substrate box 282 from which the breaking member 801 is separated. Thereby, the versatility of the cover member 821 can be improved.

  (50) In the fourteenth embodiment, the first engagement and the second engagement are generated between the breaking member 801 and the cover member 821, but the present invention is not limited to this. Either one is fine. In short, it is only necessary that the engagement is released or the engagement is loosened as the breaking member 801 rotates.

  (51) In the fourteenth embodiment, the shaft portion 811 is provided on the front-side structure 283. However, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the shaft portion 811 may be provided on the back-side structure 284. In this case, in a situation where the breaking member 801 is attached to the substrate box 282, the sliding movement as the opening operation in both the structural bodies 283 and 284 is restricted by the breaking member 801. Thereby, since it becomes necessary to perform the separation of the breaking member 801 as a stage before the opening operation, the opening operation can be complicated. Therefore, an unauthorized opening operation can be suppressed. However, if attention is paid to the ease of the opening operation, the configuration in which the shaft portion 811 is attached to the front structure 283 is superior.

  (52) In the fourteenth embodiment, the second arm portion opening 833 may be opened toward the coupling structure 391 disposed near the second arm portion opening 833. As a result, the cover member 821 can be easily removed from the breaking member 801. However, in this case, since the engaging portion of the second arm portion 804 and the first hook portion 841 is exposed, the engaging portion is easily released illegally. For this reason, if it pays attention to the point which can perform unauthorized cancellation | release of an engagement location, the said 14th Embodiment is more excellent.

  Further, in the side wall portion 831, a protruding portion opening may be newly provided at a position facing the second arm portion 804 in a state where the breaking member 801 is rotated. Accordingly, the cover member 821 can be detached from the breaking member 801 by sliding the cover member 821 in the removing direction with respect to the sticking base 293, and thus the cover member 821 can be easily removed. However, in view of the simplification of the configuration of the cover member 821 and the fact that an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig through the opening can be performed, the 14th embodiment is superior.

  (53) In the fourteenth embodiment, the breaking member 801 is pivotally supported in a state of being rotatable with respect to the sticking base 293. However, the invention is not limited to this. For example, the breaking member 801 is slidable with respect to the sticking base 293. The seal seal 160 may be cut by sliding movement. In this case, it is preferable that the cover member 821 has an opening so that the breaking member 801 can slide in a state where the cover member 821 is attached. However, focusing on the point that the seal seal 160 can be easily cut, the configuration in which the breaking member 801 is pivotally supported in a rotatable state is superior.

  (54) In each of the above-described embodiments, the trace means that releases the inhibition of the opening operation and becomes a trace state by being destroyed is not limited to the seal seal 160 having the IC tag 163, and the IC The seal seal 160 which does not have the tag 163 may be sufficient, and the IC tag 163 in the state where the seal seal 160 is not provided may be sufficient. Further, the seal is not limited to the seal sticker 160 or the IC tag 163 as long as a trace can be left.

  (55) In the thirteenth embodiment, the breaking member 311 is difficult to separate from the substrate box 282 unless the front-side structure 283 and the back-side structure 284 are separated. For example, when the breaking member 311 is disposed at a predetermined position in the rotation direction, the configuration may be such that it can be pulled out from the sticking base 293. As a result, the breaking member 311 can be replaced without opening the substrate box 282.

  (56) In the fourteenth embodiment, a part of the surface side wall portion 851 is in contact with the surface region 295. However, the present invention is not limited to this, or in addition to this, the side surface side wall portion 831 includes the side surface region 296. You may form so that it may contact | abut. Specifically, a part of the side wall portion 831 may be recessed toward the sticking base 293 so as to contact the side surface region 296. Thereby, since the seal seal | sticker 160 is pinched | interposed by the sticking base 293 and the cover member 821, the shear force which arises when the member 801 for destruction contact | abuts can be heightened. Therefore, the seal seal 160 can be easily cut.

  (57) In the thirteenth and fourteenth embodiments, the tapered regions 315 and 805 are formed to be inclined. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the tapered regions 315 and 314 may be formed along the direction in which the arm portions 313 and 314 face each other. . Even in this case, when the breaking members 311 and 801 are rotated, the tapered regions 315 and 805 are in contact with the sealing seal 160 in an inclined state, and gradually the sealing seal 160 is gradually rotated with the rotation. Cutting is done.

  (58) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above-described embodiments, such as pachinko machines in which an electric accessory is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters a specific area of a special device, or games in a specific area of a special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a big hit when a ball enters, a pachinko machine equipped with another accessory, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

  In addition, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are started to start rotating a reel.

<Invention Group Extracted from Each Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the characteristics of the invention group extracted from each of the above-described embodiments will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in each of the above embodiments is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.
In addition, the invention described in each feature described below is as follows: “A game machine such as a pachinko machine or a slot machine has a CPU for executing a game control process, a ROM in which a game control program is stored, and various kinds of games generated by the progress of the game. A control board on which various electronic components such as a RAM for temporarily storing data are mounted is mounted, and various gaming devices mounted on the gaming machine are controlled by the CPU in accordance with a control program stored in the ROM. In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU, Many cases of fraudulent activities have been reported, such as replacing a chip) with an illegal one, etc. In order to deal with such fraudulent activities, for example, sealing in a board box When the substrate box is opened, a history of opening due to destruction is left when the substrate box is opened, or it cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the substrate box, and the trace is removed. (For example, see Patent Document 1) These fraud countermeasures are based on the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. In the case of visual confirmation, it assists the confirmation work, and the existence of such fraud countermeasures has the effect of deceiving fraudulent acts. As a countermeasure against fraud, for example, a power supply including an IC chip part and an antenna part in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that houses the control board. (For example, refer to Patent Document 2.) If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of a game hall or the like can read the identification information with a reader device, and the control board can be illegal. This kind of fraud countermeasure using electronic tags can detect fraud based on the result of reading by the reader device, so it is more fraudulent than the visual confirmation of the sealed part. As a specific configuration for detecting the fraud, for example, an electronic part may be cut so that the antenna portion is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened. It is possible to attach a tag.The antenna part is designed to be optimal for the operating frequency, so the internal space of the board box If the antenna unit is disconnected due to unauthorized opening of the antenna, the antenna unit will not function properly and the identification information cannot be read, so that it is expected that the unauthorized opening can be easily detected. The " However, even if the above-mentioned fraud countermeasures to assist visual confirmation and fraud countermeasures using electronic tags are applied, the former assists visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened. If the configuration for doing so is not destroyed, the fraud detection work cannot be performed favorably, and the latter also requires that the identification information read from the electronic tag cannot be satisfactorily performed when the board box is illegally opened. The present invention has been made in view of the circumstances exemplified above, and preferably exhibits the function of a trace means for leaving a trace of fraud. It is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of solving the problem.

Feature A1. An electronic tag (IC tag) comprising a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information 163),
When a part of the predetermined monitoring target (main control device 92) is separated or when the predetermined monitoring target is moved from the installation location, the antenna unit is in the middle of the length direction. The electronic tag is attached so that cutting can occur,
Further, in a reading operation using a reader device that reads the identification information by receiving the radio wave, a reading position when reading the identification information by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag Is provided with a restricting means (cover member 93) for restricting the position of the electronic tag to be at a position more than a predetermined distance from the electronic tag.

  According to the feature A1, since the monitoring target is provided with the electronic tag, the manager of the game hall or the like can check whether the normal identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed.

  In this configuration, when a part of the monitoring target is separated or when the monitoring target is moved from the place where the monitoring target is installed, the antenna unit may be cut off at a midpoint in the length direction. In this case, the communication of the electronic tag becomes impossible, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact. .

  In addition, when the antenna portion is cut at an intermediate position in the length direction, communication is possible with the electronic tag, but it is assumed that the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, if the reading operation by the reader device is performed outside the communicable distance after the shortening, the fact of the fraudulent act can be recognized through the reading operation, but the reading operation is performed within the communicable distance after the shortening. If this happens, the fact of fraud cannot be recognized through the reading work.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, the limiting unit is provided, and the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag is determined in advance with respect to the electronic tag. It is limited to be at a position that is more than the specified distance. As a result, if the game hall manager or the like decides to perform the reading operation with the reader device from a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag, if the antenna section is cut and the communicable distance becomes short, By grasping the fact that the identification information cannot be read by the reader device, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target.

Feature A2. An electronic tag (IC tag) comprising a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information 163),
The electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side, thereby forming a seal member (sealing seal 160), The seal member is affixed to a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 92),
The seal member is formed so that when the seal member is peeled off from the sticking region, the antenna portion is broken along with the stress, and the antenna portion can be cut at a midpoint in the length direction. ,
Further, in a reading operation using a reader device that reads the identification information by receiving the radio wave, a reading position when reading the identification information by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag Is provided with a restricting means (cover member 93) for restricting the position of the electronic tag to be at a position more than a predetermined distance from the electronic tag.

  According to the feature A2, since the monitoring target is provided with the electronic tag, the manager of the game hall or the like can confirm whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed.

  In this configuration, when a part of the monitoring target is separated or moved from the installation location of the monitoring target, when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting area, the antenna unit has a length direction. Cutting may occur at an intermediate position. In this case, the communication of the electronic tag becomes impossible, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact. .

  In addition, when the antenna portion is cut at an intermediate position in the length direction, communication is possible with the electronic tag, but it is assumed that the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, if the reading operation by the reader device is performed outside the communicable distance after the shortening, the fact of the fraudulent act can be recognized through the reading operation, but the reading operation is performed within the communicable distance after the shortening. If this happens, the fact of fraud cannot be recognized through the reading work.

  On the other hand, according to this configuration, the limiting unit is provided, and the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag is determined in advance with respect to the electronic tag. It is limited to be at a position that is more than the specified distance. As a result, if the game hall manager or the like decides to perform the reading operation with the reader device from a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag, if the antenna section is cut and the communicable distance becomes short, By grasping the fact that the identification information cannot be read by the reader device, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target.

  Feature A3. The restricting unit is disposed at a position away from the electronic tag in the specific direction by a predetermined distance or more, and is a separation wall portion (a first separation wall portion 194, a second separation wall portion formed to be able to transmit the radio wave). The gaming machine according to Feature A1 or A2, which includes a separation wall portion 195).

  According to the feature A3, the excellent effect of the feature A1 or A2 can be obtained with a relatively simple configuration in which the separation wall portion is provided. In addition, by performing a reading operation with the reader device in contact with or close to the separation wall portion, a reading position when reading with the reader device from a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag is determined in advance with respect to the electronic tag. The position is more than the distance. Therefore, the excellent effect of the feature A1 or A2 can be achieved while improving the workability of the reading work.

  Feature A4. The limiting means is a cover member that is attached to the monitoring target, forms a storage area for the electronic tag with the monitoring target, and has the separation wall portion. The gaming machine described in 1.

  According to the feature A4, the excellent effect of the feature A1 or A2 can be obtained by a relatively simple configuration in which the cover member is provided. Further, according to this configuration, the function of protecting the electronic tag from the outside is achieved in the cover member, and the multifunction of the limiting means is achieved.

Feature A5. The cover member is attached to the monitoring target via attachment parts (claw part 192, receiving part 193),
The attachment part is formed so as to make it difficult to remove the cover member, to make it difficult to remove, or to destroy the attachment part or the cover member at the time of removal. A gaming machine according to Feature A4.

  According to the feature A5, the function of making it difficult for the cover member to cheat the electronic tag is performed. Thereby, multifunctionalization of a cover member is achieved.

  Feature A6. The area where the electronic tag is provided in the monitoring target is arranged so as to be aligned with other gaming machine components (audio lamp control device 66, payout control device 82), and the other gaming machine components. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the specific direction is set as at least a part of the unaligned directions.

  According to the feature A6, in the configuration in which the other gaming machine components are arranged in parallel to the other gaming machine components, it is difficult to perform the reading operation by the reader device from the other gaming machine components. The specific direction is set as a direction that is not aligned with other gaming machine components. In other words, since the specific direction is set as a position where it is easy for the game hall manager or the like to perform the reading work, the gaming hall manager or the like may read the electronic tag from a direction other than the specific direction. Is reduced.

Feature A7. The area where the electronic tag is provided in the monitoring target is arranged so as to be aligned with other gaming machine components, and the direction that is not aligned with the other gaming machine components is the specific direction. At least a first direction and a second direction that is different from the first direction,
As the separation wall portion, a first separation wall portion (first separation wall portion 194) disposed at a position separated from the electronic tag by the predetermined distance or more in the first direction so as to transmit the radio wave. ), And a second separation wall portion (second separation wall portion 195) which is disposed at a position away from the electronic tag in the second direction by a predetermined distance or more and is capable of transmitting the radio wave. The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A6, comprising:

  According to the feature A7, the first separation wall portion and the second separation wall portion are provided so as to correspond to the first direction and the second direction which are not obstructed by other gaming machine components during the reading operation. Therefore, the possibility that the reading operation of the identification information is performed at a position other than a position separated from the electronic tag by a predetermined distance or less is reduced.

Feature A8. A mounting portion (resin base 31, game board 33) having a mounting surface formed on a predetermined surface side is provided, and the monitoring target is mounted on the mounting surface,
The gaming machine according to any one of features A3 to A5, wherein the specific direction is a direction opposite to the mounting portion side with respect to the electronic tag.

  According to the feature A8, since the specific direction is set as the direction opposite to the mounting portion side with respect to the electronic tag, the specific direction is easy for a game hall manager or the like to perform reading work. Become. Therefore, the possibility that the reading operation of the identification information is performed at a position other than a position that is more than a predetermined distance from the electronic tag is reduced.

Feature A9. The monitoring target is mounted on the mounting surface, and other gaming machine components (sound lamp control device 66, payout control device 82) are mounted so as to be aligned with the monitoring target on the mounting surface. ,
As the separation wall portion, a first separation wall portion that is disposed at a position separated by a predetermined distance or more in the first direction, which is the specific direction, and is formed to transmit the radio wave, and the monitoring target In which the region where the electronic tag is provided is disposed at a position away from the predetermined distance in a second direction not aligned with the other gaming machine components on the mounting surface, so that the radio wave can be transmitted. The gaming machine according to Feature A8, further comprising: a formed second separation wall.

  According to the feature A9, the first separation wall portion and the second separation wall portion are provided so as to correspond to each of the first direction and the second direction that are not obstructed by other gaming machine components during the reading operation. Therefore, the possibility that the reading operation of the identification information is performed at a position other than a position separated from the electronic tag by a predetermined distance or less is reduced.

Feature A10. The limiting means includes a mounting portion (resin base 31, game board 33) on which a mounting surface on which the monitoring target is mounted is formed,
The specific orientation is an orientation in which identification information is read by the reader device from the side opposite to the mounting surface side with respect to the mounting portion;
The mounting portion is formed such that the shortest distance at which the reader device can be brought closer to the electronic tag from a region opposite to the mounting surface side is equal to or greater than the predetermined distance. A gaming machine according to the feature A1 or A2.

  According to the feature A10, the mounting portion is formed relatively simply so that the shortest distance at which the reader device can be brought closer to the electronic tag from the region opposite to the mounting surface side is equal to or greater than a predetermined distance. With this configuration, the excellent effect of the feature A1 or A2 can be obtained.

  Feature A11. The restricting unit is disposed around a region where the electronic tag is installed on the mounting surface side, and is disposed at a position other than the side facing the mounting unit from the electronic tag, and makes the radio wave impermeable or transparent. The gaming machine according to Feature A10, wherein the gaming machine has a restriction wall portion (wall portion 242) that is difficult to make.

  According to the feature A11, since the restriction wall portion is provided, the reading operation by the reader device is restricted from being performed from the mounting surface side.

  Feature A12. An opening / closing body (inner frame 13) is provided which is supported so as to be openable and closable with respect to a support target (outer frame 11) and has the mounting portion such that the mounting surface side is a back side. The gaming machine according to any one of features A8 to A11.

  When the configuration of the feature A12 is applied to the feature A8, it is possible for the game hall manager or the like to simply bring the reader device to the position restricted by the restricting means simply by opening the opening / closing body. it can.

  Further, when the configuration of the feature A12 is applied to the feature A10, the manager of the game hall easily holds the reader device at a position restricted by the restricting means without performing an opening / closing member opening operation. can go.

  The opening / closing body may be locked in a state of being closed with respect to the support target, and may be provided with a locking means that releases the locking state in accordance with the unlocking operation with the unlocking key and can open the opening / closing body. In this case, the above-described effect can be achieved while it is difficult for an unauthorized person to access the monitoring target.

Feature A13. The monitoring target is a control device (main control device 92) having a control board (main control board 101) and a board box (board box 102) that is formed by combining a plurality of components and accommodates the control board. And
The antenna unit is provided adjacent to and separated from each other among the plurality of structural bodies, and the first structural body (front-side structural body 111) and the first structural body that can open the internal space of the substrate box. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the gaming machine is arranged so as to straddle a boundary between two constituent bodies (back side constituent body 112).

  According to the feature A13, the superior effect of the feature A1 or A2 can be obtained in monitoring whether the substrate box is illegally opened.

  Feature A14. Provided on at least one of the antenna part or the base sheet supporting the electronic tag, and when the antenna part is separated from the monitoring target, the antenna part is cut due to its destruction due to its stress. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A13, further comprising an easy-to-cut portion (antenna cut 176) that makes it possible.

  According to the feature A14, when a part of the monitoring target is separated or when the monitoring target is moved from the installation location, the antenna unit is likely to be disconnected. Then, by applying the configuration such as the feature A1 or A2 to the present configuration, it is possible to suitably manage the monitoring target.

  Feature A15. The predetermined distance is shorter than a communicable limit distance of the electronic tag in a situation where the antenna part is not cut through destruction of the easy-cut part, and the antenna part passes through destruction of the easy-cut part. The gaming machine according to Feature A14, wherein the gaming machine is set to be a distance that is substantially the same as or longer than a communication limit distance of the electronic tag in a disconnected state.

  According to the feature A15, when a part of the monitoring target is separated or when the monitoring target is moved from the installation location, the antenna unit is easily disconnected, and further, when the disconnection occurs. The identification information cannot be read by performing the reading operation by the reader device at the position restricted by the restriction means. Therefore, the effect of the feature A1 or A2 is likely to occur.

Feature B1. An electronic tag (IC tag) comprising a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information 163),
It has an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side and has a brittleness such that when it is peeled off from the pasting area, the base sheet (base sheet 161) has a brittleness so that it is destroyed. A seal member (sealing seal 160) is configured by attaching the electronic tag, and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle a predetermined boundary (boundary 136) of the monitoring target (main control device 92). And
Furthermore, the said boundary is formed so that a bending part may arise in the boundary specific area | region where the said sealing member was affixed in the said boundary.

  According to the feature B1, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately monitor the monitoring target by confirming whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In this configuration, since the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the predetermined boundary in the monitoring target, it is necessary to expose the boundary specific area when performing an illegal act by performing the work on the monitoring target boundary. The seal member needs to be cut or peeled off along the boundary specific region. On the other hand, since the boundary specific region is formed so that a bent portion is generated, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific region, the cutting region is wider than the configuration in which the boundary specific region is straight. At the same time, it becomes difficult to perform cutting work. On the other hand, if the seal member is to be peeled off, the seal member may be broken during the peeling, and if the seal member is torn, the antenna portion is expected to be cut accordingly. . Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the sealing member with an electronic tag is heightened.

  In addition, you may form a sealing member by affixing on the base sheet | seat in the state which bent the antenna part which makes long shape in linear form, substantially linear form, or arc shape. In this case, when the base sheet is torn, the antenna portion is easily cut following the base sheet.

  In addition, the “predetermined boundary” includes boundaries between a plurality of gaming machine components, and easy cutting that allows the internal space of the monitoring target to be opened by being formed on the surface of the monitoring target and being cut. Part is also included.

Feature B2. An electronic tag (IC tag) comprising a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information 163),
It has an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side and has a brittleness such that when it is peeled off from the pasting area, the base sheet (base sheet 161) has a brittleness so that it is destroyed. A seal member (sealing seal 160) is configured by attaching an electronic tag, and the seal member is a boundary (boundary) between a plurality of gaming machine component parts (front-side component 111, back-side component 112). 136), and pasted
The gaming machine further comprises the plurality of gaming machine components so that a bent portion is generated at least in the boundary specific area where the seal member is attached at the boundary.

  According to the feature B2, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately monitor the monitoring target by confirming whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In this configuration, since the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary between the plurality of gaming machine components, when the relative movement of a part of the plurality of gaming machine components is performed, the boundary identification region should be exposed. The seal member needs to be cut or peeled off along the boundary specific region. On the other hand, since the boundary specific region is formed so that a bent portion is generated, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific region, the cutting region is wider than the configuration in which the boundary specific region is straight. At the same time, it becomes difficult to perform cutting work. On the other hand, if the seal member is to be peeled off, the seal member may be broken during the peeling, and if the seal member is torn, the antenna portion is expected to be cut accordingly. . Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the sealing member with an electronic tag is heightened.

  In addition, you may form a sealing member by affixing on the base sheet | seat in the state which bent the antenna part which makes long shape in linear form, substantially linear form, or arc shape. In this case, when the base sheet is torn, the antenna portion is easily cut following the base sheet.

  Feature B3. The gaming machine according to B1 or B2, wherein the antenna unit is formed with a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of a radio wave including the identification information when the antenna unit is destroyed. .

  According to the feature B3, when the seal member is torn in the middle of peeling the seal member from the pasting region, it is expected that the region where the unusable state occurrence portion in the antenna portion is formed is destroyed. The In this case, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping that the identification information cannot be read.

  Feature B4. The gaming machine according to Feature B3, wherein the antenna unit is arranged such that the disabled state generating unit straddles the boundary specific region.

  According to the feature B4, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific region, the impossible state generating portion is destroyed accordingly, and the game hall manager can read the identification information. It is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity by grasping that there is no. Further, even when the seal member is peeled off to expose the boundary specific region, it is necessary to peel off the region where the unusable state generating portion is disposed on the seal member in order to expose the entire boundary specific region. . Then, it is expected that the unusable state occurrence part will be destroyed due to the tearing of the seal member, and it will be easy to recognize the occurrence of fraud by knowing that the game hall manager etc. can not read the identification information Can do.

  Feature B5. A region provided in at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, and the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna portion as it is destroyed by the stress when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region The game machine according to feature B3 or B4, further comprising an easily destructible portion (notch 176 for antenna) that breaks down.

  According to the feature B5, since the easily breakable portion is provided, the possibility that the impossible state occurrence portion is broken when the seal member is peeled is increased.

  The “easily destructible portion” is “provided on at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, extends toward the incapable state generating portion, and stress is removed when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region. Even if it is a destruction cut (antenna cut 176) that destroys the region where the unusable state generation portion is formed in the antenna portion as it concentrates on the end on the generation portion side and is destroyed. Good.

  Feature B6. The game machine according to Feature B5, wherein the seal member is arranged such that the easily breakable portion straddles the boundary specific region.

  According to the feature B6, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions that are opposed to each other across the boundary specific region in the seal member, the failure state generating portion can be destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary specific region, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

Feature B7. The antenna part is formed in a long shape, and the incapable state generating part is formed in the middle of the width direction of the antenna part,
The game machine according to feature B5 or B6, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on one end side in the width direction of the antenna portion and also on the other end side.

  According to the feature B7, since the easily breakable portions are formed at both ends of the antenna portion in the width direction, when the seal member is peeled off, the failure state generating portion is easily broken through the easily breakable portion.

  Feature B8. The seal member according to the feature B7, wherein the seal member is disposed so that at least a part of the boundary specific region is sandwiched between the easily breakable portion on one end side and the easily breakable portion on the other end side. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B8, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions that are opposed to each other across the boundary specific region in the seal member, the failure state generating portion can be destroyed through the easily breakable portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary specific region, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

  Feature B9. The game machine according to Feature B7 or B8, wherein the easy-breaking portion on the one end side and the easy-breaking portion on the other end side are formed so as not to line up in the width direction.

  According to the feature B9, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature B10. The easily breakable portion is formed from an intermediate position in the width direction of the antenna portion to the outside of the antenna portion in a region of the base sheet where the antenna portion is disposed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature B10, when the seal member is torn through the easily breakable portion, the torn region easily reaches the region where the unusable state generating portion is provided in the seal member. It becomes easy to cause destruction.

  Feature B11. The game machine according to any one of features B5 to B10, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on the base sheet and is not formed on the antenna portion.

  According to the feature B11, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature B12. The gaming machine according to any one of features B5 to B11, wherein the easy-to-break portion is formed in a region different from a region in which the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna unit. .

  According to the feature B12, when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting area, not only is the destruction of the area where the unusable state generating part is formed in the antenna part through the easily destructible part, but the antenna is Cutting other than the region where the unusable state generating portion is formed is also expected.

Feature B13. The boundary specifying region is formed in a series of lines, and includes a pair of line portions (second line 146, fourth line 148) facing each other,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B12, wherein at least a part of the disabled state generating unit is disposed in a region between the pair of line units.

  According to the feature B13, since at least a part of the unusable state occurrence portion is disposed in the region between the pair of line portions facing each other, when the seal member is peeled in the same direction, the direction in which the seal member is peeled off Even in this direction, in order to expose the entire boundary specifying region, the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged in the seal member is peeled off. Thereby, when a sealing member is peeled, possibility that destruction will occur in an impossible state generating part is raised. On the other hand, when the sealing member is peeled off while changing the peeling direction according to the shape of the boundary specific area, the peeling action becomes complicated. Further, in this case, the fold generated in the seal member at the time of peeling becomes complicated, so that a large load is easily applied to the seal member, and accordingly, the seal member is easily broken.

Feature B14. The boundary specific region is continuous with the first line portion via a first line portion (first line 145) and an intermediate line portion (second line 146) extending in a direction different from the first line portion, A second line portion (third line 147) extending toward the side opposite to the first line portion side with respect to the intermediate line portion,
The peripheral portion of the seal member includes a first peripheral portion disposed at a position close to the first line portion of the first line portion and the second line portion, and the first line portion and the second line. A second peripheral portion disposed at a position near the second line portion, and the seal member sandwiches the boundary specific region between the first peripheral portion and the second peripheral portion. Has been placed,
At least a part of the unusable state generating portion is disposed on the second peripheral portion side with respect to the first line portion and on the first peripheral portion side with respect to the second line portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B13.

  According to the feature B14, since at least a part of the unusable state generating portion is disposed on the second peripheral portion side with respect to the first line portion and on the first peripheral portion side with respect to the second line portion, the sealing member Are peeled in the same direction, in order to expose the entire boundary specific region, the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged is peeled off in order to expose the entire boundary specific region. It will be. Thereby, when a sealing member is peeled, possibility that destruction will occur in an impossible state generating part is raised. On the other hand, when the sealing member is peeled off while changing the peeling direction according to the shape of the boundary specific area, the peeling action becomes complicated. Further, in this case, since the fold generated in the seal member when peeling off becomes complicated, a large load is easily applied to the seal member, and accordingly, the seal member is easily broken.

Feature B15. The electronic tag includes a control unit that transmits radio waves including identification information read from the storage unit from the antenna unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features B3 to B14, wherein the disabled state generating unit constitutes a circuit that performs impedance matching between the antenna unit and the control unit.

  According to the feature B15, the impedance matching is performed between the antenna unit and the control unit through the disabled state generating unit, so that the radio wave including the identification information is transmitted well, and the disabled state generating unit is destroyed. In this case, since impedance matching is not performed, it is impossible to transmit radio waves including identification information.

  Feature B16. The boundary specific region is disposed between the first peripheral edge and the second peripheral edge facing each other in the base sheet, and the first peripheral edge and the second peripheral edge in the base sheet. B1 is characterized in that a bent portion is formed so that a line extending toward at least one of a pair of third peripheral portion and fourth peripheral portion facing each other is formed. Thru | or the game machine of any one of B15.

  According to the feature B16, it is possible to suitably widen the range in which the boundary specific region is formed.

Feature B17. The boundary specifying region includes a plurality of line portions extending in different directions,
The sealing member is attached so that the antenna unit is at least a part of the plurality of line units and straddles the plurality of line units, according to any one of the features B1 to B16, Gaming machine.

  According to the feature B17, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specifying region, the antenna unit is cut at a plurality of locations. And if the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short to some extent, an electronic tag will become impossible of communication. As a result, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific area, it is possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to easily find the illegal act by grasping that the identification information cannot be read. .

Feature B18. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary formed by being overlapped,
Furthermore, a coupler (breakage) that connects the first sticking part and the second sticking part by being inserted through both the first sticking part and the second sticking part and arranged so as to straddle the boundary. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B17, further comprising a screw 153).

  According to the feature B18, it is assumed that the cutting tool is inserted through the boundary between the first sticking portion and the second sticking portion and the coupling tool is to be cut. However, a bent portion is formed in the boundary specific region. This makes it difficult to insert a cutting tool.

Feature B19. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary formed by being overlapped,
When the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated, the two gaming machine components in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction of the first sticking portion and the second sticking portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the features B1 to B18, further comprising restriction means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for regulating the separation direction so that the two need to be relatively moved.

  According to the feature B19, in order to separate the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component, both gaming machine configurations in a direction intersecting the overlapping direction of the first pasting portion and the second pasting portion. When the components are moved relative to each other, the seal member that is pasted so as to straddle the boundary specific region becomes an obstacle. In this case, it is expected that the configuration such as the feature B1 described above makes it difficult to cut the sealing member, and that the identification information cannot be read when the sealing member is peeled off.

Feature B20. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and a region where the sealing member is pasted is formed by a region formed by overlapping
The first sticking part includes a recessed area (dent area 142) that is recessed from the side overlapping the second adhesive part, and the second adhesive part enters the recessed area, and the recessed area surrounds both adhesive parts. A convex wall portion (projecting wall portion 144) covering the surface so as not to be opened,
As the convex wall portion enters the recessed region, a bent portion is generated at the boundary, and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary,
Further, when the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated, the two gaming mechanisms are arranged in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction of the first pasting portion and the second pasting portion. Restricting means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for restricting the separation direction so that the component parts need to be relatively moved;
A locking portion (hanging portion 155) provided in the recessed region so as to protrude on the movement path of the protruding wall portion when both gaming machine components are moved relative to each other by the restriction means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B19, comprising:

  According to the feature B20, since the latching portion is provided in the recessed area of the first sticking portion, the latching portion is convex even if both gaming machine components are relatively moved in the direction regulated by the regulating means. The relative movement is prevented by hitting the wall. As a result, even if the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated to perform a predetermined fraud, it becomes difficult. And the curved part has arisen in the boundary because a convex wall part enters into a dent area | region. That is, according to the present configuration, a bent portion can be generated at the boundary by utilizing a configuration that prevents the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component from being separated.

  Feature B21. Any one of the features B1 to B20, characterized in that the seal member is formed so as to surround a sticking region to which the seal member is attached, and includes an enclosing portion (enclosed portion 180) for guiding the attaching position of the seal member. Game machines.

  According to the feature B21, by sticking the seal member to the region surrounded by the enclosing portion, the positional relationship between the boundary and the sealing member and the positional relationship between the boundary and the antenna portion are naturally set to a predetermined positional relationship. Thereby, workability | operativity in the case of sticking a sealing member can be improved.

  The “enclosure” may be formed as an enclosing frame protruding from the pasting area. In this case, even if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing member for fraud, it is difficult to perform the peeling action by the surrounding frame. If it does so, it will become easy to apply complicated stress to a seal member, and while it becomes easy to produce a tear to a seal member, it becomes easy to cut an antenna part in connection with it.

  Incidentally, the configuration limited by any one of the features B1 to B21 may be applied to any one of the features A1 to A15. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature C1. An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
The electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side, whereby a sealing member (sealing seal 160) is configured, The seal member is affixed to the monitoring target (main control device 92),
Furthermore, an inability state generating part (slit 173) that is provided in the antenna part and disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
A region provided in at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, and the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna portion as it is destroyed by the stress when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region An easily destructible part (antenna notch 176) that destroys
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature C1, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In this configuration, when the seal member is peeled off to perform fraud with respect to the monitoring target, it is expected that the impossible state generating portion is destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Then, when the disabled state generation unit is destroyed, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the illegal act by grasping that the game hall manager or the like cannot read the identification information.

  The “easily destructible portion” is “provided on at least one of the base sheet or the antenna portion, extends toward the incapable state generating portion, and stress is removed when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting region. Even if it is a destruction cut (antenna cut 176) that destroys the region where the unusable state generation portion is formed in the antenna portion as it concentrates on the end on the generation portion side and is destroyed. Good.

  Feature C2. The seal member is attached to the antenna unit so that a region where the unusable state generation unit is provided extends across a predetermined boundary (boundary 136) in the monitoring target. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C2, since the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the predetermined boundary in the monitoring target, the border should be exposed when performing fraud by performing the work on the monitoring target boundary. It becomes necessary to cut the seal member along the boundary or peel off the seal member. In this case, if the seal member is cut along the boundary, the impossible state occurrence part will be destroyed accordingly, and it will be understood that the game hall manager etc. can not read the identification information By doing so, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of fraud. Further, even when the seal member is peeled off to expose the boundary, it is necessary to peel off the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged on the seal member in order to expose the entire boundary. If this happens, it is expected that the impossible state occurrence part will be destroyed through the breaking cut, and it will be easy to recognize the occurrence of fraudulent activity by knowing that the game hall manager etc. cannot read the identification information. it can.

  The “predetermined boundary” includes a boundary between a plurality of component parts, and an easy-to-cut section that is formed on the surface of the monitoring target and allows the internal space of the monitoring target to be opened by cutting. included. The same applies to the following.

  Feature C3. The game machine according to the feature C1 or C2, wherein the seal member is pasted so that the easily breakable portion straddles a predetermined boundary (boundary 136) in the monitoring target.

  According to the feature C3, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions that face each other across the boundary in the seal member, the impossible state generating portion can be destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

Feature C4. The antenna part is formed in a long shape, and the incapable state generating part is formed in the middle of the width direction of the antenna part,
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C3, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on one end side in the width direction of the antenna portion and also on the other end side.

  According to the feature C4, since the easily breakable portions are formed at both ends of the antenna portion in the width direction, when the seal member is peeled off, the failure state generating portion is easily broken through the easily breakable portion.

  Feature C5. The seal member is affixed so that at least a part of a predetermined boundary (boundary 136) of the monitoring target is sandwiched between the easily breakable portion on one end side and the easily breakable portion on the other end side. A gaming machine according to feature C4.

  According to the feature C5, even if the seal member is peeled off from either of the opposing end portions that are opposed to each other across the boundary in the seal member, the disabling state generating portion can be broken through the easily breakable portion. Thereby, when the seal member is peeled off so as to expose the boundary, the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken.

  Feature C6. The game machine according to C4 or C5, wherein the easily breakable portions on the one end side and the easily breakable portions on the other end side are formed so as not to line up in the width direction.

  According to the feature C6, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature C7. The easily breakable portions are formed from a midway position in the width direction of the antenna portion to the outside of the antenna portion in a region of the base sheet where the antenna portion is disposed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature C7, when the seal member is torn through the easily breakable portion, the torn region easily reaches the region where the unusable state generating portion is provided in the seal member. It becomes easy to cause destruction.

  Feature C8. The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C7, wherein the easily breakable portion is formed on the base sheet and is not formed on the antenna portion.

  According to the feature C8, in the configuration in which the failure state occurrence portion is easily broken through the easy breakage portion, the failure state occurrence portion is accidentally broken when the seal member is properly attached to the application region. The possibility of being reduced is reduced.

  Feature C9. The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C8, wherein the easy-to-break portion is formed in a region different from a region in which the unusable state generating portion is formed in the antenna unit. .

  According to the feature C9, when the seal member is peeled off from the pasting area, not only is the destruction of the area where the unusable state generation part is formed in the antenna part through the easy destruction part, but also the antenna through the easy destruction part. Cutting other than the region where the unusable state generating portion is formed is also expected.

Feature C10. The electronic tag includes a control unit that transmits radio waves including identification information read from the storage unit from the antenna unit,
The gaming machine according to any one of features C1 to C9, wherein the disabled state generation unit constitutes a circuit that performs impedance matching between the antenna unit and the control unit.

  According to the feature C10, the impedance matching is performed between the antenna unit and the control unit through the disabled state generating unit, so that the radio wave including the identification information is transmitted well, and the disabled state generating unit is destroyed. In this case, since impedance matching is not performed, it is impossible to transmit radio waves including identification information.

Feature C11. The seal member is pasted so as to straddle the predetermined boundary (boundary 136) of the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to any one of the features C1 to C10, wherein the boundary is formed so that a bent portion is generated in a boundary specific region where the seal member is attached at the predetermined boundary. .

  According to the feature C11, since the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the predetermined boundary in the monitoring target, the boundary specific area is exposed when performing the illegal act by performing the work on the monitoring target boundary. Therefore, it is necessary to cut or peel off the seal member along the boundary specific region. On the other hand, since the boundary specific region is formed so that a bent portion is generated, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific region, the cutting region is wider than the configuration in which the boundary specific region is straight. At the same time, it becomes difficult to perform cutting work. On the other hand, when the seal member is peeled off, it is expected that the impossible state generating portion is destroyed through the easy-to-break portion. Then, when the disabled state generation unit is destroyed, it is possible to easily recognize the occurrence of the illegal act by grasping that the game hall manager or the like cannot read the identification information. Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the sealing member with an electronic tag is heightened.

Feature C12. The boundary specifying region is formed in a series of lines, and includes a pair of line portions (second line 146, fourth line 148) facing each other,
The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein at least a part of the disabled state generating unit is disposed in a region between the pair of line units.

  According to the feature C12, since at least a part of the unusable state occurrence portion is disposed in the region between the pair of line portions facing each other, when the seal member is peeled in the same direction, the direction in which the seal member is peeled off Even in this direction, in order to expose the entire boundary specifying region, the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged in the seal member is peeled off. Thereby, when a sealing member is peeled, possibility that destruction will occur in an impossible state generating part is raised. On the other hand, when the sealing member is peeled off while changing the peeling direction according to the shape of the boundary specific area, the peeling action becomes complicated. Further, in this case, the fold generated in the seal member at the time of peeling becomes complicated, so that a large load is easily applied to the seal member, and accordingly, the seal member is easily broken.

Feature C13. The boundary specific region is continuous with the first line portion via a first line portion (first line 145) and an intermediate line portion (second line 146) extending in a direction different from the first line portion, A second line portion (third line 147) extending toward the side opposite to the first line portion side with respect to the intermediate line portion,
The peripheral portion of the seal member includes a first peripheral portion disposed at a position close to the first line portion of the first line portion and the second line portion, and the first line portion and the second line. A second peripheral portion disposed at a position near the second line portion, and the seal member sandwiches the boundary specific region between the first peripheral portion and the second peripheral portion. Has been placed,
At least a part of the unusable state generating portion is disposed on the second peripheral portion side with respect to the first line portion and on the first peripheral portion side with respect to the second line portion. A gaming machine according to feature C11 or C12.

  According to the feature C13, since at least a part of the unusable state generating portion is disposed on the second peripheral portion side with respect to the first line portion and on the first peripheral portion side with respect to the second line portion, the sealing member Are peeled in the same direction, in order to expose the entire boundary specific region, the region where the unusable state generating portion is arranged is peeled off in order to expose the entire boundary specific region. It will be. Thereby, when a sealing member is peeled, possibility that destruction will occur in an impossible state generating part is raised. On the other hand, when the sealing member is peeled off while changing the peeling direction according to the shape of the boundary specific area, the peeling action becomes complicated. Further, in this case, since the fold generated in the seal member when peeling off becomes complicated, a large load is easily applied to the seal member, and accordingly, the seal member is easily broken.

Feature C14. The boundary specifying region includes a plurality of line portions extending in different directions,
The seal member is attached so that the antenna unit is at least a part of the plurality of line units and straddles the plurality of line units. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature C14, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specifying region, the antenna unit is cut at a plurality of locations. And if the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short to some extent, an electronic tag will become impossible of communication. As a result, when the seal member is cut along the boundary specific area, it is possible for the manager of the game hall or the like to easily find the illegal act by grasping that the identification information cannot be read. .

Feature C15. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary formed by being overlapped,
Furthermore, a coupler (breakage) that connects the first sticking part and the second sticking part by being inserted through both the first sticking part and the second sticking part and arranged so as to straddle the boundary. The gaming machine according to any one of features C11 to C14, comprising a screw 153).

  According to the feature C15, it is assumed that a cutting tool is inserted through the boundary between the first sticking portion and the second sticking portion and the coupling tool is to be cut, but a bent portion is formed in the boundary specific region. This makes it difficult to insert a cutting tool.

Feature C16. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary formed by being overlapped,
When the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated, the two gaming machine components in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction of the first sticking portion and the second sticking portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features C11 to C15, further comprising restriction means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for regulating the separation direction so that the two need to be relatively moved.

  According to feature C16, in order to separate the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component, both gaming machine configurations in a direction intersecting the overlapping direction of the first pasting portion and the second pasting portion. When the components are moved relative to each other, the seal member that is pasted so as to straddle the boundary specific region becomes an obstacle. In this case, it is expected that the configuration such as the feature B1 described above makes it difficult to cut the sealing member, and that the identification information cannot be read when the sealing member is peeled off.

Feature C17. The monitoring target includes a first gaming machine component (front side component 111) and a second gaming machine component (back side component 112) as a plurality of gaming machine components.
The 1st sticking part (front side fixed base part 131) provided in the peripheral part of the 1st gaming machine component, and the 2nd sticking part (back side fixed base part) provided in the peripheral part of the 2nd gaming machine component 132) and a region where the sealing member is pasted is formed by a region formed by overlapping
The first sticking part includes a recessed area (dent area 142) that is recessed from the side overlapping the second adhesive part, and the second adhesive part enters the recessed area, and the recessed area surrounds both adhesive parts. A convex wall portion (projecting wall portion 144) covering the surface so as not to be opened,
As the convex wall portion enters the recessed region, a bent portion is generated at the boundary, and the seal member is pasted so as to straddle the boundary,
Further, when the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated, the two gaming mechanisms are arranged in a direction intersecting with the overlapping direction of the first pasting portion and the second pasting portion. Restricting means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for restricting the separation direction so that the component parts need to be relatively moved;
A locking portion (hanging portion 155) provided in the recessed region so as to protrude on the movement path of the protruding wall portion when both gaming machine components are moved relative to each other by the restriction means;
The gaming machine according to any one of features C11 to C16, comprising:

  According to the feature C17, since the locking portion is provided in the recessed area of the first sticking portion, the locking portion is convex even if the two gaming machine components are relatively moved in the direction regulated by the regulating means. The relative movement is prevented by hitting the wall. As a result, even if the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component are separated to perform a predetermined fraud, it becomes difficult. And the curved part has arisen in the boundary because a convex wall part enters into a dent area | region. That is, according to the present configuration, a bent portion can be generated at the boundary by utilizing a configuration that prevents the first gaming machine component and the second gaming machine component from being separated.

  Feature C18. Any one of the features C1 to C17, wherein the sealing member is formed so as to surround a pasting region to which the seal member is pasted, and includes a surrounding portion (a surrounding portion 180) that guides a pasting position of the sealing member. Game machines.

  According to the feature C18, by sticking the seal member to the region surrounded by the surrounding portion, the positional relationship between the boundary and the sealing member and the positional relationship between the boundary and the antenna portion are naturally set to a predetermined positional relationship. Thereby, workability | operativity in the case of sticking a sealing member can be improved.

  The “enclosure” may be formed as an enclosing frame protruding from the pasting area. In this case, even if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing member for fraud, it is difficult to perform the peeling action by the surrounding frame. If it does so, it will become easy to apply complicated stress to a seal member, and while it becomes easy to produce a tear to a seal member, it becomes easy to cut an antenna part in connection with it.

  Incidentally, the configuration limited by any one of the above features C1 to C18 is applied to any one of the above features A1 to A15, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following features N1 to N8. May be. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature D1. It is provided for a predetermined monitoring target (the main control device 92 for the first embodiment, the main control device 281 for the sixth embodiment). In a gaming machine equipped with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that leaves a trace that a specific operation that is either a partial separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target is performed,
When the specific operation is performed, the monitoring target is provided so as to require a predetermined preliminary operation prior to the specific operation, and the trace unit is set to the trace state when the specific operation is performed. Pre-operation means provided in this way (the cover member 93 or the hook 155 for the first embodiment, the combination of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment A gaming machine comprising a cover member 371).

  According to the feature D1, since the pre-operation means is provided, it is necessary to perform the pre-operation prior to the specific operation on the monitoring target. Therefore, the work for performing the specific operation becomes complicated and illegal. It is possible to prevent or hesitate to perform a specific operation.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the trace means is likely to be in the trace state when the specific operation is performed. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D2. A plurality of components (front side component 111 and back side component 112 for the first embodiment, front side component 283 and back side component 284 for the sixth embodiment, front side for the eighth embodiment A board box (the board box 102 for the first embodiment, the board box 102 for the first embodiment, and the sixth embodiment for the control board (main control board 101) formed by combining the body 363 and the back side body 365). Substrate box 282, substrate box 361) for the eighth embodiment,
In the gaming machine provided with the trace means (sealing seal 160) that leaves a trace that the specific operation for opening the internal space of the substrate box was performed by being provided in the board box and being in a trace state,
When the specific operation is performed, the substrate box is provided so as to require a predetermined preliminary operation prior to the specific operation, and the trace means is set to the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed. Pre-operation means provided (the cover member 93 or the hook 155 for the first embodiment, the combination of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment A gaming machine comprising a cover member 371).

  According to the feature D2, since the pre-operation means is provided, it is necessary to perform a pre-operation prior to opening the internal space of the substrate box, so that the internal space of the substrate box is opened. The work becomes complicated, and it becomes possible to prevent or hesitate to open the substrate box illegally.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the trace means is likely to be in the trace state when the substrate box is illegally opened. . Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D3. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The pre-operation means destroys the electronic tag so that it is difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag or the identification information cannot be read when the pre-operation is performed. The game machine according to the feature D1 or D2, characterized in that the game machine is easily generated.

  According to the feature D3, since the electronic tag is provided as the trace means, the manager of the game hall or the like can check whether or not the normal identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed. In addition, since the configuration of the prior operation means is applied to the configuration, the function of the electronic tag can be suitably exhibited.

Feature D4. The antenna unit includes a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the prior operation means is configured to easily cause the incapable state generating portion to be broken when the preliminary operation is performed.

  According to the feature D4, when a specific operation is performed on the monitoring target, the disabled state generation unit in the antenna unit is easily destroyed. In this case, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping that the identification information cannot be read.

Feature D5. The prior operation means includes:
Specific restriction means provided so as to restrict the specific operation and a release operation to release the restriction state as the preliminary operation (cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment) A cover member 371) for the eighth embodiment;
When the release operation is performed on the specific restricting means, a trace state generating means (displaced with the release operation and applying the external force to the trace means to make the trace means the trace state ( For the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 311; for the eighth embodiment, the breaking projection 385);
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that

  According to the feature D5, the function of restricting the specific operation by the prior operation means and the function of setting the trace means to the trace state are performed.

Feature D6. The monitoring target is a combination of a plurality of structural bodies (a front side structural body 283 and a back side structural body 284 for the sixth embodiment, and a front side structural body 363 and a back side structural body 365 for the eighth embodiment). A board box (substrate box 282 for the sixth embodiment, board box 361 for the eighth embodiment) that is formed and accommodates the control board (main control board 101);
The trace means leaves a trace that a specific operation has been performed to open the internal space of the substrate box by being in the trace state,
Further, the prior operation means includes:
Even if at least the first structure and the second structure are separated from each other among the plurality of structures to open the internal space, the separation of the first structure and the second structure is limited. Specific limiting means provided to require a release operation to release the restriction state as the prior operation (the cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, the eighth embodiment) Cover member 371),
When the release operation is performed on the specific restricting means, a trace state generating means (displaced with the release operation and applying the external force to the trace means to make the trace means the trace state ( For the sixth embodiment, the breaking member 311; for the eighth embodiment, the breaking projection 385);
A gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that

  According to the feature D6, the function of limiting the opening of the internal space of the substrate box by the prior operation means and the function of setting the trace means to the trace state are performed.

Feature D7. The specific restriction means is displaced to a position where the restriction state is released when the release operation is performed, and the trace state generating means is connected to the specific restriction means so that the release operation is performed. Is displaced along with the trace means,
Furthermore, an act of releasing the connected state by applying an external force to the connection part provided to protect the connection part around the connection part between the specific restriction unit and the trace state generation unit. The gaming machine according to the feature D5 or D6, further comprising protection means (protection wall portions 351, 352) that make the operation impossible or difficult to perform.

  According to feature D7, when the restriction state by the specific restriction means is released, the specific restriction means may be displaced to a position to release the restriction state. It is possible to prevent the workability in the process from being extremely lowered. In addition, since the trace state generating unit is displaced with the displacement of the specific limiting unit and abuts against the trace unit, the trace unit is set to the trace state, so that the configuration of the trace state generation unit is prevented from being complicated. It is done.

  However, in the configuration in which the specific restricting means and the trace state generating means are provided as described above, if the connection between the two is released, the trace means is changed to the trace state along with the release operation of the restricted state by the specific restricting means. It becomes impossible to do. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent an action to release the connection between the specific restriction means and the trace state generation means.

Feature D8. The trace means is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and is provided so as to be in the trace state when the restriction state of the specific operation is released.
The preliminary operation means is provided so as to prevent the restriction state from being released by the trace means, and the prevention means is provided so as to require a release operation to release the blocking state as the preliminary operation ( A cover member 331 is provided for the sixth embodiment, and a cover member 371 is provided for the eighth embodiment. Further, when the release operation is performed on the blocking means, the release operation is performed. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D4, characterized in that the trace means is brought into the trace state by being displaced along with the trace means.

  According to the feature D8, in order to perform the specific operation, it is necessary to release the blocking state by the prior operation means and to release the restriction state of the trace means. As a result, the work for performing the specific operation becomes complicated, and the act of performing the specific operation illegally can be prevented or hesitant.

  Further, since the pre-operation means is provided so that the trace means is in the trace state when the preliminary operation is performed, the opportunity for the trace means to be in the trace state causes the trace means to release the restricted state. It exists not only when an operation is performed, but also when a prior operation is performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, a trace means becomes easy to become a trace state, and it becomes possible to exhibit the function of a trace means suitably.

  Feature D9. The blocking means is a cover means that is provided so as to cover the trace means and is provided so as to require a displacement operation to displace the trace means from an installation location to a position that does not cover the trace means as the preliminary operation. The gaming machine according to Feature D8, wherein:

  According to the feature D9, the function of protecting the trace means by the prior operation means is performed. Further, accompanying the function to be protected, it is necessary to displace the cover means as a preliminary operation for the specific operation. And a trace means will be in a trace state with the said displacement. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably realize the function of the trace means in accordance with practical use.

  The trace means has a base sheet having an adhesive layer formed on one surface, and is affixed to the monitoring target, and is destroyed due to the stress when it is peeled off from the affixing area. In the configuration provided with the sealing member, the cover means may be provided so as to cover the sealing member.

  Further, in the configuration including the electronic tag having the storage unit storing the unique identification information and the antenna unit transmitting the radio wave including the identification information, the trace unit covers the electronic tag. The cover means may be provided.

  Feature D10. The pre-operation means is provided so as to cover the trace means, and a cover provided so as to require a displacement operation for displacing from the installation location to a position not covering the trace means as the preliminary operation. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8, further comprising means (a cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment and a cover member 371 for the eighth embodiment).

  According to the feature D10, not only a function requiring prior operation and a function for setting the trace means to a trace state but also a function for protecting the trace means are performed by the preliminary operation means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the means for preliminary operation is achieved, and it can be satisfactorily realized that the function of the trace means is suitably exhibited.

Feature D11. When the displacement operation is performed on the cover unit, the pre-operation unit is displaced along with the displacement operation, and abuts on the trace unit to bring the trace unit into the trace state. Trace state generating means (breaking member 311 for the sixth embodiment, breaking protrusion 385 for the eighth embodiment),
The gaming machine according to Feature D9 or D10, wherein the trace state generating means is provided within a range covered by the cover means.

  According to the feature D11, by providing the trace state generating means, the trace means can be changed to the trace state in accordance with the displacement operation to the cover means. However, in this configuration, if the act of destroying the trace state generating means is performed, the trace means cannot be set to the trace state. On the other hand, since the trace state generating means is provided within the range covered by the cover means, it is possible to make it difficult to perform an act of destroying the trace state generating means.

  Feature D12. The preliminary operation means is disposed inside the installation location (the sticking base 293) where the trace means is installed, and on the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation location. When the displacement operation is performed on the cover means, the displacement means is displaced toward the side where the trace means is installed on the outside of the installation location, and comes into contact with the trace means. The gaming machine according to feature D9 or D10, further comprising trace state generation means (destructive member 311) that sets the trace means to the trace state.

  According to the feature D12, the trace state generating means is configured to displace in a direction in which the trace means is in contact with the trace means from the inside to the outside of the installation place of the trace means. Tends to come into contact with the trace means, and the trace means tends to be in a trace state. In addition to this, since the trace state generating means is disposed inside the installation place, the trace state generating means is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the act of destroying the trace state generation means is performed. It is possible to make it difficult to do.

Feature D13. The cover means and the trace state generation means are provided separately, and either one of the cover means and the trace state generation means is fixed or locked to the other, so that they are integrally displaced. Configuration,
Further, an act of releasing the connected state by applying an external force to the connection part provided to protect the connection part around the connection part where the fixing or the locking is performed. The gaming machine according to Feature D12, further comprising protection means (protective wall portions 351, 352) that are disabled or difficult to perform.

  According to the feature D13, by providing the cover means and the trace state generating means separately, the trace means is covered by the cover means while the trace state generating means is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means. Can be performed without difficulty. Also, the cover means and the trace state generating means provided separately are connected, and the trace state generating means is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the cover means, and the trace means is traced by contacting the trace means. Since it is a state, the complication of the structure for displacing a trace state generation means is suppressed.

  However, in the configuration in which the cover means and the trace state generating means are connected as described above, if the connection between the two is released, the trace means is changed to the trace state in accordance with the displacement of the cover means. Will not be able to. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent an act of releasing the connection between the cover means and the trace state generation means.

Feature D14. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 291) formed on a first component (front-side structure 283) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. Formed in the structural body 284) and provided across the boundary with the second installation portion (back side fixed base portion 292) disposed to face the first installation portion,
The trace state generating means is provided so as to be sandwiched between the first installation part and the second installation part, and the first installation part and the second installation part are coupled by a coupling tool (screw 319). The gaming machine according to Feature D12 or D13, wherein separation from both installation portions is prevented.

  According to the feature D14, the preliminary operation means can be fixed using a configuration in which the first installation unit and the second installation unit are coupled by the coupling tool.

Feature D15. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 131) formed on a first component (front-side structure 111) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. Formed in the structural body 112) and provided across the boundary with the second installation portion (the back side fixed base portion 132) disposed to face the first installation portion,
Further, when the first component and the second component are separated, the two components are moved relative to each other in a direction that intersects the juxtaposed direction of the first installation portion and the second installation portion. Provided with regulating means (hook portion 118, slit 119) for regulating the separation direction as necessary,
The pre-operation means is provided between the first installation portion and the second installation portion, and the first installation portion in the case where both the component parts are relatively moved by being restricted by the restriction means. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D14, further comprising a locking portion (hanging portion 155) provided so as to protrude on a moving path of the second installation portion.

  According to the feature D15, separation of both components can be prevented by the prior operation means itself, and when separating both the components, a tool or the like is passed through the boundary between the first installation portion and the second installation portion. Need to be inserted and the locking portion to be cut. Since the trace means is provided so as to straddle the boundary between the two installation portions, it is expected that the trace means is destroyed and becomes in a trace state during the cutting operation of the locking portion.

  Note that, for any one of the configurations of the features D1 to D15, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following feature N1. A configuration limited by any one of N8 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature E1. Separation of a part of a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 92 in the first embodiment, main control device 281 in the sixth embodiment) by applying an external force to a trace state In a gaming machine equipped with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that leaves a trace of the fact that has been performed or movement from a predetermined monitoring target installation location,
It is provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means, and is provided so that an external force can be applied to the trace means when it is removed from the installation location so as to release the state opposed to the trace means. Cover means (the cover member 93 for the first embodiment, the combination of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, and the cover member 371 for the eighth embodiment). A gaming machine characterized by that.

  According to the feature E1, by providing the cover means, it becomes possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Note that the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following feature N1 are added to the configuration of the feature E1. A configuration limited by any one of N8 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature F1. Separation of a part of a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 92 in the first embodiment, main control device 281 in the sixth embodiment) by applying an external force to a trace state In a gaming machine equipped with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that leaves a trace of the fact that has been performed or movement from a predetermined monitoring target installation location,
Cover means provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means and provided so as to hit the trace means when removed from the installation location so as to release the state opposed to the trace means The cover member 93 is provided for the first embodiment, the combination of the breaking member 311 and the cover member 331 is provided for the sixth embodiment, and the cover member 371) is provided for the eighth embodiment. A featured gaming machine.

  According to the feature F1, by providing the cover means, it is possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Note that the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following feature N1 with respect to the configuration of the feature F1. A configuration limited by any one of N8 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature G1. Separation of a part of a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 92 in the first embodiment, main control device 281 in the sixth embodiment) by applying an external force to a trace state In a gaming machine equipped with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that leaves a trace of the fact that has been performed or movement from a predetermined monitoring target installation location,
It is provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means, and is provided so as to require displacement in a predetermined specific direction when being removed from the installation location so as to release the facing state. Cover means (cover member 93 for the first embodiment, cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, cover member 371 for the eighth embodiment), and
A rear-side arrangement portion provided on the cover means and arranged on the opposite side of the specific direction with respect to at least a part of the trace means (the overlapping wall portion 190 and the sixth embodiment in the first embodiment) For the form, the breaking member 311, and for the eighth embodiment, the breaking convex part 385),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature G1, since the cover means is provided, it is possible to protect the trace means when the gaming machine is transported. In addition, when the cover unit is removed from the installation location in order to perform fraud on the monitoring target, it is expected that an external force is applied to the trace unit by the cover unit itself. Thereby, when an illegal act is performed with respect to the monitoring target, the trace means is likely to be in a trace state. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature G2. The gaming machine according to Feature G1, wherein the rear side arrangement portion is arranged on the opposite direction side of the end portion on the opposite direction side in the trace means.

  According to the feature G2, when the cover means is removed from the installation location, the cover means easily applies an external force to the trace means.

  Note that the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following The configuration limited by any one of the features N1 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature H1. Provided for a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 281) and being in a trace state, it is either a partial separation operation of the monitoring target or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target In a gaming machine equipped with trace means (seal seal 160) that leaves a trace that a specific operation has been performed,
A specific restriction means (seventh, seventh) is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and in order to release the restriction state, a release operation for displacing the restriction state to a position for releasing the restriction state is required. The cover member 331 for the ninth embodiment, the cover member 371 for the eighth embodiment, the cover member 401 for the tenth embodiment,
When the release operation is performed on the specific restricting means, a trace state generating means (displaced with the release operation and applying the external force to the trace means to make the trace means the trace state ( For the seventh, ninth, and tenth embodiments, the breaking member 311; for the eighth embodiment, the breaking projection 385);
It is provided so as to protect the integrated part at a position facing the integrated part for displacing the trace state generating means in accordance with the displacement of the specific restricting means, and an external force is applied to the integrated part so as to be integrated. Protecting means that disables or makes it difficult to cancel the act of releasing the state (in the seventh embodiment, protective wall portions 351 and 352, and in the eighth embodiment, the front cover member 372 A wall, a housing 394 for the ninth embodiment, a pair of walls 406, 407) for the tenth embodiment, and
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H1, since the specific restriction means is provided, it is necessary to perform a release operation prior to the specific operation on the monitoring target. Therefore, the operation for performing the specific operation becomes complicated and is illegally specified. It becomes possible to prevent or deter the act of performing the operation.

  Also, since a trace state generating means is provided so that the trace means becomes a trace state when a release operation is performed on the specific restriction means, the trace means is in a trace state when the specific operation is performed. It becomes easy to become. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the trace state generation unit is displaced with the displacement of the specific limiting unit and applies the external force to the trace unit, the trace unit is set to the trace state. Therefore, the configuration of the trace state generation unit is complicated. Can be suppressed. However, in the configuration in which the specific restricting means and the trace state generating means are provided as described above, if the integrated part of both is released, the trace means is changed along with the release operation of the restricted state by the specific restricting means. It becomes impossible to make a trace state. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent the act of releasing the integrated part of the specific restriction means and the trace state generation means.

Feature H2. The specific restricting means is provided outside the monitoring target, and the trace state generating means is an installation location where the trace means is installed (for the seventh, ninth, and tenth embodiments, a sticking base 293). The eighth embodiment is provided for the installation location so that the integrated portion exists outside the sticking base 362).
The protection means is a facing portion provided so as to sandwich the integrated portion with the installation location (protective wall portions 351 and 352 for the seventh embodiment, front cover for the eighth embodiment) The wall portion of the member 372, the second wall portion 396 for the ninth embodiment, and the pair of wall portions 406 and 407 for the tenth embodiment are described in the feature H1. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature H2, it is difficult to access the integrated part while using the installation part by providing the opposing part provided so as to sandwich the integrated part between the installation part as a protection means. Can do.

  Feature H3. The protecting means is provided separately from the specific restricting means, and the integrated means except for the location that allows the specific restricting means and the trace state generating means to be displaced by the release operation. The gaming machine according to Feature H2, wherein a storage space that covers the periphery is formed between the installation space and the installation location.

  According to the feature H3, since the integrated part of the specific restriction unit and the trace state generating unit is stored in the storage space, it is difficult to access the integrated part. Even in this case, the protection means can prevent the displacement of the specific restriction means and the trace state generation means from being hindered.

Feature H4. The installation location is formed to protrude outward from the surrounding area on the peripheral surface of the monitoring target,
The specific restriction means is configured to be displaced along the installation location when the release operation is performed,
The protection means is provided across an opposing portion (second wall portion 396) that sandwiches the integrated portion with the installation location, and between the installation location and the opposing portion, and a gap between them is described above. The gaming machine according to Feature H3, further comprising a blocking portion (sandwich wall portions 397, 398) that is closed from outside the specific restriction means.

  According to the feature H4, since the opposing portion and the blocking portion are provided as the protection means, the integrated portion of the specific restriction means and the trace state generation means can be protected from a plurality of directions, and the integration It is difficult to access the part.

  Feature H5. The gaming machine according to claim H1 or H2, wherein the protection means is provided in the specific restriction means so as to face the integrated portion from the outside.

  According to the feature H5, since the protection unit is integrated with the specific limiting unit, the integrated portion can be well protected while suppressing the influence of the alignment accuracy between the specific limiting unit and the monitoring target. .

  Feature H6. The specific restriction means is cover means for covering the periphery of the protection means, and the integrated portion is accommodated in an accommodation space defined by an outer wall portion of the cover means constituting the protection means. The gaming machine according to Feature H5.

  According to the feature H6, the periphery of the protection unit can be covered by the cover unit, and the integrated part can be protected by the cover unit itself.

Feature H7. Provided for a predetermined monitoring target (main control device 281) and being in a trace state, it is either a partial separation operation of the monitoring target or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target In a gaming machine equipped with trace means (seal seal 160) that leaves a trace that a specific operation has been performed,
The trace means is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and is provided so as to be in the trace state when the restriction state of the specific operation is released.
Furthermore, it is provided so as to prevent the restriction state from being released by the trace means, and in order to release the prevention state, the prevention is provided so as to require a release operation to displace the prevention state. Means (cover member 331 for the seventh and ninth embodiments, cover member 371 for the eighth embodiment, cover member 401 for the tenth embodiment),
When the release operation is performed on the blocking means, the state is displaced along with the release operation, and an external force is applied to the trace means, thereby setting the trace means to the trace state. For the seventh, ninth and tenth embodiments, the breaking member 311; for the eighth embodiment, the breaking projection 385);
Provided to protect the integrated part at a position opposite to the integrated part for displacing the trace state generating means in accordance with the displacement of the blocking means, and applying an external force to the integrated part for integration. Protecting means that disables or makes it difficult to cancel the act of canceling the state that has been made (protective wall portions 351 and 352 for the seventh embodiment, and the wall of the front cover member 372 for the eighth embodiment) A housing portion 394 for the ninth embodiment, a pair of wall portions 406, 407) for the tenth embodiment,
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature H7, in order to perform the specific operation, it is necessary to release the restricted state of the trace unit and to release the blocked state by the blocking unit. As a result, the work for performing the specific operation becomes complicated, and the act of performing the specific operation illegally can be prevented or hesitant.

  Also, since a trace state generating means is provided so that the trace means becomes a trace state when a release operation is performed on the specific restriction means, the trace means is in a trace state when the specific operation is performed. It becomes easy to become. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Furthermore, since the trace state generating part is displaced in accordance with the displacement of the blocking means and applying the external force to the trace means to make the trace means a trace state, the configuration of the trace state generation means is complicated. Is suppressed. However, in the configuration in which the blocking means and the trace state generating means are provided as described above, if the integrated part of both is released, the trace means is changed to the trace state along with the release operation of the blocked state by the blocking means. It becomes impossible to do. On the other hand, by providing the protection means, it is possible to prevent the act of releasing the integrated part of the prevention means and the trace state generation means.

  Note that the configuration limited in any one of the features H2 to H6 may be applied to the feature H7. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved. However, each configuration is applied assuming that “blocking means” is provided instead of “specific restriction means”.

  Further, for any one of the configurations of the features H1 to H7, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the following features L1 to L33, and the following feature M1 A configuration limited by any one of M9 and the following features N1 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature I1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
Release means for releasing the inhibition state (the destruction member 311 in the sixth and thirteenth embodiments, the destruction member 501 in the eleventh embodiment, and the destruction member 601 in the twelfth embodiment) In the fourteenth embodiment, the breaking member 801, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the breaking member 910),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the characteristic I1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, by providing the release means, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

Feature I2. A substrate box (substrate box 282) that is formed by combining a plurality of components (front-side component 283 and back-side component 284) and accommodates a control substrate (main control substrate 101);
Provided in the substrate box and provided to inhibit a specific operation for opening the internal space of the substrate box, and when the inhibition state is released, leaves a trace that the specific operation has been performed. A trace means (seal seal 160) to be in a trace state;
Release means for releasing the inhibition state (the destruction member 311 in the sixth and thirteenth embodiments, the destruction member 501 in the eleventh embodiment, and the destruction member 601 in the twelfth embodiment) In the fourteenth embodiment, the breaking member 801, and in the fifteenth embodiment, the breaking member 910),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature I2, since the trace unit is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, the inhibition state of the trace unit is released when the specific operation is performed. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, by providing the release means, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. By this. This can be suitably handled when a specific operation is performed for an inspection or the like.

  Feature I3. The releasing means is formed so as to be displaceable in a predetermined specific direction from a predetermined initial position, destroys the trace means by the displacement in the specific direction, and releases the inhibition state. A gaming machine according to the feature I1 or I2.

  According to the feature I3, by moving the release means in the specific direction from the initial position, the trace means is destroyed and the inhibition state is released. In this case, since it is only necessary to displace the release means, the trace means can be easily destroyed by the release means.

  Note that “displaceable in a specific direction” includes not only a configuration capable of sliding in a specific direction but also a configuration capable of rotating in a specific direction.

Feature I4. The release means includes a destruction portion (the destruction base portion 312 in the sixth and thirteenth embodiments, the eleventh embodiment in contact with the trace means when the release means is displaced in the specific direction. A destruction base portion 502, a destruction base portion 602 in the twelfth embodiment, a destruction base portion 802 in the fourteenth embodiment, and a destruction base portion 911 in the fifteenth embodiment,
The gaming machine according to I3, wherein the destruction unit destroys the trace means by pressing the trace means.

  According to the characteristic I4, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the destruction portion and the trace means come into contact with each other, and a pressing force based on the displacement of the release means is applied from the destruction portion to the trace means. Thereby, the trace means is destroyed and the inhibition state is released.

  Feature I5. The destruction portion is formed so that a part of the destruction portion abuts when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, and gradually, as the release means is displaced in the specific direction, The gaming machine according to the characteristic I4, wherein the abutting portion with the trace means is formed to be displaced.

  According to the characteristic I5, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a part of the destruction portion comes into contact with the trace means. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the trace means increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Thereby, it becomes possible to easily destroy the trace means.

Feature I6. The destruction portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation location (the pasting base 293) where the trace means is installed, and on the opposite side of the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location. And
The gaming machine according to the characteristic I4 or the characteristic I5, characterized in that the specific direction is formed to be displaceable toward an outside of the installation location and a side where the trace means is installed.

  According to the feature I6, the trace means is destroyed by displacing the destruction portion from the inside to the outside of the installation location. In this case, since the destructive part has only to be pulled outward, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

  In addition, since the destruction part is arranged inside the trace means, the destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress fraud to the release means such as destroying the destruction part. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  Feature I7. The release means is an operation section (in the sixth and thirteenth embodiments) exposed from the installation location of the trace means to the outside in a situation where the destruction portion is arranged inside the installation location of the trace means. Is an arm portion 313, an arm portion 503 in the eleventh embodiment, an arm portion 603 in the twelfth embodiment, a handle 814 in the fourteenth embodiment, and an arm portion in the fifteenth embodiment. 912, 913). The gaming machine according to Feature I6,

  According to the feature I7, since the operation unit is exposed outside the installation place of the trace unit, it is necessary for the release unit to be displaced with respect to the release unit by hooking or holding a tool on the operation unit. It becomes possible to give power. Thereby, even if it is the state which the destruction part has arrange | positioned inside the installation location of the trace means, the cancellation | release means can be displaced easily.

Feature I8. An enclosing portion that is provided so as to define an attachment surface to which the trace means is attached and guides the attachment position of the trace means to the attachment surface (the enclosure portion 321 in the sixth to eleventh to fourteenth embodiments). In the fifteenth embodiment, the enclosure 950) is provided,
The gaming machine according to Feature I7, wherein the operation unit is formed to constitute a part of the enclosure.

  According to the feature I8, since the surrounding portion for guiding the trace means to the attachment position is provided, it is possible to improve workability when attaching the trace means. In this case, the operation unit is also used as a part of the enclosure.

  In addition, since the surrounding portion is provided so as to define the mounting surface, the trace means and the surrounding portion do not interfere with each other. Thereby, the operation part which comprises a part of enclosure part does not interfere with a trace means. Therefore, a force can be applied to the operation unit without interfering with the trace means.

Feature I9. The release means is pivotally supported at a predetermined location, and the pivot support location (the shaft portion 701 and the bearing hole 702 in the thirteenth embodiment, the shaft portion 811 and the bearing hole in the fourteenth embodiment). 813) is formed so as to be rotatable from the initial position toward the specific direction,
Any one of the characteristics I4 to I8, wherein when the release means rotates in the specific direction, the destruction section contacts the trace means and destroys the trace means. Game machines.

  According to the characteristic I9, when the release means rotates, the destruction part comes into contact with the trace means. And since a pressing force is provided with respect to a trace means with rotation of a cancellation | release means, a trace means will be destroyed and an inhibition state will be cancelled | released. In this case, compared with the configuration in which the release means is slid, it is easy to apply a force for displacing the release means to the release means, so that the trace means can be easily destroyed. Thereby, cancellation | release of the inhibition state of a trace means can be performed easily.

Feature I10. The release means includes an operation portion (arm portion 313 in the thirteenth embodiment, handle 814 in the fourteenth embodiment) exposed toward the outside of the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature I9, wherein the destruction portion is formed so as to be positioned between the operation portion and the pivot support portion.

  According to the feature I10, it is possible to increase the pressing force applied to the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means by the lever principle. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

Feature I11. The pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature I9 or Feature I10, further comprising a restricting means (attachment base 293) for restricting separation of the releasing means in a situation where the releasing means is disposed at the initial position.

  According to the feature I11, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means, it is easier to mount the release means compared to the configuration in which the pivot support location is arranged inside the installation location. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the release means is pivotally supported.

  In this case, since the release means can be easily mounted, the access to the pivot support is easy, and therefore, the illegal action of illegally releasing the state where the release means is supported and illegally separating the release means. There is concern about what is done.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, separation of the release means is restricted at the initial position. Thereby, the fraudulent act which illegally separates the release means at the initial position can be suppressed.

Feature I12. The release means is attached in the axial direction with respect to the pivot support location,
The destruction portion is disposed as an initial position inside the installation place of the trace means and on the side opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with reference to the installation place,
As the specific direction, the outer side of the installation place of the trace means and is formed to be rotatable toward the side where the trace means is installed,
The restriction means restricts movement of the release means in the axial direction by contact between the destruction portion and the installation location of the trace means at the initial position. Gaming machine.

  According to the feature I12, the installation place of the trace means functions as the restriction means by the configuration limited by the feature I6. That is, separation of the release means can be regulated by a configuration that easily rotates the release means and restricts access to the destruction portion.

Feature I13. The pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means,
Specific restriction means provided to restrict the specific operation and requires a predetermined release operation to release the restricted state (in the thirteenth embodiment, the cover member 331 and the fourteenth embodiment). Cover member 821) and cover means provided so as to face at least a part of the trace means and restrict access to the trace means (in the thirteenth embodiment, the cover members 331, 14th). In the embodiment of the present invention, a limiting means having at least one of the cover members 821) is provided,
The gaming machine according to any one of features I9 to I12, wherein the limiting means is formed so as to cover the pivot support portion.

  According to the feature I13, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location of the trace means, it is easier to mount the release means compared to the configuration in which the pivot support location is arranged inside the installation location. It can be carried out. As a result, it is possible to improve workability when the release means is pivotally supported.

  In this case, since the pivot support location is arranged outside the installation location, it is easy to access the pivot support location. For this reason, it is easy to perform an illegal act with respect to a pivot support location.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the pivot support location is covered by the limiting means. This restricts access to the pivot support location. Therefore, the illegal act with respect to a pivot support location can be suppressed.

Feature I14. The release means is arranged so as to restrict the restriction means from being displaced to a position that does not cover the pivot support portion at the initial position.
The gaming machine according to I13, wherein the gaming machine is arranged at a position where the restriction is released or a position where the restriction is easily released by rotating in the specific direction.

  In the case where there is a restriction means for restricting access to the pivot support location, it is assumed that in order to access the pivot support location, an illegal act of displacing the restriction means to a position where the restriction means does not cover the pivot support location Is done.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the displacement of the restricting means to a position not covering the shaft support location is restricted by the releasing means. The regulation is released or easily released by rotating the release means in a specific direction. This makes it difficult to access the pivot support location without destroying the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of accessing the pivot support location and destroying the release means without destroying the trace means.

  Note that the configuration shown in the following features I35 to I39 may be applied to the configuration of this feature.

  Feature I15. The gaming machine according to Feature I9 or Feature I10, wherein the pivot support portion is disposed inside an installation location of the trace means.

  According to feature I15, since the pivot support portion is arranged inside the trace means, the pivot support portion is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the unauthorized action such as destruction of the pivot support portion is suppressed. can do.

Feature I16. An attachment portion (attachment base 293) to which the release means is attached;
The release means is disposed at a position where separation from the mounting portion is impossible or difficult to separate at the initial position, and is disposed at a position easily separated from the mounting portion by rotating in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features I9 to I15.

  According to the feature I16, the release means can be separated from the attachment portion by rotating the release means. As a result, it is possible to deal with the case where the release means is replaced. Therefore, versatility can be improved.

  Here, from the viewpoint of versatility, when the release means is configured to be separable from the mounting portion, an illegal act of illegally separating the release means can be considered. On the other hand, according to this feature, since it is necessary to rotate the release means in a stage before separating the release means, it is necessary to destroy the trace means in order to separate the release means. As a result, the trace means will be destroyed when an unauthorized separation of the release means is attempted, so that the fraudulent act can be suppressed, and if the fraudulent act is performed, the fact is It can be easily confirmed.

Feature I17. It is attached to the monitoring object so as to restrict the specific operation, and specific restriction means that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state (cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment) A cover member 511 for the eleventh embodiment, a cover member 611 for the twelfth embodiment, and a cover member 961) for the fifteenth embodiment;
The release means is formed such that when the release operation is performed on the specific restriction means, the release means can be displaced to a position where the trace means is destroyed in conjunction with the release operation. Thru | or the game machine of any one of I16.

  According to the feature I17, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to prevent the workability when the regular specific operation is performed during maintenance or the like from being deteriorated.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

Feature I18. The specific restriction means and the release means are provided separately, and the specific restriction means is configured to require a separation operation for separating from the monitoring target as the release operation,
Further, when the separation operation is performed on the specific restriction means, a connection means (sixth for connecting the release means to the specific restriction means so as to displace the trace means to a position to destroy the trace means. The claw portions 336 and 337 and the receiving portions 338 and 339 for the embodiment, and the hook portions 509 and 510 for the eleventh embodiment,
The connection means releases the connection by performing a predetermined connection release operation, and the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target, and the release means performs the release. The gaming machine according to Feature I17, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that the connection release operation can be performed in an undisclosed situation.

  As a configuration in which the specific restriction unit and the release unit are linked, for example, a configuration in which the specific restriction unit and the release unit are integrally formed is conceivable. However, when the specific restricting means and the releasing means are integrally formed, only one of them cannot be separated, so that it is not possible to deal with a case where individual replacement is performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the specific restricting means and the releasing means are provided separately, and both are connected via the connecting means. The connection can be released by performing a connection release operation. The connection release operation can be performed in a situation where the specific restriction unit is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release unit. As a result, the release means and the specific restriction means can be separated separately by performing the connection release operation in this situation. Therefore, it is possible to deal with individual exchange between the two.

  On the other hand, when the separation operation of the specific restriction means is performed in a state where both are connected, the specific restriction means is separated and the release means is displaced. Thereby, the inhibition state by the trace means is also released.

  In particular, it is preferable that “the specific restriction unit can perform the separation operation without displacing the release unit in the specific direction when the connection release operation is performed”. Thereby, the specific limiting means can be separated without destroying the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to replace the specific restricting means without destroying the trace means.

Feature I19. The specific limiting means is a cover means provided to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The game according to Feature I18, wherein the cover means is provided so that, when the connection release operation is performed, the separation operation can be performed without displacing the release means in the specific direction. Machine.

  According to the characteristic I19, the trace means is protected by the cover means as the specific restriction means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means.

  In such a configuration, since the state of the trace means is directly confirmed, there arises a situation where it is desired to remove only the cover means. That is, while the access to the trace means is restricted by the cover means, there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to confirm the state of the trace means. In this case, if the cover means is removed, the trace means is destroyed, and an inspection for confirming the state of the trace means cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to separate only the cover means by performing the connection release operation of the release means. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the trace means directly. Therefore, when it is desired to perform an inspection for removing the cover means and confirming the state of the trace means, the inspection can be suitably handled. Therefore, inconveniences that can be caused by providing the cover means can be avoided.

  In addition, since the cover means and the release means are provided separately, it is possible to easily protect the trace means by the cover means while disposing the destruction portion inside the installation place of the trace means. It becomes.

  Feature I20. The game machine according to Feature I19, wherein the release means is disposed within a range protected by the cover means.

  According to feature I20, the release means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, fraudulent acts on the release means such as destruction of the release means can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to suitably suppress new fraud that can occur due to the provision of the release means.

  In addition, as a specific configuration of this feature, a configuration in which “the cover means includes a wall portion that partitions and forms an accommodation region capable of accommodating at least a part of the trace means and the release means” is conceivable. .

Feature I21. The trace means includes a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information, and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) having a predetermined length and transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. Provided with a tag (IC tag 163),
The electronic tag is attached such that when the specific operation is performed, the antenna unit can be cut at a midpoint in the length direction,
The cover means reads the identification information by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag during a reading operation using the reader device that reads the identification information by receiving the radio wave. The gaming machine according to Feature I19 or Feature I20, characterized in that the position of the reader device is defined such that the reading position is at a position that is a predetermined distance or more away from the electronic tag. .

  According to the feature I21, since the monitoring target is provided with the electronic tag, the manager of the game hall or the like can check whether the normal identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be suitably managed.

  In this configuration, when a specific operation is performed, the antenna unit may be cut at an intermediate position in the length direction. In this case, the communication of the electronic tag becomes impossible, so that the manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact. .

  In addition, when the antenna portion is cut at an intermediate position in the length direction, communication is possible with the electronic tag, but it is assumed that the communicable distance is shortened. In this case, if the reading operation by the reader device is performed outside the communicable distance after the shortening, the fact of the fraudulent act can be recognized through the reading operation, but the reading operation is performed within the communicable distance after the shortening. If this happens, the fact of fraud cannot be recognized through the reading work.

  On the other hand, according to the present feature, the reading position when the identification information is read by the reader device from at least a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag by the cover unit is greater than or equal to a predetermined distance with respect to the electronic tag. The position of the reader device is defined so as to be separated from each other. As a result, if the game hall manager or the like decides to perform the reading operation with the reader device from a specific direction with respect to the electronic tag, if the antenna section is cut and the communicable distance becomes short, By grasping the fact that the identification information cannot be read by the reader device, it is possible to recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target.

Feature I22. The connecting means includes
A first engaging portion (claw portions 336 and 337 in the sixth embodiment, hook portions 509 and 510 in the eleventh embodiment) provided in the specific restricting means;
A second engagement portion provided in the release means and engageable with the first engagement portion (receiving portions 338 and 339 in the sixth embodiment, slit 532 in the eleventh embodiment) , 533), and
With
The specific restricting means and the releasing means are connected by the engagement of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion,
At least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is formed so as to be displaceable to a side where the engagement is released by applying an external force. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I22, the engagement can be released by displacing at least one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion to the side where the engagement is released as the connection release operation. As a result, the connection between the specific restricting means and the releasing means can be released without breaking. Therefore, for example, after the specific restriction means is once released, the same specific restriction means can be attached again.

Feature I23. When the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restriction unit guides the specific restriction unit so that the specific restriction unit passes through a predetermined specific path (periphery and surrounding portion of the opening 513). 321)
When the specific restricting means is attached to the monitoring target via the specific path, the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. The gaming machine according to Feature I22, wherein:

  According to the feature I23, a route when the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target is defined as the specific route by the guide unit, and the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target via the specific route. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are naturally engaged. Thereby, when the specific restricting unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restricting unit and the releasing unit are naturally connected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability associated with the connection.

  "The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed so as to be elastically deformable, and at least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion includes the specific restricting means. Is moved along the specific path, the first engagement portion slides with the second engagement portion, and one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion takes the other. It is preferable that a guide surface that is guided so as to be elastically deformed is formed on the overcoming side. According to this configuration, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is likely to occur, so that the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be suitably performed.

  Feature I24. The gaming machine according to any one of features I18 to I23, wherein the specific restriction means is attached to the monitoring target by being connected to the release means.

  According to the feature I24, the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target by being connected to the release unit. This eliminates the need for a configuration for attaching the specific restricting means to the monitoring target, thereby simplifying the configuration. Moreover, only the specific restriction means can be easily separated by releasing the connection by the connection means.

Feature I25. The connecting means connects the release means to the specific restricting means so that when the separation operation is performed on the specific restricting means, the trace means is displaced to a position to be destroyed accordingly. Connecting means (hook portions 509 and 510 in the eleventh embodiment),
Separately from the first connecting means, second connecting means for connecting the specific restricting means to the monitoring object so as to restrict the separation operation of the specific restricting means (the claw portions 521 and 522 in the eleventh embodiment). And box side receiving portions 523, 524),
The first connection means is configured to release the connection by performing a predetermined first connection release operation.
The second connection means is configured to release the connection by performing a predetermined second connection release operation.
The first connection means and the second connection means may be configured to perform the first connection release operation and the second connection in a situation where the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release means. 2. The gaming machine according to any one of features I18 to I23, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that a two-link release operation can be performed.

  According to the feature I25, when only the specific restriction unit is separated, it is necessary to perform the first connection release operation and the second connection release operation, so that the separation of only the specific restriction unit is complicated. Thereby, unauthorized separation of the specific restriction means can be suppressed.

Feature I26. The specific restriction means and the release means are provided separately,
Connecting means (the hook portions 609 and 610 and the engaging member 631 in the twelfth embodiment, the breaking protrusion 917 and the engaging recess 971 in the fifteenth embodiment) for connecting the specific restricting means and the releasing means. The two are integrally displaced by being connected by the connecting means,
Protecting means (twelfth twelfth) is provided so as to protect the connecting means around the connecting means, and an act of applying an external force to the connecting means to cancel the connected state is disabled or difficult to perform. A gaming machine according to Feature I17, comprising a cover member 611 in the embodiment and a cover member 961) in the fifteenth embodiment.

  According to the feature I26, since the connecting means for connecting the specific restricting means and the releasing means is provided, both can be integrally displaced.

  Here, when the connection between the two is released, the inhibition state is not released along with the release operation, and the trace means is not changed to the trace state. For this reason, since it becomes possible to perform cancellation | release operation, without destroying a trace means, it is unpreferable from a viewpoint of fraud suppression.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the protection means is provided, the act of releasing the connection can be suppressed. Thereby, the act of illegally releasing the connection by the connecting means can be suppressed.

Feature I27. The specific restricting means is a wall portion (internal space) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 612 in the twelfth embodiment, internal space 962 in the fifteenth embodiment) capable of accommodating the connecting means as the protection means. 612 and 962).
The gaming machine according to Feature I26, wherein the connecting means is accommodated in the accommodation area.

  According to feature I27, the coupling means is housed in the housing area. Thereby, since the access with respect to a connection means is restrict | limited, the unauthorized cancellation | release of a connection can be suppressed. In this case, since the specific restriction unit functions as a protection unit, the specific restriction unit can be multi-functional and the configuration can be simplified.

Feature I28. The specific restriction means includes an opening (opening 613) for opening the accommodation area, and is attached by moving the monitoring object in the attachment direction from the opening side.
The connecting means includes
A first engagement portion (hook portions 609, 610) provided in the release means and protruding in a direction opposite to the attachment direction;
A second engagement portion (engagement member 631) provided in the accommodation region of the specific restriction means and formed to be engageable with the first engagement portion;
With
The gaming machine according to Feature I27, wherein the first restricting portion and the second engaging portion are engaged to connect the specific restricting means and the releasing means.

  According to the feature I28, since the first engaging portion protrudes on the opposite side to the mounting direction of the specific restricting means, the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion in the situation where the specific restricting means is attached. Will be arranged on the back side with respect to the opening. As a result, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature I29. When the specific restricting unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restricting unit guides the specific restricting unit so that the specific restricting unit passes through a predetermined specific path (periphery and surrounding portion of the opening 613). 321)
When the specific restricting means is attached to the monitoring target via the specific path, the relative positional relationship between the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion is set so that the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are engaged. The gaming machine according to Feature I28, wherein:

  According to the feature I29, a route when the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target is defined as the specific route by the guide unit, and the specific restriction unit is attached to the monitoring target via the specific route. The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are naturally engaged. Thereby, when the specific restricting unit is attached to the monitoring target, the specific restricting unit and the releasing unit are naturally connected, so that it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability associated with the connection.

  In particular, in the configuration in which the engagement portion is provided in the accommodation area, an external force cannot be applied from the outside, and thus there is a disadvantage that the engagement work is difficult to perform. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is naturally performed, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  "The first engaging portion and the second engaging portion are formed so as to be elastically deformable, and at least one of the first engaging portion and the second engaging portion includes the specific restricting means. Is moved along the specific path, the first engagement portion slides with the second engagement portion, and one of the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion takes the other. It is preferable that a guide surface that is guided so as to be elastically deformed is formed on the overcoming side. According to this configuration, the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion is likely to occur, so that the engagement between the first engagement portion and the second engagement portion can be suitably performed.

Feature I30. Cover means (cover member 331 for the sixth embodiment, cover for the eleventh embodiment) that is attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means A member 511, a cover member 611 for the twelfth embodiment, and a cover member 961) in the fifteenth embodiment;
The release means is formed to be displaceable to a position where the trace means is destroyed in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I16.

  According to feature I30, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means.

  In such a configuration, the cover means may become an obstacle when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed.

  Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Note that the configuration described in any one of the features I20 to I29 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means”.

Feature I31. The cover means and the release means are provided separately,
A connecting means (sixth embodiment) for connecting the releasing means to the cover means so as to displace the trace means to a position to destroy the trace means when the separation operation is performed on the cover means. Claw portions 336 and 337 and receiving portions 338 and 339, and the eleventh embodiment includes hook portions 509 and 510),
The connection means releases the connection by performing a predetermined connection release operation, and the specific restriction means is not separated from the monitoring target, and the release means performs the release. The gaming machine according to Feature I30, wherein the gaming machine is provided so that the connection release operation can be performed in an undisclosed situation.

  As a configuration in which the cover unit and the release unit are interlocked, for example, a configuration in which the cover unit and the release unit are integrally formed can be considered. However, when the cover means and the release means are integrally formed, only one of them cannot be separated, so that it is not possible to deal with the case of individual replacement.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the cover means and the release means are provided separately, and both are connected via the connection means. The connection can be released by performing a connection release operation. The connection release operation can be performed in a situation where the specific restriction unit is not separated from the monitoring target and is not released by the release unit. As a result, the release means and the cover means can be individually separated by performing the connection release operation in this situation. Therefore, it is possible to deal with individual exchange between the two.

  On the other hand, when the cover means is separated in a state where both are connected, the cover means is separated and the release means is displaced. Thereby, the inhibition state by the trace means is also released.

  In addition, since the cover means and the release means are provided separately, it is possible to easily protect the trace means by the cover means while disposing the destruction portion inside the installation place of the trace means. It becomes.

  Feature I32. The game according to Feature I31, wherein the cover means is provided so that the separation operation can be performed without displacing the release means in the specific direction when the connection release operation is performed. Machine.

  When the cover means is provided, access to the trace means is restricted by the cover means, but there is a disadvantage that it is difficult to confirm the state of the trace means. In this case, if the cover means is separated, the trace means is destroyed, and an inspection for directly confirming the state of the trace means cannot be performed.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, it is possible to separate only the cover means by performing the connection release operation of the release means. Thereby, it is possible to easily confirm the state of the trace means directly. Therefore, it is possible to suitably cope with an inspection in which the cover means is separated and the state of the trace means is confirmed. Therefore, inconveniences that can be caused by providing the cover means can be avoided.

Feature I33. The specific operation preventing means (14th) is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and in order to release the restricted state, a release operation for displacing to the release position for releasing the restricted state is required. Cover member 821) in the embodiment of
The release means is disposed at a position that restricts the release operation of the specific operation blocking means at the initial position, and is displaced in the specific direction, thereby releasing the restriction or a position at which the restriction is easily released. The gaming machine according to any one of features I3 to I16, wherein

  According to the feature I33, since the specific operation blocking means is provided, it is necessary to perform a release operation prior to the specific operation. The release operation is restricted by the release means. The restriction is released by displacing the release means from the initial position in a specific direction. Thereby, the trace means is destroyed in the stage before the release operation. Therefore, the release operation can be easily performed as compared with the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed along with the release operation.

  Moreover, since it is impossible or difficult to perform the release operation without destroying the trace means, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of performing the specific operation without leaving a trace.

  Feature I34. The gaming machine according to feature I33, wherein the specific operation blocking means is a cover means provided to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means.

  According to the feature I34, the trace means is protected by the cover means as the specific operation blocking means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. Therefore, it is possible to increase the functionality of the specific operation blocking means.

  Further, the configuration limited by the feature I20 and the feature I21 may be applied to this feature.

Feature I35. The release means includes a destructive portion (destruction base portion 802) that is displaced as the release means is displaced in the specific direction and destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the trace means,
The cover means includes a wall portion that defines at least a part of an installation location of the trace means and an accommodation area (internal space 822) that can accommodate the destruction part, and at least one of the trace means is included in the accommodation area. Part and the destruction part,
The cover means includes an opening (slit 832, second arm opening 833, rotation opening 835) formed in the wall and through which the destruction portion can pass. The gaming machine of feature I34, characterized by

  According to the feature I35, at least a part of the trace means and the destruction portion are accommodated in the accommodation area of the cover means. Thereby, access to the trace means and the destruction part can be limited.

  In this case, by restricting access to the trace means and the destructive portion, it is possible to suppress illegal acts against these, while there is a disadvantage that the displacement of the destructive portion is restricted by the cover means. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the opening part through which the destruction part can pass is provided in the wall part that defines the accommodation region, the displacement of the destruction part is not hindered by the cover means. Yes. Thereby, it is possible to restrict access to the trace means and the destruction portion while allowing the destruction portion to be displaced.

Feature I36. The release means is disposed inside the installation location where the trace means is installed and opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as the initial position, and the release means Is displaced along with the displacement in the specific direction, and includes a destruction part (destruction base part 802) that destroys the trace means by contacting the trace means,
The destruction part is arranged in a state in which displacement in the specific direction is possible inside the installation place of the trace means as the initial position,
The cover means includes a wall portion that defines an accommodation area (internal space 822) capable of accommodating at least a part of the installation location of the trace means, and at least a part of the trace means and the destruction are included in the accommodation area. Part of the house,
In the wall portion, when the destruction portion is displaced in the specific direction, an opening (a slit 832, a second arm portion opening portion 833, a rotation portion) through which the destruction portion can pass is provided at the front side of the displacement. The gaming machine according to Feature I34, wherein an opening 835) is provided.

  According to the feature I36, since at least a part of the installation place of the trace means is accommodated by the cover means, the access to the trace means and the destruction portion arranged inside the installation place of the trace means is restricted. Can do.

  Further, since the destruction part is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, compared to the configuration in which the destruction part is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means, the cover means can be formed small, Space can be saved.

  In this case, there may be a disadvantage that the displacement of the destruction portion is limited by the cover means. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the opening portion through which the destruction portion can pass is provided in the portion on the front side of the displacement of the destruction portion in the wall portion that defines the accommodation region, the displacement of the destruction portion is provided. Is not disturbed by the cover means. Thereby, the destruction part can be displaced while ensuring the above-mentioned effect.

Feature I37. Guide means (such as a combination of the peripheral edge of the opening 823 and the surrounding part 321) that defines the cover means to move in a predetermined path in the attaching operation of the cover means;
A release-side engagement portion (second arm portion 804, protrusion 853) provided in the release means;
A cover-side engagement portion (first hook portion) that is provided on the cover means and regulates displacement of the cover means to the release position by contacting the release-side engagement portion from the front side of the specific path. 841, second hook portion 852),
When the cover means is disposed at the initial position through the specific path, when the cover side engagement part comes into contact with the release side engagement part from the original side of the specific path, the engagement parts An auxiliary surface (such as a hook-side inclined surface 841I) that assists the movement of the cover-side engagement portion to the front side of the specific path from the release-side engagement portion,
With
The game according to Feature I35 or Feature I36, wherein the release-side engagement portion is displaced to a side where the restriction is released or loosened with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. Machine.

  Displacement of the release means in a specific direction allows the cover means to be displaced to the release position. Normally, after the cover means is attached first, the release of the cover means is restricted so as to restrict the displacement to the release position. A configuration in which the means is arranged is conceivable. In this case, it becomes difficult to accommodate the destruction part in the accommodation area of the cover means or inside the installation place of the trace means, and there is a concern about an increase in size. However, if the mounting structure avoids the above inconvenience, there is a concern that the configuration is complicated and the workability of the cover means mounting work is lowered.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, when the cover means is attached, the cover means is guided by the guide means so as to pass through the specific path, and the cover side engaging portion is moved to the release side engaging portion from the original side of the specific path. Abut. In this case, the cover side engaging portion moves to the front side of the specific path while being assisted by the auxiliary surface. And the cover side engaging part contacts the cancellation | release side engaging part from the front side of a specific path | route. The displacement of the cover means to the release position is restricted by the contact from the front side of the specific path. The restriction is released or relaxed by displacing the release means in a specific direction. Thus, the release means is attached first, and then the displacement to the release position is regulated by the release means, and the cover means is attached so that the restriction is released by the displacement of the release means in a specific direction. Work can be done easily. Therefore, the above inconvenience can be avoided.

  Note that “releasing the engagement” may be, for example, a configuration in which a predetermined play can occur in the engagement between the engagement portion and the release means.

  Feature I38. The release means includes an operation portion (handle 814) exposed to the outside from the cover means through the opening in a situation where the destruction portion is accommodated by the cover means. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature I38, since the operation unit exposed to the outside from the cover unit is provided, the release unit can be displaced by gripping the operation unit or hooking the operation unit with a tool. Thereby, in the situation where the release means is accommodated by the cover means, an external force necessary for displacement can be easily applied to the release means. Therefore, in the situation where the destruction part is accommodated by the cover means, the release means can be easily displaced.

  In particular, since the operation portion is exposed to the outside through the opening that allows the release means to be displaced, it is not necessary to provide a separate opening in the cover means for the operation portion. Thereby, the structure of a cover means can be simplified.

  Feature I39. The wall portion is formed so as to sandwich at least a part of the trace means between the trace means when the trace means is installed. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to feature I39, in a situation where the cover means is attached, at least a part of the trace means is sandwiched between the installation location and the wall of the cover means. Thereby, since the shearing force applied when the release means is displaced increases, the trace means is easily destroyed. Therefore, destruction of the trace means can be easily performed.

  Moreover, since it is hard to produce a clearance gap between a trace means and a wall part, the fraudulent act which inserts a jig | tool from the said clearance gap can be suppressed.

Feature I40. The trace means includes a first installation part (front-side fixed base part 291) formed on a first component (front-side structure 283) that constitutes the monitoring object, and a second component (back side) that constitutes the monitoring object. Formed over the boundary (boundary 297) with the second installation portion (back-side fixed base portion 292) that is formed in the structural body 284) and is opposed to the first installation portion,
The release means is provided so as to be sandwiched between the first installation part and the second installation part, and the first installation part and the second installation part are coupled by a coupling tool (screw 319). The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I39, wherein separation from both installation portions is prevented.

  According to the feature I40, the release unit can be fixed using a configuration in which the first installation unit and the second installation unit are coupled by the coupling tool.

Feature I41. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
When the cancellation state is canceled, the canceling unit is likely to cause the electronic tag to be damaged so that it is difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag or the identification information cannot be read. The gaming machine according to any one of features I1 to I40, wherein:

  According to the feature I41, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by checking whether or not the regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the inhibition state of the trace means is released by the release means, it becomes difficult to read the identification information from the electronic tag, or the identification information cannot be read. A manager of the game hall can recognize that there is a possibility that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping the fact.

Feature I42. The antenna unit includes a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
The game machine according to Feature I41, wherein the release means makes it easier to cause a breakage in the disabled state generation unit when the inhibition state is released.

  According to the feature I42, when the inhibition state is released, the unusable state generation unit in the antenna unit is easily destroyed. In this case, it is possible for a game hall manager or the like to easily recognize that an illegal act has been performed on the monitoring target by grasping that the identification information cannot be read.

Feature I43. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
It has an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side and has a brittleness such that when it is peeled off from the pasting area, the base sheet (base sheet 161) has a brittleness so that it is destroyed. A seal member (sealing seal 160) to which an electronic tag is attached;
The seal member is pasted so as to straddle a predetermined boundary (boundary 297) of the monitoring target (main control device 281),
The release means cuts the seal member along the boundary,
A feature I1 to I1 characterized by comprising an enclosing frame (enclosed portion 321) that protrudes from the affixing region to which the seal member is affixed and that surrounds the affixing region and guides the affixing position of the seal member The gaming machine according to any one of features I42.

  According to the feature I43, since the seal member is pasted so as to cross the boundary, the specific operation is hindered by the seal member. For this reason, when performing a specific operation, it is necessary to cut or peel off the sealing member along the boundary. In this case, if the seal member is to be peeled off, the seal member may be torn, and if the seal member is torn, it is expected that the antenna portion is cut accordingly. Therefore, according to this structure, the fraud detection effect by sticking the sealing member with an electronic tag is heightened.

  In this configuration, by sticking the seal member to the region surrounded by the surrounding frame, the positional relationship between the boundary and the sealing member and the positional relationship between the boundary and the antenna portion are naturally set to a predetermined positional relationship. Thereby, workability | operativity in the case of sticking a sealing member can be improved.

  In addition, since the surrounding frame is formed so as to protrude from the pasting region, even if an attempt is made to peel off the sealing member for fraud, it is difficult to perform the peeling action by the surrounding frame. Thereby, it is difficult to cancel the inhibition state by the seal member. Moreover, since complicated stress is easily applied to the seal member when the seal member is peeled off, the seal member is easily broken and the antenna portion is easily cut accordingly. Therefore, the act of peeling off the sealing member without leaving a trace can be suppressed.

  In this case, fraudulent acts can be suitably suppressed, but there is a concern that workability may deteriorate when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like. On the other hand, according to this feature, since the release means for cutting the seal member along the boundary of the monitoring target is provided, it is possible to avoid a decrease in workability. Accordingly, it is possible to suitably suppress the act of illegally peeling off the seal member, and to suppress a decrease in workability when a specific operation is properly performed.

  Further, it is preferable that “the releasing means is arranged so as to constitute a part of the surrounding frame”. In this case, it becomes possible to arrange the release means at a predetermined installation location without interference between the release means and the surrounding frame.

  The feature group I is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted. This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  In addition, for any one of the configurations of the features I1 to I43, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, and the above A configuration limited by any one of the features G1 to G2, the features H1 to H7, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following features N1 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature J1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (first member) that is pivotally supported at a predetermined location and abuts against the trace means when rotating from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined direction with the pivotal support as a center. 13 has a destruction base portion 312, and in the fourteenth embodiment has a destruction base portion 802), and the destruction portion destroys the trace means, thereby releasing the inhibition state. (Destructive member 311 in the thirteenth embodiment, destructive member 801 in the fourteenth embodiment),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature J1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, the release means is pivotally supported with respect to the monitoring target, and the destruction portion contacts the trace means as the release means rotates. Along with the rotation of the release means, a pressing force based on the rotation of the release means is applied to the trace means, and the trace means is destroyed. In this case, since the pressing force is easily applied to the trace means as compared with the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed by sliding the release means, the trace means can be easily destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  The feature J1 is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal sticker that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted. This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  Note that the configuration limited in any one of the features I10 to I16 may be applied to the configuration of the feature J1. In addition, a configuration limited by any one of the above characteristics I4 to I8 and I17 to I43 may be applied. In this case, “displacement” is replaced with “rotation”.

  Further, with respect to the configuration of the feature J1, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, the features G1 to G2, and the above A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H7, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following features N1 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature K1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is, a gaming machine provided with a trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
It is formed so as to be displaceable in a predetermined specific direction from a predetermined initial position, and the release means for destroying the trace means by the displacement in the specific direction and releasing the inhibition state (fourteenth embodiment) Breaking member 601) in form,
The specific operation preventing means (14th) is provided so as to restrict the specific operation, and in order to release the restricted state, a release operation for displacing to the release position for releasing the restricted state is required. Cover member 821) in the embodiment of
With
The release means is disposed at a position that restricts the release operation of the specific operation blocking means at the initial position, and is displaced in the specific direction, thereby releasing the restriction or a position at which the restriction is easily released. A gaming machine that is arranged in

  According to the characteristic K1, since the specific operation blocking means is provided, it is necessary to perform a release operation prior to the specific operation. The release operation is restricted by the release means. The restriction is released or easily released by displacing the release means from the initial position in a specific direction. As a result, the trace means is destroyed in the stage before the release operation is performed. Therefore, the force required for the release operation is reduced compared to the configuration in which the trace means is destroyed along with the release operation, so that the release operation can be easily performed. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  Moreover, since it is impossible or difficult to perform the release operation without destroying the trace means, it is possible to suppress an illegal act of performing the specific operation without leaving a trace.

  The feature K1 is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such fraudulent acts, for example, fraud countermeasures such as pasting a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies constituting the board box and leave a trace when peeled off. Is adopted. This fraud countermeasure assists the confirmation work when confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the fact that the control board has been replaced. There is.

  Here, in the game arcade, the control board may be inspected by an external engine or the like, and it may be necessary to open the board box for the inspection. In this case, in the situation where the seal seal is pasted so as to straddle a plurality of case bodies, since the opening of the substrate box is hindered by the seal seal, it is necessary to peel off the seal seal when opening the substrate box, The work becomes complicated.

  Note that a configuration limited to any one of the features I4 to I16, I34 to I43, and the feature J1 may be applied to the feature K1. Further, with respect to the configuration of the feature K1, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, the features G1 to G2, and the above A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H7, the following features L1 to L33, the following features M1 to M9, and the following features N1 to N8 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature L1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 911 in the fifteenth embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined direction; A release means (breaking member 910) that releases the inhibition state by contacting the surface to be destroyed (side surface region 296 in the fifteenth embodiment) formed on the trace means and destroying the trace means; ,
With
An edge (cutting edge 951) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 952) that comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A second inclined portion (second inclined portion 953) that is provided separately from the first inclined portion and abuts in a state inclined with respect to the surface to be destroyed when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided in addition to the first inclined portion, for example, a predetermined portion can be intentionally cut, or the destruction portion can be reduced in size. In addition, the inclination angle can be increased. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

Feature L2. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 911 in the fifteenth embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined direction; A release means (breaking member 910) for releasing the inhibition state by contacting the surface to be destroyed (side region 296) formed on the trace means and destroying the trace means;
With
An edge (cutting edge 951) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 952) that comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A second inclined portion (second inclined portion 953) that comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed in an inclined state or an angle different from the first inclined portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L2, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion having a different inclination direction or angle with respect to the surface to be broken compared to the first inclined portion are provided, for example, a predetermined location is intentionally Can be cut, or the inclination angle can be increased while reducing the size of the destruction portion. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

Feature L3. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A destructive portion (destructive base portion 911 in the fifteenth embodiment) that comes into contact with the trace means when displaced from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined direction; A release means (breaking member 910) for releasing the inhibition state by contacting the surface to be destroyed (side region 296) formed on the trace means and destroying the trace means;
With
An edge (cutting edge 951) that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the surface to be destroyed from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion,
A first inclined portion (first inclined portion 952) formed to be inclined so that a portion relatively close to and a portion far from the surface to be broken is generated;
A second inclination formed by inclining to form a portion relatively near and a portion far from the surface to be broken, and inclined at a different angle or in a different direction from the first inclined portion. Part (second inclined part 953),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature L3, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Here, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided at the edge of the breaking portion, that is, the edge portion, if the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, one of the first inclined portion or the second inclined portion is provided. The part comes into contact with the surface to be destroyed. Thereby, since the contact range becomes narrow, the pressing force against the surface to be broken increases. Further, since the contact portion between the destruction portion and the trace means is displaced with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, the trace means is gradually destroyed. Therefore, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Therefore, when performing a specific operation for inspection or the like, the specific operation can be suitably performed.

  In such a configuration, since the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion having a different inclination direction or angle with respect to the surface to be broken compared to the first inclined portion are provided, for example, a predetermined location is intentionally Can be cut, or the inclination angle can be increased while reducing the size of the destruction portion. Thereby, destruction of a desired trace means can be performed.

  Feature L4. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L3, wherein the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are formed on the same plane.

  According to the feature L4, the destruction portion can be reduced in size.

  Feature L5. When the edge is formed only by the inclination of the first inclined portion, the dimension in the specific direction between the shortest distance portion of the edge with respect to the fracture surface and the longest distance portion with respect to the fracture surface. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L4, wherein the second inclined portion is formed so as to be smaller.

  According to the feature L5, the amount of displacement of the release means in the specific direction required for destruction of the trace means can be reduced. Thereby, destruction of a trace means can be performed easily.

Feature L6. In the breaking portion, a tip portion (tip portion 992) pointed in the specific direction by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion is formed,
The relative position of the tip portion with respect to the specific location is set so that the tip portion abuts against a specific location predetermined in the trace means when the release means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L5.

  According to the feature L6, the tip end portion comes into contact with the specific location, so that the contact range is reduced. Thereby, since the pressing force given to a specific location is raised, a specific location can be destroyed easily.

  Moreover, since a specific location can be destroyed preferentially, the trace means can be suitably destroyed.

  Note that, for example, when the high strength portion and the low strength portion are formed so that the strength is relatively high on the surface to be broken, the high strength portion may be a “specific portion”. When there is a place where the trace is easy to confirm when it is destroyed in comparison with other places on the surface, the place may be a “specific place”.

Feature L7. The edge is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The first inclined portion is inclined so as to enter a direction opposite to the specific direction from one end portion of the both end portions toward the intermediate portion,
Any of the features L1 to L5, wherein the second inclined portion is inclined so as to enter a direction opposite to the specific direction from the other end portion of the both end portions toward the intermediate portion. A gaming machine according to claim 1.

  According to the characteristic L7, the protrusion of the destruction part in the specific direction can be suppressed, and the downsizing of the destruction part can be achieved. In this case, since both end portions of the destruction portion are the front side in the specific direction, the trace means is destroyed from both end portions of the destruction portion.

Feature L8. The first inclined portion has an outer end at the same position in the intersecting direction with respect to the corresponding end of the both ends in the intersecting direction on the surface to be broken or a position outside the same. It is formed to become,
The second inclined portion is located at the same position in the intersecting direction with respect to the corresponding end portion of the both end portions in the intersecting direction on the surface to be broken or at a position outside the second inclined portion. The gaming machine according to Feature L7, wherein the gaming machine is formed to be

  According to the feature L8, the trace means is broken from both ends in the direction in which the edge is formed on the surface to be broken by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. Thereby, the inconvenience that the end portion of the trace means remains without being destroyed and the inhibition state is not released can be avoided.

  Feature L9. The operation of inclining the other end side with the one end side as a fulcrum in the both end portions of the edge is a unit operation, and the release means is repeated while repeating the unit operation so that the fulcrum side is alternately changed. The gaming machine according to Feature L7 or Feature L8, characterized in that it has a structure for unit operation that can be displaced in a specific direction.

  According to the feature L9, by performing the unit operation, one end is a fulcrum, the other end is a power point, and the contact point between the inclined portion provided on the other end side and the trace means is an action point. Therefore, the pressing force on the contact portion is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Further, since both end portions of the destruction portion are on the front side in the specific direction, destruction by the first inclined portion and destruction by the second inclined portion are alternately performed for each unit operation. Thereby, since the unit operation that does not cause the destruction of the trace means is unlikely to occur, it is possible to suppress a decrease in workability that may be caused by the unit operation.

Feature L10. Walls (front-side pasting plate portion 301, back-side pasting plate portion 304, each opposing plate) that define an accommodation area in which the destruction portion can be accommodated are installed at the installation location (the pasting base 293) where the trace means is placed. Parts 901, 902, 906, 907),
The breaking portion is disposed in the accommodating area as the initial position, in a state displaceable toward the outside of the accommodating area as the specific direction,
The gaming machine according to Feature L9, wherein an inner wall surface of the wall portion and the destruction portion are in contact with each other or in close proximity via a predetermined gap.

  According to the feature L10, the trace means is destroyed by displacing the destruction part from the inside to the outside of the accommodation region. In this case, since the destructive part has only to be pulled outward, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released.

  Further, since the destruction part is accommodated in the accommodation area, the destruction part is in a protected state, and it is possible to suppress illegal actions to the release means such as destruction of the destruction part and to save space. it can.

  In such a configuration, the wall portion and the destruction portion that define the accommodation region are in contact with each other or close to each other with a predetermined gap, so that it is difficult to insert a jig between the wall portion and the destruction portion. It has become. Thereby, the illegal act which inserts a jig | tool from between a wall part and a destruction part can be suppressed. In this case, when the destructive part is displaced in a specific direction, the destructive part and the inner wall surface of the wall part interfere with each other, and it is difficult to perform the displacement.

  On the other hand, by applying the configuration of the feature L9, the trace means can be suitably destroyed even when the interference occurs.

Feature L11. Cover means (cover member 961) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means is formed so as to be displaced in a specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target and to be displaced to a position to destroy the trace means. And
The cover means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 964, 965, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 962) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 963);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to Feature L9 or Feature L10, wherein an inner wall surface of the wall portion and an installation location of the trace means are in contact with or close to each other through a predetermined gap.

  According to the feature L11, by storing the trace means in the storage area, the trace means is protected by the cover means. As a result, access to the trace means is restricted, so that illegal acts on the trace means can be prevented or hesitant.

  Further, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released. Thereby, the fall of workability | operativity when canceling the inhibition state of a trace means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, since the gap between the inner wall surface of the wall portion forming the accommodation region and the installation location of the trace means is set small, it is possible to suppress fraud such as inserting a jig through the gap. it can. In this case, when performing the separation operation of the cover means, the inner wall surface of the wall portion and the installation location of the trace means may interfere with each other, resulting in inconvenience that it is difficult to perform the separation operation.

  On the other hand, the above-described inconvenience can be avoided by applying the configuration of the feature L9.

  Feature L12. The gaming machine according to Feature L11, wherein a gap between the installation location of the trace means and the wall portion is set to gradually increase as the separation operation is performed.

  According to the feature L12, since the distance between the installation location of the trace means and the wall portion is set to gradually increase as the separation operation is performed, the operating range of the destruction portion in the release means interlocking with the cover means is large. Become. Therefore, it is possible to suitably perform destruction of the trace means by the release means while exhibiting the effect of the feature L10.

Feature L13. Guide means (regulating convex portions 921, 922 and restricting opening portions 923, 924) that regulate the displacement of the destruction portion in the specific direction,
The guide means is displaced in the specific direction so that an operation range of the unit operation is increased until the release means is displaced from the initial position to a release position for releasing the trace state of the trace means. The gaming machine according to any one of the features L9 to L12, wherein the regulation is canceled or gradually relaxed.

  In view of the workability of destruction of the trace means, it is preferable that the operation range is large. However, if the operating range is enlarged, the position of the destruction part with respect to the trace means may be displaced, and a part different from the desired part may be destroyed and the inhibition state may not be released. In particular, when the destruction is performed from both ends of the to-be-destructed surface as in the feature L8, the destruction from the both ends is not performed due to the above-described misalignment, and the effect as illustrated in the feature L8 may not be obtained. obtain.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, in a situation in which the release means is disposed closer to the initial position, the displacement of the release means is defined in a specific direction, so that the displacement of the destruction portion with respect to the trace means hardly occurs. .

  On the other hand, as the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the regulation in the specific direction is released or loosened in stages, thereby increasing the operating range. Thereby, the workability | operativity which concerns on destruction of a trace means can be aimed at, avoiding the said inconvenience.

Feature L14. The guide means allows the displacement of the breaking portion in the specific direction, the displacement of the edge in both directions, and the displacement in a direction perpendicular to both the specific direction and the both directions. Is to regulate
As the releasing means is displaced in a specific direction, the displacement in both directions is canceled so that the range in which the edge can be displaced in both directions increases while restricting the displacement in the orthogonal direction. Alternatively, the gaming machine according to Feature L13, which is loosened in stages.

  According to the feature L14, the restriction of the displacement of the destruction part in the both end directions is released or gradually loosened, so that the displaceable range of the destruction part in the both end directions becomes large. Thereby, since the operation range of the destruction part in unit operation becomes large, the effect of feature L13 can be acquired.

  On the other hand, the displacement of the fractured portion in the direction orthogonal to both the specific direction and the direction between the both ends of the edge is maintained in a regulated state, and thus the displacement of the fractured portion in that direction occurs. Hateful. As a result, it is possible to achieve both of the effects of optimizing the destruction of the trace means through the unit operation and suppressing the displacement of the destruction portion.

Feature L15. A convex portion (saw portion 954) that is provided between the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion and is convex toward the specific direction is formed by a pair of inclined portions having different inclination directions. And
The features L7 to L14 are characterized in that the relative position between the two is set so that the convex portion comes into contact with a predetermined specific place in the trace means when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature L15, the tip end of the convex portion comes into contact with the specific portion, so that the contact range is reduced. Thereby, the pressing force given to a specific location is raised. Therefore, a specific location can be destroyed suitably.

  In addition, it is good for the inclination angle of the inclination part which forms a convex part to be larger than the 1st inclination part and the 2nd inclination part. Thereby, destruction of a specific location can be performed easily.

  In addition, for example, when a high-strength location and a low-strength location are formed so that the strength is relatively high on the fracture surface, the high-strength location may be a “specific location”. When there is a place where the trace is easy to confirm when it is destroyed in comparison with other places on the surface, the place may be a “specific place”.

Feature L16. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) including a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) that transmits a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 160) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side;
With
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (an affixing region 294) provided on the monitoring target,
An enclosure (enclosure 950) that is provided corresponding to the application surface and guides the application position of the seal member so that the surface to be destroyed of the seal member faces the edge of the destruction part;
When the seal member is affixed to the affixing surface, the encircling part is arranged so that the affixed surface is wider than the area of the seal member within a range in which the fractured surface does not deviate from the position facing the edge. Forming,
When the sticking position of the seal member varies within the range of the surrounding portion, the position of the specific portion varies within the specific range,
Further, the feature L15 is characterized in that a plurality of the convex portions are arranged along the edge so that a region where the convex portion is formed at the edge is opposed to the whole or substantially the entire region of the specific range. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature L16, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  Here, the enclosing position guides the seal member so that the seal member is attached to the position where the surface to be destroyed of the seal member faces the edge of the destruction portion. Thereby, the workability | operativity at the time of sticking a sealing member can be aimed at.

  Further, since the enclosing portion is formed such that the application surface is larger than the area of the seal member within a range where the surface to be destroyed and the edge face each other, a space is created in the application position of the seal member with respect to the application surface. Thereby, the sticking operation | work of a sealing member can be performed easily. In this case, the clearance may cause the inconvenience that the sticking position of the seal member fluctuates within the range of the encircling portion, and the convex portion does not contact the specific portion. However, if the inclination angle of the inclined portion that forms the convex portion is reduced in order to increase the region of the convex portion, the contact range between the specific portion and the convex portion increases, and the ease of destruction of the trace means decreases. To do.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the convex portion is formed along the edge so that the region in which the convex portion is formed is opposed to the entire or substantially entire region of the specific range corresponding to the change in the position of the specific portion. Are arranged side by side, it is possible to cope with the above-mentioned positional deviation while ensuring the ease of destruction of the trace means.

  Feature L17. The release means is a trace giving means (a fracture portion 915, an extension portion 914) that abuts a location different from the destruction portion and leaves a trace that an external force is applied to the different location when displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features L1 to L16.

  According to the feature L17, when the release unit is displaced in a specific direction, a trace by the trace applying unit is formed in addition to the portion to be broken by the broken part. Thereby, since a plurality of trace locations are formed, it can be easily confirmed visually that the inhibition state of the trace means has been released.

  Feature L18. The trace imparting means is configured so that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the trace is in contact with the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the edge is in contact with the surface to be broken. The gaming machine according to Feature L17, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to feature L18, the start timing of the destruction by the destruction portion and the start timing of the external force application by the trace applying means are different, so the load related to the start of the destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the external force application by the trace application means The load related to the start of is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means etc. which may arise by providing a trace provision means can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the trace imparting unit to the trace unit in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the edge to the trace unit” Can be considered.

  Feature L19. The trace imparting means abuts on the surface to be destroyed after the destruction means is destroyed by the destruction part by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, and the part destroyed by the destruction part The gaming machine according to Feature L18, wherein the gaming machine is an expansion unit (expansion unit 914) that expands.

  According to the feature L19, after the trace means is destroyed by the destruction part, the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part. Thereby, since the range of a destruction location becomes large, it can confirm easily that the destruction of the trace means was performed.

Feature L20. The trace means includes a sealing member (sealing seal 160) having a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) formed on one surface thereof,
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (an affixing region 294) provided on the monitoring target,
The destructive portion is to release the inhibition state by cutting the seal member so that a first region and a second region sandwiching a predetermined boundary on the surface to be destructed of the seal member,
The game machine according to Feature L19, wherein the expansion unit is configured to expand the boundary in a direction intersecting a direction in which the boundary extends.

  According to the feature L20, the obstructed state is released by cutting the broken surface of the seal member by the breaking portion. In this case, a boundary is formed as a trace of destruction. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether the release means has been displaced and whether the specific operation has been performed by confirming whether the boundary is formed.

  In such a configuration, the boundary extends in a direction intersecting with the extending direction by the extension portion. Thereby, the boundary as a broken part becomes conspicuous, and the boundary can be easily confirmed. Therefore, the workability of the confirmation work can be improved.

  Feature L21. The extension portion is formed so as to gradually contact the seal member in a direction intersecting the boundary from the boundary and away from the boundary in accordance with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to Feature L20, wherein

  According to the feature L21, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the boundary is pushed and widened in the direction intersecting by the extension portion. In this case, since the contact range between the expansion portion and the seal member is narrow, the pressing force applied to the seal member is increased. Thereby, the boundary can be easily expanded.

  Feature L22. In any one of the features L19 to L21, the extension portion is provided at a site on the original side in the specific direction with respect to the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion in the destruction portion. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature L22, the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion are provided on the front side in the specific direction in the destruction portion, the extended portion is provided on the original side, and the positional relationship between the two is defined. Displacement in a specific direction is performed. Thereby, by displacing the release means, after the destruction by the first inclined portion and the second inclined portion is naturally performed, the expanded portion is expanded by the expanding portion. Therefore, the complexity of work can be avoided.

Feature L23. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The gaming machine according to any one of features L19 to L22, wherein the extension portion is in contact with at least a part of the antenna portion.

  According to the feature L23, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall and the like can appropriately monitor the target by confirming whether or not regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the antenna part comes into contact with the extension part and is destroyed by the contact. Thereby, since the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short, communicable distance becomes short or communication becomes impossible. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the specific operation has been performed by performing the above confirmation work.

Feature L24. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 160) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side;
With
The seal member is attached to the monitoring target;
The antenna unit is provided with a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the positional relationship between the destruction part and the seal member is set so that the destruction part destroys the impossible state generation part,
The expanding portion is applied to a portion around the unusable state generating portion in the seal member so as to expand a broken portion destroyed by the breaking portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features L19 to L23, wherein the gaming machine is in contact with each other.

  According to the feature L24, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not the legitimate identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the disabling state generating part is destroyed by the destroying part, and radio waves cannot be transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize that the release means has been displaced and the specific operation has been performed by grasping that the identification information reading operation cannot be performed.

  In addition, when the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part, the destruction part becomes conspicuous. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that the displacement of the release means and the specific operation have been performed visually.

Feature L25. The extension portion is disposed inside the installation location (the sticking base 293) where the trace means is installed and on the side opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as the initial position. ,
In the case where the extension portion is displaced at the installation location of the trace means so that the extension portion is displaceable toward the side where the trace means is installed outside the installation location as the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features L19 to L24, wherein an opening (expansion region 908) through which the extension portion can pass is formed in a portion on the front side of the displacement.

  According to the feature L25, since the extended portion is arranged inside the trace means, the extended portion is protected by the installation location of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as destroying the extended portion. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing an extended part can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the extended portion is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, the overall size becomes compact as compared with the configuration in which the extended portion is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means. Thereby, space saving can be achieved.

  In such a configuration, an opening through which the extension part can pass is provided so that the movement of the release means in the specific direction is not hindered by the extension part. Thereby, interference with the installation part of an extended part and a trace means is avoided.

Feature L26. The destruction part is a first destruction part;
The trace means includes a portion defining a first outer peripheral surface (side surface region 296) facing a predetermined direction as an outer peripheral surface of the trace means, and a second outer peripheral surface (surface region) facing a direction different from the first outer peripheral surface. 295) is provided, and
The first destructive portion is for destructing a portion defining the first outer peripheral surface when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction.
Any of the features L1 to L16, wherein the release means includes a second destruction portion (breaking portion 915) for breaking a portion defining the second outer peripheral surface separately from the first destruction portion. The gaming machine according to 1.

  According to the feature L26, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the destruction location by the second destruction portion is formed separately from the destruction location by the first destruction portion. These broken portions are formed on different outer peripheral surfaces in the trace means. Thereby, since the destruction location as a trace location is easy to see, it can confirm easily visually that the inhibition state of the trace means was cancelled | released.

  Feature L27. The second destructive portion is configured such that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the edge contacts the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the edge contacts the destroyed surface. The gaming machine according to Feature L26, wherein a positional relationship with the trace means is set.

  According to the feature L27, since the start timing of destruction by the first destruction portion and the start timing of destruction by the second destruction portion are different, the load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the first destruction portion, The load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction part is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means which may arise by providing the 2nd destruction part can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “in the specific direction, the shortest distance from the second fracture portion to the trace means is set to be different from the shortest distance from the edge to the fracture surface. "A configuration is conceivable.

Feature L28. The first destructive portion is arranged as the initial position in a state in which displacement in the specific direction is possible on the inner side of the installation location (the pasting base 293) where the trace means is installed,
In the situation where the first destructive portion is disposed at the initial position, the second destructive portion is provided with the trace means through an opening (breaking portion opening 918) provided at the installation location of the trace means. Is provided so as to protrude in a direction intersecting the specific direction outside the installation location of
The opening is formed to extend in the specific direction so that the second destruction portion can be displaced in the specific direction,
The part that defines the first outer peripheral surface is installed at a position in the middle of the displacement in the specific direction of the first destruction part at the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature L26 or Feature L27, wherein the part that defines the second outer peripheral surface is installed so as to straddle the opening.

  According to the feature L28, since the first destruction part is arranged inside the trace means, the first destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the first destruction part is released. It is possible to suppress cheating on the means. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a portion of the portion defining the first outer peripheral surface that is installed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the first destruction portion is broken. Further, the second breaking portion is also displaced in a specific direction along the opening in accordance with the displacement of the release means. In this case, the site | part which straddles the opening part among the site | parts which prescribe | regulate a 2nd outer peripheral surface is destroyed by the 2nd destruction part. Thereby, the site | part which prescribes | regulates a 2nd outer peripheral surface will be destroyed.

  In addition, in the structure provided with the mounting part by which the said monitoring object is mounted, and the said monitoring object is mounted with respect to the said mounting part, the said 2nd destruction part is provided with the said mounting part. It is good to protrude on the opposite side to the side. Thereby, since it is easy for a manager of a game hall or the like to visually confirm the location where the second destruction portion is provided, it is possible to improve the workability of the confirmation work.

Feature L29. The opening is a first opening;
A second opening (boundary 909) through which the first destructive portion can pass is provided at a position on the front side of the displacement when the first destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction at the installation location of the trace means. And
The first opening and the second opening communicate with each other;
The gaming machine according to Feature L28, wherein the portion that defines the first outer peripheral surface is disposed across both the first opening and the second opening.

  According to the feature L29, when the second destruction part is displaced in a specific direction along the first opening, the destruction part by the second destruction part and the destruction part by the first destruction part are continuous. Thereby, the destruction location by the 1st destruction part will be expanded. Therefore, the destruction location becomes conspicuous, and the visual confirmation of whether or not the specific operation has been performed can be suitably performed.

Feature L30. The first destructive portion is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The releasing means performs the unit operation so that the side serving as a fulcrum is alternately changed, with the operation of inclining the other end side in the state where one end side is the fulcrum of both ends of the first destruction portion as a unit operation. Comprising a unit operation structure that allows the release means to be displaced in the specific direction while repeating;
The gaming machine according to Feature L28 or Feature L29, wherein a predetermined gap is formed between a peripheral edge of the opening and the second destruction portion so as to enable the unit operation.

  According to the feature L30, by performing the unit operation, one end portion is a fulcrum, the other end portion is a power point, and the contact portion between the inclined portion provided on the other end side and the trace means is a point of action. Therefore, the pressing force on the contact portion is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Here, since a predetermined gap is generated between the opening and the second destruction portion, when the unit operation is performed, the second destruction portion and the periphery of the opening are unlikely to interfere with each other. Thereby, the inconvenience that the unit operation is hindered by the second destruction portion can be avoided.

Feature L31. It is attached to the monitoring target so as to restrict the specific operation, and includes specific restriction means (cover member 961) that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state,
The release means and the specific restriction means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 971) provided in the specific restricting means,
When the release operation is performed on the specific restriction unit, the release unit is configured to be displaced in the specific direction in conjunction with the release operation and destroy the trace unit. The gaming machine according to any one of L30.

  According to the feature L31, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to prevent the workability when the regular specific operation is performed during maintenance or the like from being deteriorated.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

  In such a configuration, the release means and the specific restriction means are connected via engagement between the second destruction part and a receiving part provided in the specific restriction means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

Feature L32. The specific restriction means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 964, 965, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 962) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 963);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to Feature L31, wherein the receiving part is formed in a portion on the back side of the accommodation area with respect to the opening.

  According to the characteristic L32, the receiving part is formed on the back side of the accommodation area with the opening as a reference. Thereby, the engaging part of a 2nd destruction part and a receiving part will be arrange | positioned in the back | inner side on the basis of an opening part. Thereby, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature L33. Cover means (cover member 961) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means and the cover means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engagement recess 971) provided in the cover means,
The release means is configured to displace the trace means by displacing in the specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of L26 to L30.

  According to the feature L33, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. In this case, when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means, the cover means may become an obstacle. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed. Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Here, the release means and the cover means are connected through engagement between the second breaking portion and a receiving portion provided in the cover means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

  Note that the configuration described in the feature L32 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means” and “release operation” is replaced with “separation operation”.

  Further, with respect to any one configuration of the features L1 to L33, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, and the above A configuration limited by any one of the characteristics G1 to G2, the characteristics H1 to H7, the characteristics I1 to I43, the characteristics J1, and the characteristics K1 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature M1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means (destroying member 910) for destroying the trace means by displacing from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined specific direction and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The release means is
A destruction part (destruction base part 911) that abuts the trace means by displacing in the specific direction and causes the trace means to break to release the inhibition state;
Provided separately from the destructive portion, and by applying a displacement in the specific direction, a trace imparting means (a fracture portion 915 that contacts with a different location from the destructive portion and leaves a trace that an external force is applied to the different location. , Extension 914),
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature M1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily.

  Further, since the release means having the destruction portion is provided, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, since the trace imparting means is provided, the trace by the trace imparting means is formed in the trace means separately from the portion to be destroyed by the destruction portion. Thereby, since a plurality of trace locations are formed, it can be easily confirmed visually that the inhibition state of the trace means has been released. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Feature M2. The trace imparting means is configured such that when the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the trace is in contact with the trace means at a timing different from the timing when the destruction portion is in contact with the trace means. The gaming machine according to Feature M1, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to the feature M2, since the start timing of destruction by the destruction portion and the start timing of external force application by the trace applying means are different, the load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction portion and the external force application by the trace application means The load related to the start of is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means etc. which may arise by providing a trace provision means can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the trace imparting means to the trace means in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the destruction portion to the trace means” Configuration is conceivable.

  Feature M3. The trace imparting means abuts on the trace means after the destruction means is destroyed by the destruction portion by the displacement of the release means in the specific direction, and a portion destroyed by the destruction portion is detected. The gaming machine according to Feature M2, which is an expansion unit (expansion unit 914) to be expanded.

  According to the feature M3, after the trace means is destroyed by the destruction part, the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part. Thereby, since the range of a destruction location becomes large, it can confirm easily that the destruction of the trace means was performed.

Feature M4. The trace means includes a sealing member (sealing seal 160) having a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) formed on one surface thereof,
The seal member is affixed to an affixing surface (an affixing region 294) provided on the monitoring target,
The breaking portion is to release the inhibition state by cutting the seal member so that a first region and a second region sandwiching a predetermined boundary are generated in the seal member,
The game machine according to Feature M3, wherein the expansion unit is configured to expand the boundary in a direction intersecting a direction in which the boundary extends.

  According to the feature M4, the inhibition state is released by the sealing member being cut by the breaking portion. In this case, a boundary is formed as a trace of destruction. Thereby, it is possible to grasp whether the release means has been displaced and whether the specific operation has been performed by confirming whether the boundary is formed.

  In such a configuration, the boundary is widened in the direction intersecting with the extending direction by the extension portion. Thereby, the boundary as a broken part becomes conspicuous, and the boundary can be easily confirmed. Therefore, the workability of the confirmation work can be improved.

  Feature M5. The extension portion is formed so as to gradually contact the seal member in a direction intersecting the boundary from the boundary and away from the boundary in accordance with the displacement of the release means in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to Feature M4, wherein

  According to the feature M5, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the boundary is pushed and expanded in the direction intersecting by the extension portion. In this case, since the contact range between the expansion portion and the seal member is narrow, the pressing force applied to the seal member is increased. Thereby, the boundary can be easily expanded.

  Feature M6. The extension portion is provided at a site on the original side in the specific direction with respect to an edge that destroys the trace means by coming into contact with the trace means from the original side of the displacement in the specific direction in the destruction portion. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M5, wherein:

  According to the feature M6, an edge is provided on the front side in the specific direction in the destruction part, and an extension part is provided on the original side, and the displacement in the specific direction is performed in a state where the positional relationship between the two is defined. . Thereby, by displacing the release means, the destruction portion is expanded by the expansion portion after the destruction by the edge is naturally performed. Therefore, the complexity of work can be avoided.

Feature M7. The trace means includes an electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information. And
The game machine according to any one of features M3 to M6, wherein the extension portion is in contact with at least a part of the antenna portion.

  According to the feature M7, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall or the like can appropriately select the monitoring target by confirming whether or not regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, at least a part of the antenna part comes into contact with the extension part and is destroyed by the contact. Thereby, since the length dimension of an antenna part becomes short, communicable distance becomes short or communication becomes impossible. Therefore, it is possible to grasp that the specific operation has been performed by performing the above confirmation work.

Feature M8. The trace means is
An electronic tag (IC tag 163) having a storage unit (IC chip 171) storing unique identification information and an antenna unit (antenna member 172) for transmitting a radio wave including the identification information;
A sealing member (sealing seal 160) in which the electronic tag is attached to the adhesive layer side of a base sheet (base sheet 161) having an adhesive layer (adhesive layer 162) on one side;
With
The seal member is attached to the monitoring target;
The antenna unit is provided with a disabled state generating unit (slit 173) that disables transmission of radio waves including the identification information when destroyed.
When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the positional relationship between the destruction part and the seal member is set so that the destruction part destroys the impossible state generation part,
The expanding portion is applied to a portion around the unusable state generating portion in the seal member so as to expand a broken portion destroyed by the breaking portion when the releasing means is displaced in the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M7, wherein the gaming machine is in contact with each other.

  According to the feature M8, since the electronic tag is provided, the manager of the game hall and the like can appropriately monitor the object to be monitored by confirming whether or not regular identification information can be received from the electronic tag. Can be managed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the disabling state generating part is destroyed by the destroying part, and radio waves cannot be transmitted. Accordingly, it is possible to recognize that the release means has been displaced and the specific operation has been performed by grasping that the identification information reading operation cannot be performed.

  In addition, when the destruction part by the destruction part is expanded by the extension part, the destruction part becomes conspicuous. Thereby, it can be easily confirmed that the displacement of the release means and the specific operation have been performed visually.

Feature M9. The extension portion is disposed inside the installation location (the sticking base 293) where the trace means is installed and on the side opposite to the side where the trace means is provided with respect to the installation location as the initial position. ,
In the case where the extension portion is displaced at the installation location of the trace means so that the extension portion is displaceable toward the side where the trace means is installed outside the installation location as the specific direction. The gaming machine according to any one of features M3 to M8, wherein an opening (expansion region 908) through which the expansion portion can pass is formed in a portion on the front side of the displacement.

  According to the feature M9, since the extended portion is arranged inside the trace means, the extended portion is protected by the installation location of the trace means, and it is possible to suppress illegal acts such as destroying the extended portion. it can. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing an extended part can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the extended portion is arranged inside the installation place of the trace means, the overall size becomes compact as compared with the configuration in which the extended portion is arranged outside the installation place of the trace means. Thereby, space saving can be achieved.

  In such a configuration, an opening through which the extension part can pass is provided so that the movement of the release means in the specific direction is not hindered by the extension part. Thereby, interference with the installation part of an extended part and a trace means is avoided.

  The feature M group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  In addition, as a new fraud countermeasure other than the fraud countermeasure that assists visual confirmation as described above, for example, an IC chip portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that accommodates the control board, and The structure which attached the electronic tag containing an antenna part is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not an illegal exchange of the control board has occurred. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, even if a fraud countermeasure that assists the visual confirmation as described above or a fraud countermeasure using an electronic tag is applied, the configuration for assisting the visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened is broken, etc. Otherwise, the fraud detection work cannot be performed suitably. In the latter case, fraud detection work cannot be suitably performed unless the identification information can be satisfactorily read from the electronic tag when the board box is illegally opened.

  A configuration limited to any one of the features L1 to L16 and L26 to L33 may be applied to the configuration of the feature M group.

  Further, for the configuration of the feature M group, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, and the features G1 to G2, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to I43, the feature J1, and the feature K1 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

Feature N1. Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If so, the trace means (sealing seal 160) that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means (destroying member 910) for destroying the trace means by displacing from a predetermined initial position in a predetermined specific direction and releasing the inhibition state;
With
The trace means includes a portion defining a first outer peripheral surface (side surface region 296) facing a predetermined direction as an outer peripheral surface of the trace means, and a second outer peripheral surface (surface region) facing a direction different from the first outer peripheral surface. 295) is provided, and
The release means is
A first destructive portion (destructive base portion 911) for destroying a portion defining the first outer peripheral surface by displacing in the specific direction;
A second destruction part (breaking part 915) that is provided separately from the first destruction part and breaks a part that defines the second outer peripheral surface by displacing in the specific direction;
A gaming machine characterized by comprising:

  According to the feature N1, the trace means is provided so as to inhibit the specific operation, and when the specific operation is performed, the inhibition state of the trace means is released. In this case, since the trace that the specific operation has been performed by the trace means remains, it is possible to specify that the specific operation has been performed. Thereby, when specific operation is performed, the fact can be grasped | ascertained easily. Therefore, the function of the trace means can be suitably exhibited.

  Further, since the release means having the first destruction portion is provided, the inhibition state of the trace means can be easily released. Thereby, when performing specific operation for an inspection etc., the said specific operation can be performed suitably.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, a destruction location by the second destruction portion is formed separately from the destruction location by the first destruction portion. These broken portions are formed on different outer peripheral surfaces in the trace means. Thereby, since the destruction location as a trace location is easy to see, it can confirm easily visually that the inhibition state of the trace means was cancelled | released.

  Feature N2. When the release means is displaced in the specific direction, the second destructive portion and the trace are so arranged that the destruction by the second destructive portion is started at a timing different from the start timing of the destruction by the first destructive portion. The gaming machine according to Feature N1, wherein a positional relationship with the means is set.

  According to the feature N2, since the start timing of destruction by the first destruction portion and the start timing of destruction by the second destruction portion are different, the load relating to the start of destruction of the trace means by the first destruction portion, The load related to the start of destruction of the trace means by the destruction part is distributed. Thereby, the local increase of the load which concerns on destruction of the trace means which may arise by providing the 2nd destruction part can be suppressed.

  As a specific configuration of this feature, for example, “the shortest distance from the second destruction portion to the trace means in the specific direction is set to be different from the shortest distance from the first destruction portion to the trace means. Is possible. "

Feature N3. The first destructive portion is arranged as the initial position in a state in which displacement in the specific direction is possible on the inner side of the installation location (the pasting base 293) where the trace means is installed,
In the situation where the first destructive portion is disposed at the initial position, the second destructive portion is provided with the trace means through an opening (breaking portion opening 918) provided at the installation location of the trace means. Is provided so as to protrude in a direction intersecting the specific direction outside the installation location of
The opening is formed to extend in the specific direction so that the second destruction portion can be displaced in the specific direction,
The part that defines the first outer peripheral surface is installed at a position in the middle of the displacement in the specific direction of the first destruction part at the installation location of the trace means,
The gaming machine according to Feature N1 or Feature N2, wherein the part that defines the second outer peripheral surface is installed so as to straddle the opening.

  According to the feature N3, since the first destruction part is arranged inside the trace means, the first destruction part is protected by the installation place of the trace means, and the first destruction part is released. It is possible to suppress cheating on the means. Thereby, the fraud which may arise by providing the cancellation | release means can be suppressed.

  In such a configuration, when the release means is displaced in a specific direction, the first destruction portion comes into contact with a portion installed on the front side in the specific direction with respect to the first destruction portion among the portions defining the first outer peripheral surface, The part is destroyed. Further, the second breaking portion is also displaced in a specific direction along the opening in accordance with the displacement of the release means. In this case, the site | part which straddles the opening part among the site | parts which prescribe | regulate a 2nd outer peripheral surface is destroyed by the 2nd destruction part. Thereby, the site | part which prescribes | regulates a 2nd outer peripheral surface will be destroyed.

  In addition, in the structure provided with the mounting part by which the said monitoring object is mounted, and the said monitoring object is mounted with respect to the said mounting part, the said 2nd destruction part is provided with the said mounting part. It is good to protrude on the opposite side to the side. Thereby, since it is easy for a manager of a game hall or the like to visually confirm the location where the second destruction portion is provided, it is possible to improve the workability of the confirmation work.

Feature N4. The opening is a first opening;
A second opening (boundary 909) through which the first destructive portion can pass is provided at a position on the front side of the displacement when the first destructive portion is displaced in the specific direction at the installation location of the trace means. And
The first opening and the second opening communicate with each other;
The gaming machine according to Feature N3, wherein the portion defining the first outer peripheral surface is disposed across both the first opening and the second opening.

  According to the feature N4, when the second destruction part is displaced in a specific direction along the first opening, the destruction part by the second destruction part and the destruction part by the first destruction part are continuous. Thereby, the destruction location by the 1st destruction part will be expanded. Therefore, the destruction location becomes conspicuous, and the visual confirmation of whether or not the specific operation has been performed can be suitably performed.

Feature N5. The first destructive portion is formed such that both end portions are formed between intermediate portions in a direction intersecting the specific direction,
The releasing means performs the unit operation so that the side serving as a fulcrum is alternately changed, with the operation of inclining the other end side in the state where one end side is the fulcrum of both ends of the first destruction portion as a unit operation. Comprising a unit operation structure that allows the release means to be displaced in the specific direction while repeating;
The gaming machine according to Feature N3 or Feature N4, wherein a predetermined gap is formed between a peripheral edge of the opening and the second destruction portion so as to enable the unit operation.

  According to the feature N5, by performing the unit operation, one end portion serves as a fulcrum, the other end portion serves as a power point, and the contact portion between the other end portion portion and the trace means functions as an action point. The pressing force against the contact point is increased. Thereby, a trace means can be destroyed easily.

  Here, since a predetermined gap is generated between the opening and the second destruction portion, when the unit operation is performed, the second destruction portion and the periphery of the opening are unlikely to interfere with each other. Thereby, the inconvenience that the unit operation is hindered by the second destruction portion can be avoided.

Feature N6. It is attached to the monitoring target so as to restrict the specific operation, and includes specific restriction means (cover member 961) that requires a predetermined release operation when releasing the restriction state,
The release means and the specific restriction means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engaging recess 971) provided in the specific restricting means,
When the release operation is performed on the specific restriction unit, the release unit is displaced in the specific direction in conjunction with the release operation, and destroys the trace unit. The gaming machine according to any one of N5.

  According to the feature N6, since the inhibition state is released by performing the release operation, it is possible to prevent the workability when the regular specific operation is performed during maintenance or the like from being deteriorated.

  In addition, when a release operation by the specific restriction unit is performed, the trace unit is destroyed, and a trace of the release operation is formed. As a result, when the fraudster performs an illegal release operation as a step before performing the illegal specific operation, a trace that is not intended for the fraudster is formed. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal release operation and an illegal specific operation, and it is possible to easily confirm the fact when the illegal act is performed.

  In such a configuration, the release means and the specific restriction means are connected via engagement between the second destruction part and a receiving part provided in the specific restriction means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

Feature N7. The specific restriction means includes
A wall portion (wall portion 964, 965, etc.) that forms an accommodation area (internal space 962) that can accommodate the installation location of the trace means;
An opening for opening the accommodation region (opening 963);
It is attached by moving in the attachment direction from the opening side with respect to the monitoring target,
The gaming machine according to Feature N6, wherein the receiving portion is formed in a portion on the back side of the accommodation area with respect to the opening.

  According to the feature N7, the receiving part is formed on the back side of the accommodation area with the opening as a reference. Thereby, the engaging part of a 2nd destruction part and a receiving part will be arrange | positioned in the back | inner side on the basis of an opening part. Thereby, an unauthorized act of inserting an unauthorized jig from the opening and releasing the engagement can be suppressed.

Feature N8. Cover means (cover member 961) attached to the monitoring object so as to face at least a part of the trace means and protect the trace means,
The release means and the cover means are provided separately,
Both are connected by engaging the second breaking portion with a receiving portion (engagement recess 971) provided in the cover means,
The release means is configured to displace the trace means by displacing in the specific direction in conjunction with a separation operation for separating the cover means from the monitoring target. The gaming machine according to any one of N1 to N5.

  According to the feature N8, the trace means is protected by the cover means. Thereby, since access to the trace means is restricted, it is possible to prevent or deter fraudulent acts on the trace means. In this case, when the release means is displaced in order to destroy the trace means, the cover means may become an obstacle. In this case, it is necessary to first perform the separation operation on the cover means and then displace the release means, and there is a concern that workability may be lowered when the inhibition state of the trace means is released.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, the release means is displaced in accordance with the separation operation of the cover means, and the inhibition state is released, thereby reducing the workability when the inhibition state of the trace means is released. Can be suppressed. Further, when the cover means is illegally separated in order to illegally access the trace means, an unintended trace is formed. Thereby, unauthorized access to the trace means can be suppressed.

  Here, the release means and the cover means are connected through engagement between the second breaking portion and a receiving portion provided in the cover means. Thereby, multifunctionalization of the 2nd destruction part can be attained.

  Note that the configuration described in the feature N7 may be applied to this feature. In this case, “specific restriction means” is replaced with “cover means” and “release operation” is replaced with “separation operation”.

  The feature N group is effective for the following problems.

  Game machines such as pachinko machines and slot machines have various electronic components such as a CPU that executes game control processing, a ROM that stores game control programs, and a RAM that temporarily stores various data generated by the progress of the game. It has a mounted control board. And according to the control program memorize | stored in ROM, various game machines mounted in the game machine by CPU are controlled, and a series of games are performed.

  In this type of gaming machine, the control board is changed to an illegal control board that is different from the regular one, or the ROM (the chip if the ROM is integrated into one chip with the CPU) is replaced with an illegal one. There have been many reports of fraudulent acts such as

  In order to deal with such illegal acts, for example, a sealing structure (so-called caulking structure) is provided in the substrate box so that an opening history due to destruction or the like is left when the substrate box is opened, or a plurality of components constituting the substrate box are configured. Fraud countermeasures such as attaching a fragile seal seal that cannot be re-applied so as to straddle the case body and leave a trace when peeled off are employed. These fraud countermeasures assist the verification work when visually confirming the fact that the board box has been opened or the control board has been replaced. There is an effect to make.

  In addition, as a new fraud countermeasure other than the fraud countermeasure that assists visual confirmation as described above, for example, an IC chip portion in which identification information such as a unique ID is stored in a control board or a board box that accommodates the control board, and The structure which attached the electronic tag containing an antenna part is disclosed.

  If an electronic tag is attached, an administrator of the game hall or the like reads the identification information with the reader device, thereby confirming whether or not an illegal exchange of the control board has occurred. Such fraud countermeasures using an electronic tag allow fraud detection based on the reading result of the reader device. Therefore, the labor for fraud detection is less than the visual confirmation of the sealed portion, and fraud is not overlooked. Is expected to be.

  As a specific configuration for the fraud detection, for example, a configuration in which an electronic tag is attached so that the antenna unit is cut when the internal space of the board box is opened can be considered. Since the antenna part is formed to be optimal according to the operating frequency, if the antenna part is cut off due to unauthorized opening of the internal space of the board box, the antenna part is properly It is expected that the unauthorized release can be easily discovered by the fact that the function does not function and the identification information cannot be read.

  However, even if a fraud countermeasure that assists the visual confirmation as described above or a fraud countermeasure using an electronic tag is applied, the configuration for assisting the visual confirmation when the board box is illegally opened is broken, etc. Otherwise, the fraud detection work cannot be performed suitably. In the latter case, fraud detection work cannot be suitably performed unless the identification information can be satisfactorily read from the electronic tag when the board box is illegally opened.

  A configuration limited to any one of the features L1 to L25 may be applied to the configuration of the feature N group. In addition, for the configuration of the feature N group, the features A1 to A15, the features B1 to B21, the features C1 to C18, the features D1 to D15, the features E1, the features F1, and the features G1 to G2, A configuration limited by any one of the features H1 to H7, the features I1 to I43, the feature J1, and the feature K1 may be applied. In this case, a synergistic effect resulting from each configuration can be achieved.

  The basic configuration of various gaming machines to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko gaming machine: operation means operated by a player, game ball launching means for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, a ball path for guiding the launched game ball to a predetermined game area, and a game A gaming machine that includes each gaming component arranged in an area, and gives a bonus to a player when a gaming ball passes through a predetermined passing portion of each gaming component.

  Revolving type gaming machine such as a slot machine: equipped with a picture display device for variably displaying a plurality of pictures, variably starting display of the plurality of pictures due to the operation of the start operation means, and due to the operation of the stop operation means In addition, the game machine is configured such that the variable display of the plurality of patterns is stopped when a predetermined time elapses and a privilege is given to the player according to the pattern after the stop.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine, 92 ... Main control apparatus as monitoring object, 93 ... Cover member which comprises means for prior operation, 101 ... Main control board, 102 ... Substrate box, 111 ... Front side structure, 112 ... Back side structure, 131: Front side fixed base part, 132: Back side fixed base part, 136: Boundary, 142 ... Depression area, 144 ... Projection wall part, 145 ... First line, 146 ... Second line constituting a pair of line parts, 147 ... 3rd line, 148 ... 4th line constituting a pair of line parts, 153 ... Breaking screw, 155 ... Hook part constituting pre-operation means, 160 ... Sealing seal, 161 ... Base sheet, 163 ... IC tag, 171 ... IC chip constituting the storage unit or control unit, 172... Antenna member, 173... Slit as an impossible state generating unit, 176. 192... Claw portion constituting the attachment portion, 193... Receiving portion constituting the attachment portion, 194... First separation wall portion, 195... Second separation wall portion, 242. ... Main controller, 282 ... Substrate box, 283 ... Front side structure, 284 ... Back side structure, 293 ... Paste base, 311 ... Damage member constituting pre-operation means, 331 ... Cover constituting pre-operation means Members 351, 352 ... protective wall, 361 ... substrate box, 363 ... front side structure, 365 ... back side structure, 371 ... cover member constituting means for preliminary operation, 385 ... destruction convex part, 501 ... for destruction 511 ... cover member, 611 ... cover member, 631 ... engaging member, 701 ... shaft portion, 702 ... bearing hole, 711 ... cover member, 801 ... member for destruction, 80 ... second arm part, 811 ... shaft part, 812 ... receiving part, 821 ... cover member, 841 ... first hook part, 852 ... second hook part, 853 ... projection, 904,905 ... pedestal part, 908 ... expansion region , 909 ... boundary, 910 ... breaking member, 911 ... breaking base part, 914 ... expansion part, 915 ... breaking part, 917 ... breaking protrusion, 918 ... opening part for breaking part, 921, 922 ... convex part for restriction, 925 ... 1st inclined surface, 926 ... 2nd inclined surface, 941 ... Tapered area, 950 ... Enclosing part, 951 ... Cutting edge, 952 ... 1st inclined part, 953 ... 2nd inclined part, 954 ... Saw part, 959 ... Cut-out recess, 961... Cover member, 971.

Claims (1)

Provided to inhibit a specific operation that is either a part of the monitoring target separation operation or a movement operation from the installation location of the monitoring target with respect to a predetermined monitoring target, and the inhibition state is released If it is, the trace means that becomes a trace state leaving a trace that the specific operation has been performed,
A release means for destroying the trace means by displacing in a predetermined direction from a predetermined initial position and releasing the inhibition state;
Fixing means for fixing the monitoring object and the release means;
With
The release means is
A destruction part that abuts the trace means by displacing in the specific direction and causes the trace means to break to release the inhibition state;
Trace providing means that is provided separately from the destruction part and leaves a trace that an external force is applied to the different part by contacting the different part from the destruction part by displacing in the specific direction,
Equipped with a,
The gaming machine , wherein the trace imparting means is provided at a position that does not overlap with the fixing means in a front view of the surface on which the fixing means is provided in the monitoring target .

Images